Home

Electronic Theatre Controls Emphasis Lighting Control System User manual

1. DRA e mee E Tg mimic eal 3S mimm II Er m 13 BULL mE 1 23 ees ETCNet2 DMX ETCNet2 DMX Expression with Emphasis Facepanel Expression with Emphasis Facepanel To moving lights no a DMX from or any DMX from To moving lights external source DMX Node DMX device external source DMX Node or any ETCNet2 HE ETCNet2 DMX device Ganna w 288988 a Mus DMX Node DMX Node CE with ports set with ports set Remote Focus Unit for input for input Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Reference Fold outs 293 Emphasis Facepanel Rear Panel Connections E XPress F acepa nels RFU connector DMX output 1 RFU fuse F 1 5A DMX output 2 ETCLink not available at console connect ETCLink to an ETCLink enabled Desk light outlet DMX Node on the network Desk light dimmer Desk light outlet Disk drive no show storage software and config loading only CRT Display Parallel Printer Remove Macro mo ETONet l Power switch Local Printer ETCNet ThinNet not supported DC Power input
2. Master A B C JABE 00000 BREN ore OJDIDIDIO OIOIO OIC O OIO NG OD 000 Ol OJOJO MIO O OIOJO OJO Ol OJOJO OJO OO OJOJO OJO OJO IOJOJO OJO Channel Faders and Submasters Use channel faders to control the first 24 channels in Two Scene mode or the first 48 channels in Single Scene mode You can also setup the channel faders to control the first 24 channels on the top bank and 24 submasters on the bottom bank Use submasters to manually control assigned channels or for additional playback faders using the Subroutines on Submasters feature Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual AB and CD Fader Pairs Use the fader pairs to crossfade from one recorded cue to another The faders can be used to take manual control
3. O n eo mes Taine tomer MA O AUN 0 EE O O Disk drive Macros 1 7 no show storage software connector and config loading only Expression Insight LPC Front Panel Touchscreen EXPRESSION 3 um e lighting playback controller Ri CU O E O Power switch Disk drive no show storage software and config loading only Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Express LPC Rear Panel Serial port Power switch MIDI thru MIDI output DC power input MIDI input o CRT Display weoooosocoos J 0000088 ETCL ink not available at LPC connect ETCLink to an ETCLink enabled DMX Node on the network i os ll m IS O Earth Ground Remote macros DMX output 2 point CRT display Local printer DMX output 1 not supported ETCNet ThinNet not supported ETCNet 2 twisted pair Expression Insight LPC Rear Panel ETCLink not available at LPC connect ETCLink to an ETCLink enabled DMX Node on the network Digitizer DMX In not supported CRT 1 SMPTE input RFU connector DMX output 1 Alpha keyboard labeling only Local printer CRT2 MIDI output not supported DMX output 2 MIDI
4. 110 Clear te re ias 173 Clear Functi0nsS 57 Clock Functions 55 GOlOLs iesus a a 63 Contact ETC Technical Services 3 Create a v3 1 Console Software Disk245 Crossfade 114 145 Que Lists AA 135 139 Cue Playback o 176 Effects naan te ew 179 Multi Part Cues 179 Hate ed 177 Subroutines 179 Cues 112 114 118 127 138 as Groups 118 Blind cee eee 138 Delete rice dts 131 142 Follow Kauna kaa whe es 128 abala LE An a ees 132 Multi Part 128 138 Hates ceris ot af 128 Record DLE Ime 115 Spreadsheet 141 Subroutines 145 Ime cs a ches Vut EE 127 Tracksheet 144 Wait Time 127 D Default Fade Time 52 Default Fader Clear Time 52 Default Level 52 Default Sneak Time 53 Delete cd saberes 131 Macros nananana nananana 186 Real Time Program 197 Dimmer Check 95 Dimmer Doubling 75 Dimmer Profiles 78 Display Colors 28 DMX Input 207 DMX Output aa 206 E EDMX ee Pe da 73 204 Facepanel Output Port Settings 206 Priority Settings 205 EffeGt vui lure DER Debe 114 Effects nee chus E 119 123 151 Attributes 154 BliNd oooooo
5. 158 IMA AA GANA 129 Subroutine o oo oooooo o 114 Subroutines 145 Style Steps 146 Subroutines on Submasters 148 181 Playback 181 Style Steps 148 Supermasters 160 182 System Manager Password 17 System Settings 50 T Technical Services 3 THING 2e roe Naat eae dee hang 127 CUASI eee sa 127 Follow 0 0 cece eee ee 128 Multi Part Cues 128 Rate due REUS 128 Submasters 129 Valid Entries 127 Wallonie e dt tars 127 Time Code Events 58 Time Code Program 221 Edit 2 maan nA NBA kn 223 Events Display 221 External Time Code 226 Frame Rate 221 Internal Time Clock 226 learn etd SERIA 223 Manual Playback 227 Record oli ms 223 Reset Loop Time 225 AP iens 225 Track ci Ae ARENA 48 117 Tracking 0 e ee eee 48 116 Back Track 117 Fill TACK EIS 118 Track Record 117 Tracksheet 33 137 144 Troubleshooting 18 U Unpark 0 0 0 eee eee 113 Update ooooocoooooo o 131 Upgrades aaa 15 V v3 1 Software Channel Limitations 244 W Walt ea AA AA 127 Website serena tana a a a a 3 Wireless Remote Focus Unit WRFU 25 WRFU 0 00 c eee e
6. 194 Record CUES cc da a 115 Submasters 124 Record Lockout 54 Registration 13 Release ti od saa 94 Remote Focus Unit RFU 24 255 Remote Macros 190 207 Connections 259 Remote Trigger 189 208 RFU caida aan tad haaha 24 255 S SECC RERO 88 Channels 005 88 Concepts 0005 89 Dimmers Lo 89 FIXTUTOS cedidas 89 A cote ade Baran iw Ameya 96 Set Channels Submasters 1 to 1 54 Show Control 211 Shut down Procedure 17 305 306 Connections 258 ESMPTEID 220 Sneak sos iaa me eb 109 Softkeys 000 e ee eee 36 Software Version 19 Solo cee eee 96 100 130 Spreadsheet 33 136 141 CUES sa al A 141 Focus Points 167 GrOUDS Leyes bea E ru 163 Submasters 158 Stage tetas adeno es 29 86 Startup Macro 190 Sub Grandmaster 54 Submaster List 135 156 Submaster Rate 182 Submasters112 123 126 129 156 181 as GroupS 00005 126 Bliecos is Dd 156 Deletes aaa sia alai 131 159 Effects a dia 123 181 InhibitivVe 123 Label Vv Aha 132 Eines cies aon Ebert 116 Load SUD coco oo 125 Pagasa id 181 PllesON i sitos as nbsa 123 A E 182 RECOM PA 124 Spreadsheet
7. rightarrow Ja ooo EE ee There is no way to poso loto to lo used to press the AT key or as part of an argument for another command evel iK KP aia release a IESO foouspomt Ji 1 i Sd dea AAA decima E EHE o enter o EN Control Interfaces 229 Keyword Abbreviation minus lus Il i abgo abhold abback abrate abclear 2 o a a cdgo cdhold cdback cdrate cdclear Q O x Q A o 3 o submode subsolo lackout o o T 3 I A bump o 2 bumpon bumpoff forcesuball fadeoutsubr fadeoutallsubr This presses and releases the bump button This is the same as bumpon 108 the On Sub Bump command in macros This is the same as bumpoff 3 the Off Sub Bump command in macros This is the same as the Force Sub Load command in macros This is the same as the Force Sub All command in macros Fade out one submaster subroutine Fade out all submaster subroutines This sets the sub pot 3 to 50 1 0100 This she A ade ib 0255 This is the B fader fre e fer hss This is the D fader Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Keyword Abbreviation Arguments Example Comments grandmaster m et JA The r is optional fevewheel w w39 These are the ML fenopage J amp Js Encoder page a This runs mac
8. 58 Release aute iR 94 Independent Channels 47 Inhibitive Submasters 123 Install v3 1 Software 246 Installation o o o 9 L Label iniciada Nad b 59 132 Dimmers Lo 81 Macros tii 185 E6velS eiie IE LEAL NG 91 Blond evi LES L RS 91 Full Keys easier eae wie Aye 91 Level Key o oo ooooooo 91 Level Wheel 92 Trackpad ooo 92 Ls eter tiers eo tite en dod 115 Clear AA 116 MAacroS o o oooooooooo 115 Submasters 116 Load Sub a 125 LOGIN GL ta 17 ISTP n a BA A dias 47 59 M Macro LiSt o o oooooo 58 Macro Walt 189 Macros Create o oooooooo 184 Delete cana spouse pad Qe sin 186 Edit iva Se tens EDU 186 ETCLink Functions 189 Key LiSt oo o 187 LeAnne tees eek aa 184 LINK hex ecard coe a md aa 115 Playback 00 190 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Remote Macro 207 Remote Macros 190 Connections 259 Remote Trigger Functions 189 Startup Macro 190 Submaster Functions 189 Manual Control 88 Master Type aa 54 MID EL ct A RR RR i 212 Connections 256 ETC MIDI Message Formats 213 Message definitions 214 MIDI Show Control 216 MSC Frame Packet 217 MIDI Show Control Commands
9. 0 a e Emphasis Serial Button Protocol EN Control Interfaces 201 ETCNet2 Emphasis is an ETCNet2 native product ETCNet2 protocols are used to transfer data from the Emphasis Server to the Facepanel as well as to any DMX Nodes and or Video Nodes within your system In an ETCNet2 system ownership of EDMX values is determined by a hierarchy of priority values The rules for this hierarchy are listed below and are relevant to multiple console systems and systems integrated with ETCNet2 Nodes and Unison Architectural Control If you are upgrading your system from a previous version of software you may see an advisory indicating that you have multiple versions of ETCNet2 on your network Though you can run your system this way you should upgrade your ETCNet2 devices and Facepanel as soon as possible To update your Facepanel simply load the Emphasis v1 4 0 Facepanel software see Installing Facepanel Software page 11 14 05 006 07 08 09 10 011 12 13 14 15 016 17 18 13 20 021 22 ARN ING Different Net2 versions detected Different versions of Net2 software have been detected on the network Although the Emphasis system will operate with most Net2 versions it is recommended that the newest version be installed on all network devices as soon as practical for optimal performance Press CLEAR to continue EDMX Basics ETCNet2 v4 0 0 and above The following points describe the way things are or the way thing
10. 00 216 Message definitions 214 MEM ocio ca ee Pee eek a 26 Moving Light Control 97 Moving Light Functions 61 Moving Light Module MLM 26 Multi Part Cues 128 138 179 N Number of Channels 51 Number of Dimmers 51 Number of Effect Step Channels 53 0 Only 11 aui sut Medie tut Ala his 100 OpenGL Settings 18 Options Settings 55 P Palettes 100 Park 2 nadaa Lena HaHa 34 111 Channels 06 112 GUOSt t woe oom 112 Dimmers 0000 0 ooo 111 Fixtures 113 Focus Points 112 CAP 112 Submasters 112 Unpark vetas args 113 Part Cues see Multi Part Cues Password 4 17 AA swe el Tee ah 34 72 CD80 Dimmer Rack 81 Personality Setup 61 Playback ii oues 35 Playback Cue List 174 POSITION 3 2 uate dw baal ae hg 63 Power up Procedure 16 Presets sini ss kani ies eS 48 Print Functi0NS 58 Printer uie sack ined Succes aver add kaa 10 Profiles revo E VERDE ES 60 Proportional Patching 78 Q Quickstep 005 179 R A IE PECES 172 Rates 0s Leu Pete a 128 177 Submasters 182 Real Time Programs 58 194 Delete csse Ka awd tenet 197 Enable oo 199 Time and Location
11. 1 SMPTE Input Port Frames per Second 30 SMPTE Start of Loop HH MM SS FF 0 0 0 0 SMPTE End of Loop HH MM SS FF 23 59 59 29 A CAUTION In Emphasis Control Systems with multiple Facepanels the SMPTE Input Port ESMPTE ID cannot be the same on all Facepanels It is illegal to have multiple SMPTE sources at the same ID in a single system Set the unused Input port s to another value to avoid this conflict Remote Macro e Remote Macro 1 System ID 0 e Remote Macro 1 Macro ID 1901 e Remote Macro 2 SystemID 0 e Remote Macro 2 Macro ID 1902 Remote Macro 3 System ID 0 e Remote Macro 3 Macro ID 1903 e Remote Macro 4 SystemID 0 Remote Macro 4 Macro ID 1904 e Remote Macro 5 System ID 0 e Remote Macro 5 Macro ID 1905 e Remote Macro 6 System ID 0 Remote Macro 6 Macro ID 1906 e Remote Macro 7 System ID 0 Remote Macro 7 Macro ID 1907 e Remote Macro 8 System ID 0 e Remote Macro 8 Macro ID 1908 Language English System Defaults 239 Express Facepanel Defaults ETCNet2 Emphasis RPU System IP Address von oe eke ed Baie he ee pde e ARR 10 101 45 101 Gateway Address o oo
12. 157 Supermasters Submasters may be set as Supermasters A Supermaster masters a number of assigned submasters When you press the bump button for a Supermaster you are pressing the bump buttons for all associated submasters Sub 12 03 19 PM Enabled Sub Tupe Labe Enabled Sub Type Label Master Sub Page 1 51 2 53 S4 S5 Sb S s8 KA KA E a NEN ka NUI NY To create a Supermaster Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 158 Press Blind The Blind display defaults to cues If required press Page x Enter to select the submaster page you want to view There are ten pages available Press Sub y Enter to select submaster y You can also use the and keys to increment and decrement through the submasters on the current submaster page Press Type 5 Enter to set the Supermaster type Press z to select submaster z You can also use And Thru and Except to select multiple submasters Press gt 1 to enable the assignment Press 0 to disable the assignment Inhibitive submasters and other Supermasters will not be affected by a Supermaster Repeat steps 5 and 6 until you have assigned all the submasters you want to the Supermaster Press Record Enter to record the Supermaster You can also press Record and a submaster bump button to record these settings to another submaster Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Groups
13. Loop to Step The subroutine runs through steps until it encounters a loop to step style step You can set which step to loop back to and how many times to run the loop Bounce The subroutine runs through steps until it encounters a bounce style step The subroutine will then run backwards through the steps until it reaches the first step and then starts again The subroutine will bounce for the number of times you set in the bounce step one bounce equals one pass forward and one pass backward Jump to Cue The subroutine runs through steps until it encounters a jump to cue style step It then exits the subroutine and automatically starts another cue in the main cue list Hold for Go The subroutine runs through steps until it encounters a hold for go style step It then pauses until you press Go Filter Filter steps are usually placed in the first step of the subroutine A filter determines which channels will respond to subroutine commands A filter of group O includes all patched channels Any other group can be used to limit playback to the channels recorded in the group Only one group may be entered in this step Macro A macro step executes a macro from within a subroutine Up Down Follow Hold 40 Manual Manual Jump to Cue Tyupe Time Rate Label 304 SR Subroutine Cues left 9977 51 52 EE 54 S5 Sb S s8 EE tse E Foe E Il PRA style Fixed settings displa
14. 000 ee eee eae 7 Emphasis Visualization 0000 eeu 8 Emphasis Console 0000 cece eee 8 Installation Guidelines llle 9 Hooking Up the Hardware 05 9 Connecting a Printer llli 10 Software Installation llle else 11 Registration sa errire a eee eee 13 UpgradoS ssc creron duie tea E a E 15 System ProcedureS aaua 16 Power up Procedure eee 16 Multi console Submaster Fader Support 16 Login as a Different User 4 17 Shut down Procedure 0 200ee ee eeee 17 Troubleshooting lille 18 How do find the software version 19 Chapter 2 Emphasis Console User Interface 21 Emphasis Facepanel Options 5 22 Express Two Scene 0 00 cece eee eee 22 Express ECS scs e eR eR RE ed 22 Expression ECS 0 00000 cece eee 22 Insight ECS ross Ve EP ABAKA Gh bake eee E 22 Setting the Facepanel Type on the Server 22 ACCESSONES lcs ated ew ee LUNA 24 Console Displays 020 cee 28 Display Features 00 cee eee 28 Stage Blind and Fader 0000 caus 29 Spreadsheet 0 0 e eee eee eee 33 Tracksheet 0 000 cece eee eee 33 atl c baie toe Ga pa ak laden baa 34 Playback sme RR ed nae aan 35 Expression LED displays 00005 35 Hard keys vs Softkeys by Facepanel Type
15. Delete a cue submaster group or focus point in Stage Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Press Stage Press S7 More Softkeys gt S6 Delete You will be prompted to enter the cue number you want to delete Press Xx where x is the cue number Sub x where x is the submaster number Group x where x is the group number Focus Point x where x is the focus point number Press Enter Enter to delete The second Enter is used to confirm that you really want to delete the cue submaster group or focus point You can label groups submasters and cues Labels can be up to 16 characters long and can contain any combination of letters numbers and symbols Enter a label Step 1 Press Cue x Label where x is the cue number You can replace Cue with Group or Sub to label groups and submasters Step 2 Type the label on the optional alphanumeric keyboard The label will appear in the keypad corner as you type Step 3 Press Enter The label will be visible in the Playback display and in the Blind Cue List or Group List or Sub List as appropriate Note Label can be found on lt S7 More Softkeys gt S2 Label on Express facepanels Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Chapter 5 Blind Editing This chapter contains information about selecting and controlling channels and fixtures for use in a blind environment where changes happ
16. Clear Unused Channels in Flexichannel Mode Setup 1 Enter S1 Purge Flexi Stage This macro clears any unused channels from the Flexichannel display Playback Macros Any command used for playback like loading a cue into a fader pair pressing Go or pressing submaster bump buttons can be recorded into a macro and linked to a cue for automatic playback These are show specific therefore there are no samples but if you find yourself needing to do multiple playback controls at one given moment use a macro to simplify that playback Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Chapter 8 Real Time Programs Real Time Programs RTP are used in situations where your Emphasis Control System is running on its own playing back events at specific times of day You will often find this type of operation in retail situations where the lights need to change at certain points in the day or week This chapter contains the following sections Real Time Programs 0c eee ee eee 192 Time and Location 0 0 0000 cece eee 198 EH Real Time Programs 191 192 Real Time Programs You can program your Emphasis Control System with Real Time Programs A Real Time Program executes a macro automatically at a specific time of day As long as your Emphasis Control System is powered up and running the Real Time Programs can take care of themselves turning lights on and off without an operator Real Time Programs ca
17. Note Dimmer Doubling is available only for ETC dimming systems operating at a nominal 115 volts 60Hz It is not available for systems operating at other voltages or frequencies Disab le Enable the Facepanel DMX Ports If you experience problematic Facepanel behavior and you are not using the facepanel DMX ports for data distribution you may find improved performance by disabling those DMX ports This is especially true for Express facepanels and high channel count systems Disable Enable the Facepanel DMX Ports Step 1 Power up or reboot the Facepanel Step 2 When the prompt appears at startup press 1 2 3 to enter the Configuration menu Step 3 Press 4 Enter to view the DMX menu Step 4 Press Enter to toggle the state of the Local DMX EDMX Input Output setting from Enabled to Disabled Note If you make an error while changing any of these settings and you want to return to the previously stored values do not press S8 Simply turn the facepanel power off and on again The previous settings will be restored Disab Step 5 Press S8 to save your settings and exit the DMX configuration screen Step 6 Press S8 to save your settings and exit the main configuration screen le Enable EDMX on Powerup and Show Read Emphasis Control Systems typically start up and load shows with no specific cue loaded into a fader pair essentially sending out all zeros on the EDMX line This may cause
18. Priority 1 and the source gs shown by color Priority 2 Priority 3 Priority 4 through Priority 18 Higher Priority 19 Nummer Priority 20 Priority KA ES Unison PTIA Mode 21 PTIA Pass Through If Active Priority 2 DMX Node 1 Priority 3 DMX Node 2 Priority 3 To change the EDMX Priority of your Emphasis Control System Step 1 In the Emphasis mode Setup menu click IO 10 Settings x ESMPTE Recone EMIDI Receive n EMIDI Transmit mm Remote Trigger ID hc coca Step2 Inthe EDMX Priority field enter the new value This may be any value between 1 20 The default value is 10 Step 3 Click OK A CAUTION Unexpected behavior may result from changes to the EDMX Priority of your Emphasis Control System If you have problems with your system please contact ETC Technical Services see Help from ETC Technical Services page 3 EN Control Interfaces 203 DMX Output DMX output from your Facepanel is treated the same as DMX output ports on a DMX Node The DMX output ports on your Facepanel can be configured locally To change the EDMX assignments of the DMX output ports Step 1 Power up or reboot the Facepanel Step 2 When the prompt appears at startup press 1 2 3 to enter the configuration menu Step 3 Using the down arrow y key scroll to DMX and press Enter Step 4 Using the up or down arrow keys scroll to DMX Output Port Timing
19. Step 2 Press Only S1 Position to select the position channels of the fixture You can substitute S2 Image S3 Color S4 Beam or S5 Other to select channels assigned to those categories If you press Only S6 Attribute y where y is an attribute number you can limit your selection to one attribute Step 3 Set levels using the procedure described in Moving Light Control page 95 Step 4 Press Record Focus Point y S3 Solo to record focus point y with levels for the selected attribute s only Dynamic Effects Dynamic effects create complex movement effects for moving lights or accessories for conventional fixtures Such as color scrollers using a combination of device lists dynamic templates and editable parameters Dynamic effects can be created in Stage or in Blind and recorded to submasters or cues for playback Dynamic effect cues and submasters can also be edited in Stage or in Blind Base templates provide a starting point for common dynamic movements such as circle can can step square for pan and tilt attributes mark on and mark off for intensity and stepping or fading color dynamics Dynamic effects can be modified by adjusting parameters of the effect in the dynamic effect editing display EN Live Editing 99 Dynamic effects are recorded to cues and submasters They contain only the dynamic effect information For example a dynamic effect cue containing a
20. circle effect contains only the pan and tilt information for the fixtures in the effect This gives you the freedom to play the same effect over various cues or submasters containing other fixture attribute settings You may want to use the same color dynamic effect on fixtures that are upstage in white at one point of the show and again on the same fixtures downstage in a gobo later on The same dynamic effect cue or submaster can be used to perform the color chase in each case Chan 391 92 93 94 95 96 397 93 00 01 02 403 04 05 06 07 409 10 11 12 19 14 445 16 1 18 19 20 42 28 2 26 427 28 29 30 31 38 439 40 41 42 43 5 48 50 451 52 53 54 55 463 64 65 66 67 68 69 EZ 475 76 77 78 79 Fader CD Cue Tupe Time Wait Link Follow Rate Dynamic Effect Cue Type Time Wait Link Follow Rate 3901 5 0 MBB En 902 3 300 Subr p Overrides Follow Softkeusl Effects Create a Dynamic Effect Dynamic effects can be initially created in the Stage display or in Blind and recorded to a cue or submaster If you create a dynamic effect in Stage you can see the effect take shape as you add fixtures change templates and modify parameters live Note You can use the Emphasis mode Console layout to create Dynamic Effects using your mouse to click on softkeys and menu items instead of using the Facepanel keypad Create a simple dynamic effect Step 1 Press Stage Note You can also create dynamic effects in Blind Press Cue or Sub Type
21. 36 SOflK8yS De aa sot dd as BANE ib OL 39 Channel Concepts in the Emphasis Control System 47 HTP yS EMP ure Ec bt perd 47 Independent Channels leues 47 Preset vs Tracking sellers 48 Chapter 3 System Settings 49 The Setup Menu 2000 eee 50 System Settings cc eee 50 Options Settings 0000 eee eee 55 Clock Functions 0 000 cece ee eee eee 55 Clear Functions 0 00 cece eee eee 57 Print Functions 0000 cece eee eee 58 Macro Liste end leer tA bit dote bal bead 58 Time Code Events and Real Time Programs 58 Channel Attributes o o ooooocoooomo o 58 ProflleS s c us i E a ai MP OR TOR anie 60 Moving Light Functions llle 61 Patel v Ho coat et o RA AA EAGER EOS 72 Interactivity with Emphasis Visualization 72 Range Patching eee eee eee 73 ED MX aia ai e thank 73 Disable Enable the Facepanel DMX Ports 75 Disable Enable EDMX on Powerup and Show Read 75 EDMX Output Range Settings 76 Modifying dimmer output a 78 Label Dimmers 0 eee ee eeaes 81 Patching to a Strand Lighting CD80 Dimmer Rack 81 Using the About Command 0000 cee eae 82 About Dimmer cee eee eee 82 About Channel 00000 cee eee eee 82 About SNOW ide ice ex hace ah 83 Chapter 4 Live Editing 85 Displayssaies ect a
22. MBB If the MBB has finished but the bright cue has not yet started the display indicates Done 01 26 PM 391 92 93 94 95 96 397 98 99 00 415 16 17 18 19 20 439 40 41 42 43 44 62 463 64 65 66 67 68 Fader CD Cue Type Wait Link Follow Rate Dynamic Effect 39 Cue Type Time Wait Link Follow Rate 901 5 300 MBB 902 3 MBB 5S ettings To enable MBB and set the delay and fade times you will need to use the System Settings menu Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Menu Enable Disable MBB for the system Step 1 Press Setup 1 Enter to view the System Settings menu Step 2 Press 1 4 Enter to select Move Before Bright Step 3 Press 1 Enter to enable MBB 0 Enter to disable MBB Note MBB must be enabled in System Settings for MBB to occur in a show Use individual cue settings to turn MBB off for specific cues when needed Set the MBB Delay and Fade times Step 1 Press Setup 1 Enter to view the System Settings menu Step 2 Press 1 5 Enter to select the MBB Times Step 3 Enter the desired delay time between 0 seconds and 99 59 minutes and press Enter Step 4 Enter the desired fade time between 0 seconds and 99 59 minutes and press Enter MBB Settings per Cue You can disable MBB for cues where you want to see a move occur live While you can edit the MBB setting for individual cues regardless of whether MBB has been enabled at the System Settin
23. Note Tosneak all captured channels out or to their recorded levels in the default sneak time press S6 Sneak Enter EN Live Editing 107 Channel Faders Express Two Scene Insight only On Express Two Scene facepanels and on Insight facepanels you have the option of setting channel levels using the channel faders Express Two Scene facepanels have dedicated channel faders and Insight facepanels share channel and submaster faders Channel levels set with the channel faders are not captured but will remain active under HTP operation until the channel fader is moved back to the zero position To operate an Express Two Scene console using channel faders please see Express Facepanel Two Scene Operation page 302 Use channel faders on Insight facepanels Step 1 The facepanel defaults to Submaster faders the Sub Mode LED is lit Press Sub Mode to turn off the LED and switch to channel mode Step 2 Slide the faders to the levels you require Groups If you find yourself selecting the same groupings of channels over and over or you always want to set levels for certain channels proportionally relative to each other you can record those channels with levels to a group A group is a simple way to select multiple channels with minimal key presses You can also use recorded cues and submasters as groups see Using Cues as Groups page 116 and Using Submasters as Groups page 124 for more information Record a group S
24. Remote Focus ETCNet2 attat e Wa DMX ETCLink SS RAS AAA are EI S Jgununun mmm mud HB T Hub Switch pa ll mmm 1 na FUN e ETCNet2 A Expression with Emphasis Facepanel ETCNet2 To moving lights or any DMX Node DMX device E ith Emphasis F Emphasis Server ARIES My Rep ce Hale Sensor Sensor Emphasis Control System with ETCNet2 Nodes DMX Input and Emphasis Control System with ETCNet2 Nodes and DMX Input Unison Architectural Control E ETCNet2 AAN rn e PC for Light Manager NCE 7867 WYSIWYG and WYSILink Emph Emph F Facepanel Facepanel E ba CRT 1 CRT 2 a Holi Emph Emph HR BEBER BUS Hub Switch Facepanel Facepanel ETCNet2 Hub Switch ETCNet2 A CRT 1 CRT 2 Video Node ETCNet2 Col gt ds ETCNet2 x 8v nx E gt ETCNet2 a ase Remote Focus Unit lt gt Emphasis Server IN ETCNet2 Remote Focus Unit DMX DMX ETCNet2 el ETCNet2 bl a Ma SSH S TA DMX Node ETCLink DMX Node ETCLink o
25. a S D RESUME Resume A B FO Resume C D FO RESUME CUE Cue 50 A B Resume FO Cue 50 C D Resume FO Start of Message Send Channel 7F 42 7F 42 System Exclusive Message 02 02 Lighting Command Format Go General Command 01 03 01 03 01 03 FIRE MACRO Macros are limited to 1 127 Macro 3 Macro 124 EN Control Interfaces FO 7F 42 02 FO 7F 42 02 01 07 01 07 Cue Number 35 35 03 7C Cue Number continued 30 30 Cue Number continued Delimiter 00 00 Faders 31 32 Delimiter 00 00 00 31 31 Stop Byte F7 F7 F7 F7 F7 F7 217 SMPTE SMPTE may be input on a node currently the Facepanel is the only input option for transmission to the Emphasis Server over ETCNet2 The SMPTE Input Port ESMPTE ID Facepanel setting maps to the ESMPTE Receive Emphasis Visualization setting You cannot have multiple Facepanels with identical SMPTE Input Port ESMPTE ID settings but you may have multiple Emphasis Servers with identical ESMPTE Receive settings In this case you would have a single input source broadcasting SMPTE to multiple Emphasis Servers To set the ESMPTE ID value on the Facepanel Step 1 Power up or reboot the Facepanel Step 2 When the prompt appears at startup press 1 2 3 to enter the configuration menu Step 3 Using the down arrow y key scroll to SMPTE and press Enter Step 4 With SMPTE Input Port ESMPTE ID hig
26. submaster effect step group or focus point When you use S2 Update only captured channels are recorded into the destination You can use the Only command to limit which captured channels are stored Update is useful when you need to make changes to a cue submaster effect step group or focus point and you do not want to include the whole stage picture You can also update cues submasters groups and focus points that are not currently on stage Note Only is found on S4 Only in Stage Blind and Fader on Express facepanels Update a cue submaster group or focus point in Stage Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Press Stage Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels Dimmers and Fixtures page 86 Set levels using the procedure described in Set Levels page 89 and Moving Light Control page 95 Press S2 Update Captured channels will become selected and you will be prompted to enter the cue number you want to update Press x where x is the cue number If you are updating an effect step press S7 More Softkeys5 S8 Step y to select step y of cue x Sub xX where x is the submaster number If you are updating an effect step press lt S7 More Softkeys gt S8 Step y to select step y of submaster x Group x where x is the group number Focus Point x where x is the focus point number
27. 3 to set the frame rate to 24 fps Note The SMPTE and MIDI settings in the Facepanel Configuration menu are reserved for future use While you may make changes there they will have no effect on your system Time Code Events Display You can create a time code program by entering information directly in the Time Code Events display or by earning the program as you play it back live When you learn a program each valid event you perform as the clock is running is added to the program with a time stamp Once you get all of the required events in the list you can go back and adjust timing as necessary to clean up your program using the direct entry method EN Control Interfaces 219 220 Time 00 00 02 16 TimeCd Event Time C30fps AZB N4 Bump Rate 51 52 53 S4 S5 Sb 57 s8 Clock SA Nin step Return Create a time code program using direct entry Step 1 Press Setup 7 Enter to view the Time Code Events display The display defaults to event 1 Step2 Press lt S7 More Softkeys gt to access the editing softkeys Step 3 Press Enter to select event 1 or press S1 Select Event x Enter to choose another event number x You are moved to the Time column Note The Time column displays the frames per second fps setting for the system Step 4 Using the Facepanel numeric keypad enter the time for the event in hours minutes seconds frames You do not have to enter leading zeros For example
28. Cluster B In general the keys in this of a crossfade cluster pinpoint the elements that make up the structure of your show such as groups cues and submasters Reference Fold outs Numeric Keypad The numeric keypad is for numerical entry This grouping also includes the Enter and Clear keys Cluster C Use these keys when editing channel levels and lists Touchpad Acts as a level controller for selected channels parameters Also acts as a controller for pan tilt parameters on the X and Y axes Use the coarse and file buttons to the left of the touchpad to change the resolution of control Express 48 96 amp 72 144 Facepanel Overview Navigation Keys Use navigation Channel Faders Use the channel faders to Cluster A About tells you specific Macro Keys Use the keys to get around in displays move control the first 72 channels in Two Scene information about your show Learn Display Keys Use the macro keys to store and through menus move through fields Softkeys Use the softkeys to mode or the first 144 channels in Single and Enter Macro are used in editing display keys to choose playback macros Macros in the Fixture Patch display or move activate commands displayed at Scene mode An Express 48 96 allows control macros Help provides information from the available are stored series of through different attributes in the the bottom of various console of the first 48 or 96 channels respectively
29. Enter Enter To quickly clear the active and background channels sourced by a fader pair press Clear for that fader pair up to four times Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Quickstep Quickstep suppresses recorded cue timing causing cues to play back at full speed time 0 When Quickstep is enabled upfade downfade wait and follow times are ignored Cues that would auto follow based on follow timing do not execute until you press Go Link commands are respected for playback order and subroutine and effect cues are not affected beyond not executing upfade dwell and downfade times at the effect cue level Note Quickstep is a useful tool for stepping through your cue list quickly You can verify that the end state of all your cues is correct without waiting for the individual fade times to complete Multi Enable or disable Quickstep Step 1 Press Stage or Fader Quickstep is only available in the Stage and Fader displays Step 2 Press S7 More Softkeys gt S1 Enable Quickstep Quickstep will blink in each Fader Status display to indicate that Quickstep is active Quickstep will always affect both fader pairs at the same time S1 will toggle to S1 Disable Quickstep Step 3 Press S1 Disable Quickstep to disable Quickstep and return to normal fader operation part Cues Multi part cues play back the same as any other crossfading cue All the parts and their timing attributes
30. Follow Label Time 0 Except Level QO D QO O Wait Track Record Clear Enter Release Focus SSCS SS e 301 Express Facepanel Two Scene Operation Overview You can use the Express 24 48 48 96 and 72 144 facepanels in single scene or two scene mode In single scene operation the channel faders access the first 48 96 or 144 Channels channels based on the facepanel type In two scene operation the top and bottom rows of channel faders access the first 24 48 AB Fader Pair O or 72 channels For example on an Express 24 28 fader 1 and 25 will both Master A B Slide the AB Fader Pair to the top of their travel away from you Playback lighting looks manually Step 1 Step 2 Move the channel faders on Scene A to the levels you want in your first look Cue 1 Lighting levels will change on stage Step 3 Move the channel faders on Scene B to the levels needed in the next look Cue 2 This will not affect the stage output Step 4 Slide the AB Fader Pair toward you to crossfade from Scene A Cue 1 to Scene B Cue 2 The speed at which you move the AB Faders determines the G O Id O o rate
31. If you find yourself selecting the same groupings of channels over and over or you always want to set levels for certain channels proportionally relative to each other you can record those channels with levels to a group A group is a simple way to select multiple channels with minimal key presses You can record and edit groups in Stage or in Blind In Blind you have access to the additional Group List and Group Spreadsheet displays Group 400 03 06 AM 09 10 011 12 13 14 15 016 17 18 19 20 021 22 23 2 L 35 036 37 38 39 40 2 43 5 046 FL 9 60 061 62 63 64 65 066 67 68 69 70 071 FL 80 081 82 85 086 87 88 89 90 92 93 94 95 096 9 FL FL FL 05 106 0 08 09 10 111 12 13 17 18 19 20 121 22 23 2 FL FL Group Label 100 Zig Zags Groups left 955 51 S2 53 S4 ss ES S 58 ES os shoe Fo poo coo E EA Edit groups in Blind Step 1 Press Blind The Blind display defaults to cues Step 2 Press Group y Enter to select group y You can also use the and keys to increment and decrement through the recorded groups Step 3 Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels Dimmers and Fixtures page 86 Step 4 Set levels using the procedure described in Set Levels page 89 and Moving Light Control page 95 Not Recorded will blink in the lower left corner of the channel area Step 5 Press Record Group y Enter where y is the target group number Note When you edit cue
32. If you would like to limit the channels that will be updated press Only x to select the channel you want to keep in the update command You can also use And and Thru to select multiple channels Press Enter Note When you use S2 Update with rates applied Emphasis will add the rate value to the cue or submaster It will not recalculate or otherwise change the recorded timing Delete When you delete a cue it is removed from the cue list along with its channel data Since each cue stores all channel levels deleting a cue will have no affect on tracked channels If a deleted cue is an allfade or block cue it may have an affect on editing or playback of background channels When you delete an inactive submaster the submaster is emptied immediately and its LED turns off If you delete an active submaster its levels will not disappear immediately The submaster LED will blink until you return the fader to zero at which time the LED will turn off to indicate the submaster is empty EN Live Editing 129 130 Label Deleting groups can affect recorded effects since groups can be used as elements within steps Deleting a group has no affect on any other type of cue or submaster Deleting a focus point however can affect cues and submasters Cues and submasters containing a reference to a deleted focus point will retain the reference but any levels that would be generated by that focus point play back as zeros
33. J8 for Insight 2x should be installed on the pair of pins labeled 1A for MIDI Out to be active To use the MIDI Out connector as a MIDI Thru connector move the jumper to the pins labeled 2 B for Insight 2x Step 5 If you disconnected a ribbon cable to access the jumper reconnect it before closing the facepanel Step 6 Close the facepanel and test for proper operation On older Expression Concept Insight 2x facepanels with keyswitch power switches the jumper locations are slightly different Set older Expression Concept Insight 2x MIDI Out connector to MIDI Thru Step 1 Locate the jumper at location J207 on the circuit board in the lid of the facepanel With the lid in an upright position the jumper should be near the lower right corner of the circuit board just below the level wheel It may be under a ribbon cable If so disconnect the ribbon cable to access the jumper Note This ribbon cable connects the facepanel circuit board to the main CPU Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 The jumper at location J207 should be installed on the pair of pins labeled 1 for MIDI Out to be active To use the MIDI Out connector as a MIDI Thru connector move the jumper to the pins labeled 2 If you disconnected a ribbon cable to access the jumper reconnect it before closing the facepanel Close the facepanel and test for proper operation E Maintenance and Troubleshooting 255 256 Connecting SMPTE Expression and Insight only In order
34. Paos E EA BL return Add a label to a macro Step 1 Press Setup 6 Enter to display the Macro List Step 2 Type the macro number on the numeric keypad and press Enter You can use And and Thru to select multiple macros Note Youcan also select macros for viewing and editing using the mouse in Emphasis Visualization Simply click the macro number or label in the Console Screens Console or Monitor layout Step 3 Press Label or S2 Label and type the label If a label exists for that macro press F6 to clear the label from the cursor position to the end Step 4 If you want to continue labeling macros press F7 to move up to the previous macro F8 to advance to the next available macro If you are done press Enter to complete your label Copy macros Step 1 Press Setup 6 Enter to display the Macro List Step 2 Press S7 Copy Macro Step 3 Type the macro number on the numeric keypad and press Enter Note Youcan also select macros for viewing and editing using the mouse in Emphasis Visualization Simply click the macro number or label in the Console Screens Console or Monitor layout Step 4 Type the macro number on the numeric keypad and press Enter If the target macro already exists you will have to press Enter again to confirm that you really want to copy over it Macros 183 Delete macros Step 1 Press Setup 6 Enter to display the Macro List Step 2 Press
35. Pick a task click Create a password Step 4 Follow the directions in the dialog to create a password and a password hint for the System Manager account When complete click the Create Password button at the bottom of the dialog box Shut down Procedure To shut down your Emphasis Control System Step 1 In the Emphasis Visualization File menu click Save to save your show file Step 2 In the File menu click Exit You may also click the Exit button at the top right corner of the Emphasis Visualization window Step 3 In the lower left corner of the Login screen click Shutdown Emphasis Server The Turn off computer dialog opens Step 4 Click Turn Off to shut the Server down completely Alternatively click Stand By to place the Server in stand by mode or click Restart to cause the Server to re boot Click Cancel to return to the Login screen without shutting down the Server Step 5 Turn off any peripheral equipment such as Nodes and Remote Focus Units Step 6 Turn off the Facepanel at the power switch located on the rear panel System Overview 17 Troubleshooting The Emphasis Facepanel type defaults to the Expression 3 console This affects the video output of your Facepanel and the virtual facepanel in Emphasis Visualization If you have an Insight or Express console as your Emphasis Facepanel or if you swap Facepanels from an Expression style to an Insight or Express you will need to change the defa
36. Pitch bend value Message values Wheel ticks hexadecimal decimal 0 2000 II 0 mm 64 1 2001 1 1 mm 64 1 1FFF 127 mm 63 8191 12 5 3FFF lI 127 mm 127 8192 12 5 0 l 0 mm 0 4655 1 228F ll215 mm 69 655 1 1D71 1 113 mm 58 EN Control Interfaces 214 MIDI Show Control MIDI Show Control is a specific set of instructions that can be transmitted over a MIDI line to control lighting systems and other controllers MIDI Show Control MSC Commands Emphasis can receive MSC information send MSC information or both You need to set device IDs for the receiver device and the transmitter device Configure device IDs for MIDI Show Conirol Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Press Setup 2 Enter to select the Options Settings Press 2 Enter to edit the MSC device IDs Using the Facepanel numeric keypad type the receiver device ID between 0 126 and press Enter or press S1 Disable MIDI Using the Facepanel numeric keypad type the transmitter device ID between 0 126 and press Enter or press S1 Disable MIDI When you enable MSC at your Facepanel Emphasis will accept the MSC commands listed below MSC commands are executed as soon as they are received In order to accept MSC commands the console s receiver Device ID must match the target device ID for the MIDI device sending the signals Go f no cue number is sent Go presses A B Go on the console The next c
37. Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Blind Editing Press Blind The Blind display defaults to cues Press S3 Spread Sheet to display the cue spreadsheet Press x to select cue x You can also use And Thru and Except to select multiple cues Press Channel y to select channel y You can also use And Thru and Except to select multiple channels Press S3 Replace Level 2 Enter where z is the level you want to replace Only channels at that level are selected Use the Full key to select channels at that level Press a Enter where a is the level you want to replace the level z 141 142 Tracksheet In the Tracksheet display you can view one channel and all its recorded levels across the cue list You can edit the level of that channel for one cue or for ranges You can also use Track to edit cues within the Tracksheet Chan Channel 1 1 Cues S1 s2 s3 S4 S5 S6 S s8 Block O soto E NN ee ee Block Page q Edit cues in the Tracksheet display Step 1 Press Tracksheet Cue data for channel 1 will be displayed Step 2 Press lt Channel gt x to select channel x Only one channel may be selected at a time Step 3 Press Cue y to select cue y You can also use And Thru and Except to select multiple cues Step 4 Press At z to set channel x to level z in the selected cue s Step 5 Press Record Enter to record your
38. Step 4 Press x to select group x You can also use And Thru and Except to select multiple groups Step 5 Press Channel y to select channel y You can also use And Thru and Except to select multiple channels Step6 Press At z to change levels for the selected channel s in the selected cue s to level z To remove levels from a submaster press At Clear Note Todeselect channels after pressing At but before entering a new level simply press Channel or Sub Blind Editing 161 162 Create groups in the spreadsheet display Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Press Blind The Blind display defaults to cues Press Group Enter to view groups in Blind Press S3 Spread Sheet to display the group spreadsheet Press S2 Create Group x Enter to create group x Press lt Channel gt y to select channel y You can also use And Thru and Except to select multiple channels Press At Z to set selected channels to level 2 Repeat steps 5 and 6 until all required levels are set Delete groups in the spreadsheet display Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Press Blind The Blind display defaults to cues Press Group Enter to view groups in Blind Press S3 Spread Sheet to display the group spreadsheet Press S6 Delete Group Press x to select group x You can also use And Thru
39. The Express LPC may be mounted in a 19 inch equipment rack or may be placed on or mounted above or below a stable horizontal surface or may be mounted to a vertical surface The LPC is provided with rubber feet use these if your LPC is portable or surface mounted and hardware for rack and surface mounting All connections except RFU are made on the rear panel of the unit All of the connections available on the full Facepanel are available on the LPC See Express LPC Hear Panel page 300 for a diagram of the LPC connections See Installation Guidelines page 9 for general instructions for setting up your Emphasis Control System Rack mount Installation 4 10 32 x 1 2 Phillips with washers 4 10 32 x 3 8 Phillips N Ze 4 10 32 x 1 2 Phillips with washers i Ba A P Mu 5 6 32 x 1 4 flathead Y y Install Express LPC in a 19 inch equipment rack Step 1 Remove all mounting hardware from the plastic bag Step 2 Place one black washer on each of the eight 10 32x1 2 screws Step 3 Attach the two L brackets to the side panels of the LPC using three 6 32x1 4 flathead screws each Choose the bracket holes that position the bracket flush with the front panel Step 4 Secure the two rear brackets to the side panels of the LPC using two 6 32x1 4 flathead screws each orienting the brackets as shown above Step 5 Check the equipment rack for threaded mounting holes If the rack holes are not threaded
40. The Server is provided pre configured and should not require any software installations for its initial use This section contains information on specific differences between your Server and a regular PC The Server contains all of the software required for Emphasis to run a hard drive for show data storage a CD RW drive for show data storage and a 3 5 floppy drive for Facepanel Software Disk creation There is a special hardware key called a dongle inside your Server coded for the software features you have purchased If this is removed Emphasis will not run This dongle is not usable on other computers and cannot be used with WYSIWYG stand alone applications Note There are two USB ports located behind the door on the front of your Server The Emphasis dongle is connected internally to the rear port of this pair so it may not be used for other USB devices The front port is available for your use A keyboard and mouse are included with your Server The keyboard may have a number of buttons designed for use with common internet tasks These buttons have been disabled as the Server should not be connected to the internet at any time When you power up your Server it will automatically launch the Emphasis applications The first time you do this the Registration dialog box will appear see Registration page 13 Emphasis Servers can be configured for 2D or 3D operation The following table illustrates the differences
41. To use your Emphasis show on an Express Expression or Insight console running software v3 1 you will need to export your show as an Express Expression or Insight show file A CAUTION Expression v3 1software is not ETCNet2 compatible If your system uses ETCNet2 DMX Nodes for data distribution over the network you should contact ETC Technical Services prior to changing your system software See Help from ETC Technical Services page 3 Export your Show File to shw Format Shows created in Emphasis can be converted to v3 1 format for some backward compatibility though there are some restrictions The file name can only be read by Express ion v3 1 if it is named exp2 shw No other file names are valid The channels and dimmers above the maximum count for the console will be lost Before saving the v3 1 show file reduce the channel and dimmer counts to fit your destination console e Cue group focus point and subs above the maximum for v3 1 software will be lost e Subs on subs some subroutine steps and Supermasters will be lost e Patch and cue data will be available for moving lights but there will be no personalities If you require the ability to edit a moving light use default personalities or create personalities with Expression Personality Editor to match the channels of the unit Patch in the same location Exporting a show file to v3 1 compatibility gives you another level of backup If you routi
42. and Except to select multiple groups Press Enter to delete the selected group s Press Enter to confirm that you really want to delete the group s Replace levels in the spreadsheet display Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Press Blind The Blind display defaults to cues Press Group Enter to view groups in Blind Press S3 Spread Sheet to display the group spreadsheet Press x to select group x You can also use And Thru and Except to select multiple groups Press Channel y to select channel y You can also use And Thru and Except to select multiple channels Press S3 Replace Level z Enter where z is the level you want to replace Only channels at that level are selected Use the Full key to select channels at that level Press a Enter where a is the level you want to replace the level z Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Focus Points Focus points are special groups that can be used to set levels in cues and submasters by reference When you set channels and fixtures to a focus point they will take their levels from those recorded in the focus point If you make changes to a focus point any channels in a cue or submaster with a reference to that focus point will play back with the new levels This is very useful for pan and tilt of moving lights If you are touring a show or if the final placement of furniture on your s
43. and press Enter Step 5 Using the up or down arrow f keys scroll to the new timing and press Enter The default setting is MAX Step 6 Using the down arrow y key scroll to DMX Input Port n Start Channel and press Enter The value of n is the port you want to adjust Step 7 Using the Facepanel numeric keypad type the new EDMX starting address and press Enter Step 8 Using the down arrow y key scroll to DMX Input Port n Channel Count and press Enter The value of n is the port you want to adjust Step 9 Enter the new channel count The default value is 512 Step 10 Press Enter Step 11 Repeat steps 6 10 for each port you want to adjust Note Ifyou make an error while changing any of these settings and you want to return to the previously stored values do not press S8 Simply turn the Facepanel power off and on again The previous settings will be restored Step 12 Press S8 to save your settings and exit the DMX configuration screen Step 13 Press S8 to save your settings and exit the main configuration screen 204 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual DMX Input DMX In is treated the same as DMX Input to a DMX Node The DMX Input port can be enabled and configured in the DMX configuration menu To change the DMX In settings Step 1 Power up or reboot the Facepanel Step 2 When the prompt appears at startup press 1 2 3 to enter the configuration menu Step 3
44. enabled on the console the console automatically sends the MSC commands The console s transmitter Device ID must match the device ID for the MIDI device receiving the signals A B Go If a cue is pending the console transmits A B Go with cue number and a list entry of 1 e Ifa cue is holding the console transmits A B Resume with cue number and a list entry of 1 C D Go If a cue is pending the console transmits C D Go with cue number and a list entry of 2 Ifa cueis holding the console transmits C D Resume with cue number and a list entry of 2 A B Hold If a cue is running the console transmits A B Stop with cue number and a list entry of 1 C D Hold If a cue is running the console transmits C D Stop with cue number and a list entry of 2 Macros For macros 1 127 the console transmits Fire with the macro number MSC Frame Packet An MSC frame packet consists of several bytes Byte types their hexadecimal values and explanations are given in the table below Value Byte Type Hex Explanation Start Byte FO Start of System Exclusive Message P 7F Star of message Send transmit channel number or 7F All Call for system Send Channel wide broadcasts System Exclusive Indicates System Exclusive Message is MIDI Show Control Message EN Control Interfaces 215 Lighting command format GO general command User can send 7F Al
45. page 47 A y in this column indicates that the channel is independent Use S1 Independent to edit this setting for selected channels Flip A flipped channel outputs DMX full when the channel level is set to zero and DMX zero when the channel level is set to full A y in this column indicates the channel is flipped Use S2 Flip to edit this setting for selected channels 16 Bit A typical control channel is an 8 Bit channel Moving lights often use two control channels to operate a single parameter like pan or tilt in order to increase the control resolution of that parameter This is accomplished by pairing two consecutive channels to operate using 16 Bits the lower channel number is the high or coarse movement channel while the higher channel number is the low or fine movement channel Channels set to 16 Bit are indicated by Hi and Lo Use S3 16 Bit to edit this setting for selected channels LTP LTP is described in LTP page 47 and is indicated by a y in this column Use S6 LTP to edit this setting for selected channels Attribute Type This column shows the moving light attribute that the channel is associated with For more information on moving light attributes see Attribute Setup page 61 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Intensity Channel An accessory channel is always associated with the channel of the accessorized fixture For accessory channels the channel of the a
46. pairs Submasters can also be activated by a cue by using a link Channels in submasters are treated as HTP regardless of their attribute settings except when the submaster contains a subroutine or the submaster is inhibitive Submaster Types There are six different submaster types Only Pile On and Inhibitive submasters can be created and edited in Stage Pile On The typical submaster behaves in a pile on manner This means that you have created a stage look and have recorded those channels directly to a submaster You can also load channel levels from a recorded cue group or focus point into a submaster Inhibitive Inhibitive submasters proportionally inhibit levels on stage for recorded channels This is useful for theatres using a main curtain where you want to be able to manually inhibit front of house lights from illuminating the curtain during bows for example If you have a channel recorded into multiple inhibitive submasters it will be the lowest inhibitive submaster that determines the output for that channel Inhibitive submasters do not contain any channel levels Channels recorded into an inhibitive submaster are inhibited proportionally to their recorded level When the inhibitive submaster is at full channels play back as recorded When the inhibitive submaster is below full channels play back at that percentage of recorded levels For example you have an inhibitive submaster at 50 channels recorded at full will
47. remain Overrides fader clear time set in system settings and clears fader ina zero count Clears contents of fader pair in Fader Clear time as set in System Settings Clears contents of fader pair in Fader Clear time as set in System Settings Overrides fader Overrides fader clear time set in system settings and clears fader ina zero count clear time set in system settings and clears fader ina zero count background cues remain Clears background channels sourced by fader pair Clears background channels sourced by fader pair Fourth press 171 E Playback Playback Cue List The playback cue list is visible in Stage Blind Fader and Tracksheet displays on Express facepanels On the Expression and Insight the playback cue list is always visible on the second monitor unless the channel display has been expanded The playback cue list displays all recorded cues with their timing and any assigned attributes As you play back cues the most recently played cue appears at the top of the list in grey The current cue appears in red with a yellow gt to the left of the cue number as the cue is fading the cue number turns yellow upon completion of the fade The next cue appears in white and subsequent cues follow in grey As you play back cues the list scrolls upward Note Subroutine cues appear in white when they are the current cue Grandmaster 100 Sub Page 1 Last Cue Cue
48. see MIDI Out Thru jumper setting page 254 Connect MIDI equipment to the facepanel Step 1 Turn facepanel power off Step 2 Insert standard MIDI cable into the connector on the back of the facepanel labeled MIDI In Do not insert MIDI cable into the connector labeled Keyboard Step 3 If you are sending MIDI commands from the facepanel insert another standard MIDI cable into the connector on the back of the facepanel labeled MIDI Out MIDI pinout for DIN 5 pin female not connected Ground not connected MIDI MIDI MIDI Out Thru jumper setting A jumper is a small plastic connector used to join a pair of pins sticking out of a printed circuit board The jumper is installed when it covers both pins It is not installed when it covers one or none of the pins Jumper not Jumper installed installed 254 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Set Expression Insight MIDI Out connector to MIDI Thru Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Turn off the facepanel Open the facepanel see Open the Facepanel page 245 Locate the jumper at location J5 J8 for Insight 2x on the circuit board in the lid of the facepanel With the lid in an upright position the jumper should be near the lower right corner of the circuit board It may be under a ribbon cable If so disconnect the ribbon cable to access the jumper Note This ribbon cable connects the facepanel circuit board to the main CPU Step 4 The jumper at location J5
49. the Bounce step will be the next to last step 3 Enter for Subroutine Fade and enter the fade time This step will not auto execute rather it is an embedded command for the Fade Subroutine softkey Subroutine fade is typically entered in the last step of a subroutine 4 Enter for Hold for Go A Hold for Go step causes the subroutine to stop and wait for a press of the submaster bump button Placing a Follow time of Hold on a cue step performs the same function 5 Enter for Filter settings Enter the Group number you want to perform the subroutine Use Group zero 0 to filter all channels Over arching Filter settings usually are placed in the first step of a subroutine Note You can place many filters in one subroutine The later filters will reset the earlier ones This way you can have a single subroutine affect different lights in different steps 6 Enter for Jump to Step and enter the step number to jump to This style can be placed anywhere within the subroutine 7 Enter for Macro and enter the macro number to fire This style can be placed anywhere within the subroutine Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Effects Blind Instead of simply fading from one stage look to another an effect runs a dynamic series of steps at a given rate Each step contains channels groups or focus points at levels An example of a simple effect is a chase where lights turn on and off in seque
50. 044 3 E 046 47 18 49 20 024 System ID u UE l u l Indicator 026 24 30 091 3 3 O 041 42 43 44 45 046 90 091 92 93 94 95 15 116 17 18 19 20 121 Grandmaster 100 c 4 05 06 00 09 10 11 12 013 5 16 17 18 2 23 24 MBB Label Dis Preset 56 57 s8 pug PAR EA Expression Insight Time Wait Link Follo Clear Cue Type Time Wait Link Follow Rate gt 100 0 M100 100 XF O M100 Preset MBB Dis Preset 104 0 1 Fadeoutlig Back ann dk z b More eDunam i c P update Ponty P oes cra eos Express Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Fader Display The Fader display gives you the opportunity to view channel data contributing to the output of the Emphasis Control System by submaster by fader or by viewing the background This is extremely helpful when you have multiple playback controls active at the same time and you want to make an edit 3 10 011 12 18 14 oS 106 07 08 09 10 111142 Cue Up Dow Wait Link Follow Rate Label 51 s2 3 S4 S5 SE S Fadeout Backornd Previous Next Select More ME Update uo Page Page fl Foder A Fixture Expression Insight display shown EN Live Editing 85 Manual Control Once you have created your patch see Patch page 71 the next step is setting your channels and fixtures to levels so that you can store cues and submasters Manual control is interactive with Emphasis Visualization so you can choose to work with the mouse selecting lights by clicking them or you may choose to use th
51. 1 if it is named exp2 shw No other file names are valid Step 4 Select Expression 2 3 Show File shw in the File Type box Step 5 Click the Save button to export your data Create a v3 1 Console Software Disk It is recommended that you keep a v3 1 Console Software Disk with your Emphasis software disks in case you need to revert to v3 1 operation If you do not already have a v3 1 Console Software Disk available you can create one using a utility provided on the Emphasis Server To create and install a v3 1 Console Software Disk Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 A CAUTION Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Exit Emphasis Insert a 3 5 HD floppy disk into the floppy drive on the Emphasis Server Logon as System Manager Modification to hardware or software components or settings may affect the stability of the Emphasis Control System Consult ETC Technical Services before making any changes Non authorized changes resulting in instability may require reloading the operating system which will restore defaults remove any changes and may result in a loss of existing show files Click OK to clear the warning screen Open the Facepanel Software folder located on the desktop Double click the appropriate software file Expression exe Expression and Insight console v3 1 software Express exe Express console v3 1 software e ExpressionHl exe Expression and Insight Remote Interface ETCNet software For use with
52. 1 to 1 Bump Keys You can enable or disable the bump keys also known as bump buttons for the channel submaster faders You might want to do this if you or your operator has a tendency to accidentally lean on or press the bump keys causing channels or submasters to flash to full output unexpectedly Bump keys are enabled by default Disable or enable the bump keys Step 1 On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis Visualization press Setup 1 Enter to display the Systems Settings menu Step 2 Press 1 Enter to access the System Settings menu Step 3 Press 1 2 Enter to choose Bump Keys Step 4 Press 0 Enter to disable the bump keys or 1 Enter to enable the bump keys Record Lockout Once your show is programmed you may want to prevent an operator from making changes to your recorded cues or submasters You can disable the Record Track and Update functions by enabling the record lockout The record lockout is disabled by default Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Enable or disable the record lockout Step 1 On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis Visualization press Setup 1 Enter to display the Systems Settings menu Step 2 Press 1 Enter to access the System Settings menu Step 3 Press 1 3 Enter to choose Record Lockout Step 4 Press 1 Enter to enable the record lockout or 0 Enter to disable the record lock
53. 24 submasters on Express 24 48 these share the bottom 24 channel faders Programmable Master on 100mm potentiometer Blackout function Trackpad e Eight softkeys to streamline operations Timed Control Internal or external clock 12 hour or 24 hour timing e References sunrise and sunset with astronomical clock Up to 500 user created Real Time Programs Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Display Functions VGA video output Extensive online Help displays available for all functions Stage Blind Fader Tracksheet Effects Spreadsheets Cues Submasters Groups and Focus Points Patch Park Setup Flexichannel displays only recorded channels Channel attributes Submaster Functions Ten pages of 24 recorded submasters each Fully overlapping channel assignments Proportional channel levels The bump buttons for all submasters may be enabled disabled or placed in solo mode as a group or individually Integral LEDs on all submasters Programmable fade and wait times Live and programmed rate control Submasters either overlapping pile on or inhibitive All submasters programmable with effects and subroutines Update function Control keypad features Spreadsheet editing Submaster list Supermasters Channel Functions 8 bit and 16 bit data types Both highest level Highest Takes Precedence and last action Latest Takes Precedence channel types Group function to proportionally manipulate channels A
54. 2x without MLM Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Press S8 Fixture x where x is the fixture number you want to select Use And Thru and Except to select multiple fixtures The fixture box will be displayed Press Focus Point Enter to prepare the fixture for control Press up and down arrow keys or to move from one encoder page to the next Press left and right arrow keys or gt to move to the attribute you want to change Use the trackpad or level wheel to adjust the attribute level Repeat steps 2 through 4 until you have completed all the changes you want to make Focus Points Focus points are special groups that can be used to set levels in cues and submasters by reference When you set channels and fixtures to a focus point they will take their levels from those recorded in the focus point If you make changes to a focus point any channels in a cue or submaster with a reference to that focus point will play back with the new levels This is very useful for pan and tilt of moving lights If you are touring a show or if the final placement of furniture on your set is not determined you can create a focus point for each of your focus positions When you write your cues with reference to these focus points and the furniture placement gets changed you can simply refocus your lights and update the focus points with new pan and tilt values and all your cues will
55. 51 52 EE 54 S5 Sb 57 58 Emphasis Console User Interface 33 Patch The Patch display is used to apply profiles and proportional levels to patched dimmers see You can also use the Patch display to patch dimmers to channels however it is highly recommended that you use Emphasis Visualization to patch your channels You must use Emphasis Visualization to create a moving light patch in Emphasis 03 20 PM Chan Dimmer Proport ion Profi le 50 4 e 75 1 2 s3 S4 S5 56 S S8 partc E gc a Park The Park display is accessed by a hard key on Expression and Insight facepanels and by a softkey on Express facepanels The Park display is used to view and edit parked channels and parked dimmers A parked channel or dimmer stays at the parked level until it is unparked For more information on parking channels and dimmers see Parked Dimmers FL 50 Parked Channels 17 142 50 5 51 52 53 54 S5 56 S 53 34 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Playback The Playback display Expression Insight only contains three separate areas containing the Cue List Submaster List and the Fader Status windows Grandmaster 100 Sub Page 1 Cue List Type Time Wait Link Follow Rate Label 2 5 E 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Fader AB Complete 100 100 Note On Express facepanels the cue list and fader status windows are integrated into the Stage Blind and Fader displays Expression LED displays
56. 6 to set the selected cue or submaster to the dynamic effect type Step 2 Press S8 Dynamic Effects to view the Dynamic Effects Status display Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Effect 1 10 06 AM Effect Label Device List Temp late Source Chans C601 C602 C603 11 Smooth 51 Ft FJ ES 8 Fly Out 10 ETSEZIES 6 Con Can 5 EISEZIES 6 Con Can 0 Step 3 Press S2 Create to view the Dynamic Effect editing display j 03 20 E Device List Parameters F50 F51 1 Size 100 F52 Rate 100 FS3 Offset Relation 0 F54 Delay Relation 0 C20 4 Distance 100 c12 Fade None Number of Loops 0 Form 100 Size Channel Rate Channel Form Channel I23 d a ag NG Source ID Step 4 Select the fixtures and or channels you want in this effect This can be done by entering fixture and channel numbers using the keypad or by clicking on fixtures in the wireframe view in Emphasis Visualization When you have selected all of the intended devices press Enter Use And and Thru to select multiple fixtures use Except to remove fixtures or channels from the Device List Fixtures and channels will be entered into the list in the order in which they are selected Fixture numbers will be preceeded with an F and accessory channels will be preceeded with a C EN Live Editing 101 Dynamic Effects will not run for fixtures that are not patched However you may record Note dynamic effects that contain unpatch
57. 64 the Intensity attribute will default to the Y Level wheel If you have adjusted your encoder setup to facilitate the use of moving lights and you have moved Intensity from the Y wheel to another encoder all control channels that are not part of a fixture or are assigned as the intensity portion of an accessorized channel will be controlled by that new encoder assignment Set levels using the trackpad Express only Step 1 Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels Dimmers and Fixtures page 86 Step 2 Slide your finger from bottom to top of the trackpad to raise the level or from top to bottom to lower the level You can change the resolution of the trackpad by pressing the coarse and fine pads to the left of the main trackpad The coarse pad has a rougher texture than the fine pad When you set the resolution to coarse levels change faster when you slide your finger up and down Use the fine setting to move levels only a few points at a time Y Axis Coarse pad Tilt X Axis Pan Fine pad Set levels using Frame Tables Step 1 Select an accessory or accessorized fixture channel using the procedure described in Select Channels Dimmers and Fixtures page 86 Step 2 Press At At the value box for the accessory will appear and you will be prompted to enter a frame number Step 3 Press x Enter where x is the number of the frame you want to use The accessory channel will au
58. Cues are one of the fundamental playback methods in your Emphasis Control System A cue is a recorded stage look that exists within a structure known as a cue list Cues can be played back individually or in sequential order in the A B and C D fader pairs see A B and C D Fader Pairs page 170 Cues contain fade times and can contain wait and follow instructions see Time Functions page 125 links to other cues macros or submasters see Link Functions page 113 and can be labeled see Label page 130 Emphasis has a 9 999 cue capacity You can number cues from 0 1 999 9 Cues can be used as groups see Using Cues as Groups page 116 and are the basic unit for subroutines see Subroutines page 143 Cue Types In general when you play back cues you are simply fading one stage look into another There are six cue types that can affect how cues play back or how cues are edited Crossfade In a crossfade cue channels that are moving to a higher level will fade in the upfade time and channels that are moving to a lower level will fade in the downfade time Channels may be tracked through crossfade cues Allfade Allfade cues force all unused channels to move to zero and create move instructions for all tracking channels in the cue This cue type will stop a track record from changing levels in subsequent cues see Tracking page 114 This is a useful cue type to use at the end of scenes or acts An allfade cue also clears the oth
59. Date Date and Time Properties 1 2 xl Date amp Time rime Zone Internet Time Date Time aaa 2003 Y Rca 123 4 5 6 78 9 fi 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 PRU eat 26 27 28 29 30 31 eee Step 5 Set the date time and time zone and click OK Step 6 Click the Start menu in the Windows task bar and click Log Off In the confirmation dialog click Log Off Step 7 Login as the Emphasis user 56 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Clear Functions You can use the Clear functions to remove portions of your show data from your show file Menu 51 2 S3 S4 S5 Sb Ss 58 um NE END Naa a END A e Clear Show erases all show information except patch and configuration settings Clear Cues erases all recorded cue data e Clear Submasters erases all recorded submaster data Clear Groups erases all recorded groups Clear Focus Points erases all recorded focus points Clear Macros erases all recorded macros e Clear Time Code Events erases all recorded time code events e Clear Real Time Programs erases all real time programs Clear Channel Attributes resets all channel attributes to defaults Reset Profiles returns all dimmer profiles to their default curves Profiles 1 9 return to their default curve profiles 10 32 reset to a linear curve e Set Patch 1 to 1 sets the patch 1 to 1 with one dimmer per channel Dimmers above
60. EDMX There is a softkey in the Patch display in the Emphasis Console that allows you to patch a series of consecutive dimmers to a series of consecutive channels If there are more dimmers in the selected range than available channels the dimmers will wrap around to the starting channel in the range and continue patching The range patch softkey is also available in the Macro Key List and Key List Help Use the Range Patch feature Step1 Press Patch to view the Patch display Step 2 Press S1 Dimmers x Thru y Enter or Channel n S7 Range Patch to patch dimmers x through y to a corresponding range starting at channel n Though the Patch display indicates that you are patching dimmers to channels what you are actually doing is patching an EDMX address to your control channel EDMX is ETC s proprietary protocol for transmitting DMX information over an Ethernet network The suite of ETC network protocols is called ETCNet2 and is the communication method used by the Emphasis Server and the Facepanel ETCNet2 is also used in systems that contain Video Nodes and DMX Nodes The Video Node allows you to see the Facepanel display s and attach a Remote Focus Unit an optional keyboard and Remote Macro controller at a location away from your Facepanel The DMX Node can be configured for up to four DMX outputs or inputs and allows you to have DMX outputs and inputs away from your Facepanel There are 32 767 addresses availa
61. East 9 12 N 7 11 E Algiers Algeria 1 East 36 47 N 33 E Ankara Turkey 2 East 39 56 N 32 52 E Bangkok Thailand 7 East 13 44 N 100 31 E Casablanca Morocco 0 33 39 N 7 35 W Edinburgh Scotland 0 55 57 N 3 13 W Edmonton Alberta Canada 7 West 53 33 N 113 28 W Fukuoka Japan 9 East 33 35 N 130 24 E Hong Kong 8 East 22 18 N 114 09 E Marseilles France 1 East 43 18 N 5 23 E Oslo Norway 1 East 59 56 N 10 44 E Paris France 1 East 48 49 N 2229 E EN Real Time Programs 199 City Country Latitude Longitude 200 Cities Outside the United States Continued City Country TER Latitude Longitude Prague Czechoslovakia 1 East 50 05 N 14 25 E Riga Latvia 3 East 56 40 N 106 10 E Rome Italy 1 East 41 48 N 12 36 E Sapporo Japan 9 East 43 04 N 141 21 E Singapore Malaysia 8 East 1 14 N 103 55 E Toronto Ontario Canada 5 West 43 39 N 79 23 W Vienna Austria 1 East 48 15 N 16622 E Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Chapter 9 Control Interfaces The Emphasis Control System interfaces with a number of protocols such as ETCNet2 MIDI MIDI Show Control MSC MIDI Time Code and SMPTE time code Expression Insight only This chapter contains the following sections ETCNet2 Facepanel Configuration Show Control Overview Time Code Program
62. Frame Table you would like to use and press Enter The Profiles menu is described in Dimmer Profiles page 77 System Settings 59 Moving Light Functions Adding moving lights to your show is as easy as inserting and patching them in Emphasis Visualization Once they exist in your show file you can make adjustments to their control at the Facepanel using the Setup menu for Moving Light Functions Personality Setup You can view personalities in your show in this display You cannot edit or add personalities here To add personalities insert fixtures into your show through Emphasis Visualization As you insert fixtures their personalities are added to this list UL4000T Fixed UL1000TS Fixed SSpotCmy SColor5755 StageCol1200 16 CMY CF WZ std 51 52 EE 54 S55 Sb 57 Select a personality number and press S3 View Personality to display the names of the parameters for encoder assignments as well as 16 Bit channels independent channels LTP channels and settings for the home position The home position is the placement of the fixture after it has calibrated and it is ready to be used in the show CMY R Dimmer No Channel Order Attribute Data Type Independent LTP Flip Home Pan 16b Y Yes 50 Fine A EELT 16b y 50 Fine f CFun 1 51 2 53 S4 S5 S6 S s8 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Fixture Patch The Fixture Patch display allows you to view your moving light patch information and set fixtures
63. Manual Appendix B Maintenance and Troubleshooting With proper care your Emphasis Control System should require minimal maintenance Occasionally you may need to replace fuses in your facepanel In all cases unless otherwise noted references to Expression and Insight facepanels includes Expression Concept Insight 2x Expression Insight 3 Imagine 3 and Focus and Expression Insight ECS facepanels Also references to Express facepanels includes Express 24 48 Express 48 96 Express 72 144 Express 125 250 and Express ECS facepanels This appendix contains the following sections Return the Facepanel to v3 1 Operation 242 Open the Facepanel 0 0 AA 245 Replacing fuses oooooooccocccco 246 Connecting desk lights Express facepanels only 247 Expression and Insight DIP switches 248 VGA monitor connections 249 Connecting DMX cable to facepanel 250 Using an optional pointing device 251 Connecting an alphanumeric keyboard 252 Installing Remote Focus Unit 253 Connecting MIDI 0 0 0 ee 254 Connecting SMPTE Expression and Insight only 256 Using Remote Macros 4 AA 257 E Maintenance and Troubleshooting 241 Return the Facepanel to v3 1 Operation This section describes the procedure for reverting to software v3 1 on the Facepanel
64. OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OFF ON ON option installed OFF OFF OFF OFF 248 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual VGA monitor connections VGA Monitor connector pinout HD DB15 female 1 Red video Green video 9 10 not connected Ground Blue video Ground 11 Ground 12 not connected Ground 13 Horizontal H V sync Red ground 14 Vertical sync 5 Green ground Blue ground 1 not connected Note n some installations you may need additional grounding An additional grounding location is provided on the rear of the facepanel for this purpose This facepanel is not certified for use in wet locations E Maintenance and Troubleshooting 249 Connecting DMX cable to facepanel These instructions explain how to connect DMX512 outputs and provide DMX512 connector pinout specifications The facepanel provides DMX512 output ports that can be configured in the Facepanel Configuration screen see DMX Output page 204 Connect DMX cable to the facepanel Step 1 Verify that your cable connector pinout matches the pinout listed below If your pinout does not match contact your dealer or ETC AN CAUTION Yourdimmer control common must be compatible with facepanel control common they must either be the same level or the dimmer control common must float Verify compatibility with your dealer if you are not sure Step 2 Connect DMX512 cables to DMX512 output connectors
65. RIU RVI and ETCNet2 Nodes in a v3 1 system e ExpressRl exe Express Remote Interface ETCNet software For use with RIU RVI and ETCNet2 Nodes in a v3 1 system E Maintenance and Troubleshooting 243 244 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Click Unzip to extract the software onto the floppy disk Click OK when completed Close the WinZip window and the Facepanel Software window Eject the floppy disk from the Emphasis Server Install v3 1 Console Software When the console is turned on with the v3 1 Console Software Disk inserted in the Facepanel disk drive the software loads immediately Note Install v3 1 software Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Turn the facepanel off Insert the v3 1 Facepanel Console Disk into your facepanel s diskette drive Turn the facepanel back on The console displays the boot screen and automatically installs the software This process takes approximately one minute The console displays the following messages as the installation progresses Loading Erasing Flash Writing Flash Wait until the Stage display appears Press Setup to confirm that the new software has been successfully installed The current software version Express ion 3 Version 3 1 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display Remove the diskette from the disk drive and store When reverting to v3 1 software some hard keys on your facepanel will change which may cause the key ca
66. Rate Label 5 WF EM 1 S2 3 S4 S5 SE 57 S8 Selec Cue Spread B Previous Next Delete More Kl Ng sor keus Blue channels Purple channels move to a higher Green channels do not move in level in this cue move to a lower this cue level in this cue 132 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual List Displays The list displays show cues and submaster numbers as well as any timing or other assigned attributes You can edit the timing and attributes directly in the Cue List or Submaster List display Group List and Focus Point List displays show all recorded groups and focus points and their labels e Up Down Wait Link Labe 0 2 Fast Fast Fast Fast Fast Fast Big Big Big Big Big Bump Up Dwel Down Tupe Labe Hold Man Man Man Man Man Man Man Man Man Man Pi le on House Lights JDDOON Ininimimimimimimimi S Group pooo ram i Exclamation Exclamation Exclamation Exclamation Channel Row 1 Channel Row 2 Channel Row 3 Channel Rew 4 4 4 5 6 3 Di Labe Focus Label Focus Label c 22 s4 ca Blind Editing 133 Spreadsheets Spreadsheets are available through softkeys in the Blind display You can use spreadsheets to view channel data across a number of cues groups submasters and focus points 3 04 OF 06 07 Of FL FL FL GREE FL FL lala 2 da FL abla lab ab dal EL FEEL FU ree FL FL bik abla FL FL FL PAE Ma FL FL Flas FL blabla FL FL FL FL aLlablah labh
67. Setup menu click IO The IO Settings dialog box will open x EDM Priority fo ESMPTE Receive nc EMIDI Receive nc EMIDI Transmit p Remote Trigger ID hc Disable EDMX on Powerup and Show Read Cancel Click to select EDMX Output Ranges When selected the Edit button becomes available Click the Edit button to open the EDMX Output Ranges 1 32767 dialog xl Start Start Start Start Start Start Start Start Start Start Start Start TUT E End End End End End End End End End End End End 2767 Cancel Set the start and end addresses for up to 12 ranges of EDMX addresses These ranges determine which EDMX addresses are transmitted by the Emphasis Control System Individual ranges may overlap each other on the same system and ranges that overlap between systems on the network will be transmitted by both systems e Click the All button to quickly set the system back to a single range of all EDMX addresses 1 32767 Click OK to save your settings or click Cancel to exit the dialog without saving any changes Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Modifying dimmer output Normally when you fade a control channel patched dimmers will output the same level For example if you set a channel to 50 the patched dimmers will output at 50 You can modify this by applying a proportional level to individual dimmers or by assigning a dimmer profile If desired you can appl
68. The Macro Playback Display 265 The Edit Display 0 00 00 eee eee ee 265 Express LPC Installation and Configuration 266 Rack mount Installation o oo 266 Surface mount Installation 267 Install Cables uerus trie dah wade hile RI 268 Configuration Guidelines 268 Express LPC User Interface 2 00 005 269 Appendix D Specifications 271 Emphasis Control System Specifications 272 Express Facepanel Specifications 278 Expression Facepanel Specifications 282 Insight Facepanel Specifications 287 vi Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Appendix E Foldout Diagrams 293 Emphasis Control System Riser Diagrams 295 Emphasis Facepanel Rear Panel Connections 296 Insight Facepanel Overview lille 297 Expression Facepanel Overview 298 Express 125 250 ECS Facepanel Overview 299 Express 24 48 Facepanel Overview 300 Express 48 96 amp 72 144 Facepanel Overview 301 Emphasis LPC Facepanel Overview 302 Command Keypad Overview 00000 303 Express Facepanel Two Scene Operation 304 Overview 06 0 en 304 Setup Two scene Operation 304 Playback Looks using the AB Fader Pair 304 Playba
69. The WRFU gives you increased functionality over the standard RFU and has the advantage of being a wireless device you can carry with you anywhere in your venue WRFU units access the ETCNet2 network through Access Points placed throughout your venue See the WRFU v4 0 0 Installation Manual for more information on the installation and setup of your WRFU ODO ma d 2 N Connect the WRFU to your system Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Turn on your Emphasis Control System Allow it to finish its startup before proceeding to the next step Turn on your WRFU Login to your WRFU using your user name and password if required Find your system ID on the Processor Select screen Tap to select it and tap OK If you have setup your WRFU to auto connect to your system this page will not display if your system is online Emphasis Console User Interface 25 Note fyour processor is displayed in low lighted text your system is not WRFU enabled You will not be able to connect your WRFU to this system To purchase the WRFU upgrade please contact your ETC Dealer Once purchased you will be provided an upgrade code See Upgrades page 15 for information on entering your upgrade code Optional Pointing Device Mouse Trackball If you have a serial mouse trackball or other pointing device you can connect it to your Expression Insight facepanel and use it to control moving light fixtures This pointi
70. Their functionality will be described in detail within the chapters of this manual Display Features In general the displays are divided between Command and Playback displays On the Express facepanels all displays appear on a single monitor On Expression Insight facepanels CRT 1 is the Command display and CRT 2 is the Playback display You can swap displays from CRT 1 to CRT 2 and back again using the Swap key You can also have channel displays Stage Blind and Fader span both monitors by pressing the Expand key Colors in Displays The Stage Blind Fader Tracksheet and Spreadsheet displays all use color to indicate the selection state and move information about channel levels Channel Numbers Channel Patch e Gray Unselected channel e Yellow Selected channel Controlled by the level Y wheel or trackpad Orange Channel affiliated with selected channel i e an accessory White Channel in selected group but not selected by Only function e Dark Green Accessory channel controls a scroller or other accessory e Violet Accessorized channel affiliated with an accessory channel Channel Numbers F ixture in Channel Patch e Graybar Surrounds all channels in a single patched fixture e Light gray High coarse channels for 16 bit parameters Darkgray Low fine channels for 16 bit parameters e Yellow Sele
71. Tupe Wait Link Follow Rate Label SUBE Lobel Current Cue If the current cue is mid fade it is displayed in red Next Cue Fogger 99 AJ MN A CO P2 Fader A B Fader C Fader Status 400 Expression Insight Express Grandmaster 400 3 Chan Sub Page 1 N Park Enabled 004 03 05 007 08 013 14 15 16 17 18 ie 39 40 41 42 64 65 66 Current Cue If the current cue is mid fade itis displayed in red Fader A B Cue 4 Fader C Cue Tupe Wait Next Cue Complete 100 100 Cue Type Time Wait Link Follow Rate i xF 5 Scen nto 2 3 5 Subr p Dverr ides Fol low Sof tkeys Fixture e1i 172 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Fader Status display The Fader Status display shows the contents of each fader pair the percentage of completion of the up and downfades and an indication of manual control if applicable Crossfading Cue Running Cue in fader Time remaining in fade Percentage of completion Crossfading Cue under Manual Control Fader AE Up Cue in fader ka Sie Manual crossfade indicator Percentage of completion Effect Cue Running Fader AE Dw Hold Dwell time indicator Effect step indicator Time remaining in step fade E 3 and percentage of step 4 i ELA gt Cue in fader dark red completion du aus indi p EDO TEN SE indicates a subroutine step Subroutine cue number in fader Subroutine Cue with Hold for Go Fader AE Hold for Go indicator 4005 Cue in fade
72. Using the down arrow y key scroll to DMX and press Enter Step 4 Using the up or down arrow f keys scroll to DMX Input Port Start Channel and press Enter Step 5 Enter the new DMX In starting EDMX address The default value is 10001 Step 6 Press Enter Step 7 Using the down arrow y key scroll to DMX Input Port Channel Count and press Enter Step 8 Enter the new channel count The default value is 512 Step 9 Press Enter Step 10 Using the down arrow y key scroll to DMX Input Port and press Enter to toggle between Disabled and Enabled Step 11 Using the down arrow y key scroll to DMX Input Port Priority and press Enter Step 12 Enter the new priority value The default value is 2 Step 13 Press Enter Note Ifyou make an error while changing any of these settings and you want to return to the previously stored values do not press S8 Simply turn the Facepanel power off and on again The previous settings will be restored Step 14 Press S8 to save your settings and exit the DMX configuration screen Step 15 Press S8 to save your settings and exit the main configuration screen Remote Macros Remote macros are accessed through the Remote Macro port on the Facepanel or the ETCNet2 Video Node The Remote Macro port connects to switches that can be used to fire macros in your show file See Macros page 181 for information on creating mac
73. View Attribute to access the Template Attributes page From here you can use the softkeys to change the Label Offset Relationship Delay Relationship or Distance Percentage You can also copy an existing template to a new template number and then alter the characteristics in the new template Note We recommend making a copy of any template before altering any characteristics This will preserve the original template and provide a comparative basis for any new changes Create a new Dynamic Effect Template Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Press Setup 1 1 Enter to view the Moving Light Functions menu Press 5 Enter to view the Dynamic Template List Press S1 Select Template x where x is the number you would like for the new template Type the name of the new template and press Enter Set the Offset Relationship Delay Relationship and Distance percentage as desired Press S3 View Attribute to access the Template Attributes page Press S2 Insert Line y where y is the line number you wish to create Use the arrow keys to navigate through the component columns Enter component criteria necessary for your intended effect For the Attribute column use the and keys to scroll through the available fixture attributes and choose which one affected by the new template Repeat steps 7 and 8 for any other fixture attributes yo
74. a look directly to a submaster Step 4 Press Sub x Type 2 Enter to set the Inhibitive type for submaster x The submaster s LED will blink until you raise the fader to full For submasters 13 24 73 108 on Insight the red LED will light instead of the green one to indicate the submaster is inhibitive Note Ifyou change an inhibitive submaster back into a pile on submaster channels recorded in that submaster will return to their previously recorded levels 122 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Record effect submasters in Stage Step 1 Press Stage Step 2 Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels Dimmers and Fixtures page 86 You can select individual channels fixtures groups or focus points Step 3 Set levels using the procedure described in Set Levels page 89 and Moving Light Control page 95 If a channel references a focus point for its level the level will update when the focus point is changed Step 4 Press Record Sub x Type 3 Enter to set submaster x to the effect type and record the first step The attribute bar will indicate that the submaster is now an effect Sub Up Dwell Down Tupe Rate Label 24 0 Hold O Effect Step 5 Select channels and set levels for the next step you want to record Step 6 Press Record Sub x Enter Active channels will be recorded to the next step of the effect Step 7 Repeat steps 5 6 making sure that only
75. a subroutine Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Subroutine Up Down Sub Type Time Rate Label 23 SR Subrout ine Sub Page 1 51 52 53 S4 S5 S6 57 58 step EH styro Dynamic settings displayed in purple Create a subroutine on a submaster Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Blind Editing Press Blind The Blind display defaults to cues Press Sub x where x is the submaster you want to use Press Type 4 Enter to set the type to Subroutine Press 1 to set Step 1 Press right arrow gt key to move to the step contents column Press y where y is a recorded cue number to set the cue number referenced in step 1 Press right arrow gt key to move to the fade type column Press e 1 to set a Crossfade fade type This setting overrides the fade type recorded with the referenced cue 2 to set an Allfade fade type This setting overrides the fade type recorded with the referenced cue 3 to set a Blocking fade type This setting overrides the fade type recorded with the referenced cue Press Clear to set a dynamic fade type The dynamic fade type displayed in purple follows the fade type stored with the cue Press right arrow gt key to set the Upfade time This can be fixed dynamic or manual Type a time value or press Clear to set dynamic or manual fade time The dynamic fade time displayed in purple follow
76. be re written to accomodate for the changes made to the frame table Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Patch To control dimmers and other DMX controlled devices using your Emphasis Control System you will need to create a patch Emphasis uses control channels to record data in cues and submasters Control channels must have dimmers assigned to them so that the dimmers or other DMX controlled devices know which channel to listen to for level information This assignment is called the patch Note It is strongly recommended that you use Emphasis Visualization to create your patch especially if you are using moving light fixtures Emphasis Visualization will aid in the Patch process as well as reduce the potential for errors in generating paperwork Interactivity with Emphasis Visualization While it is possible to create a patch for conventional dimmers in Emphasis Console it is better to create your patch in Emphasis Visualization Emphasis Console only allows you to patch conventional dimmers to channels not moving light fixtures that use personalities Also as you patch in Emphasis Console Emphasis Visualization is entering data into the show file for Spare Circuits as it has no idea what kind of fixture you are patching or where it is hung in your plot If you are not using the data management or visualization tools for a show feel free to patch directly in Emphasis Console Expression Users It is recommende
77. button for the type you have and click OK You must exit and restart Emphasis for the change to take effect Diagnostics Generate Event log a Checked Flush Event Log esservi eee eee Checked xl IV Flush Event Log on Powerup Flush Event Log now Cancel 10 EDMX Priority 10 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual e ESMPTE Receive 00 0008 1 e EMIDI Receive 0 000 e eee eee 1 EMIDI Transmit llle elles 2 Remote Trigger ID 0 000 1 A CAUTION n Emphasis Control Systems with multiple Servers the EMIDI Transmit setting cannot be the same on all Servers It is illegal to have two MIDI sources at the same ID in a single system Set the unused Servers to another value to avoid this conflict x EDMX Priority ESMPTE Receive EMIDI Receive m n EMIDI Transmit mm M cm Remote Trigger ID ASCII Options Delimiters neriie ranama iiaa Standard Level Presentation nananana anaana Hex GC Ar Mixed Case x Delimiters 4 Standard Chan 5 50 Cancel C Comma Chan 5 50 Case m Level Presentation 3 C UPPER CASE C Percent C lower case Hex Mixed Case System Defaults 235 236 Emphasis Visualization Defaults Application Options File Options Tab Auto Save Options e Auto Recover 0 0 00 cee es Unchecked e Auto Recover Save Inter
78. can be used to take recording channels and fixtures changing submasters and the level of selected channels manual control of a crossfade displays and other console features The wheels can also be used as two additional encoders for moving light control Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Reference Fold outs 295 Expression Facepanel Overview LED Displays The LED displays show the current cue s next cue channel numbers and record destinations as well as rate and level values expression Submasters Use submasters for manually controlling assigned channels or for additional playback faders using the Subroutines on Submasters feature Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual U U U 10 11 12 AB and CD Fader Pairs Use the fader pairs to crossfade from one recorded cue to another The faders can be used to take manual control of a crossfade Rate and Level Wheels The rate and level wheels adjust the playback rate of cues and submasters and the level of selected channels The wheels can also be used as two additional encoders for moving light control Control Keypad The control keypad contains various keys for controlling and recording channels and fixtures changing displays and other console features Reference Fold outs IDs in multiple server systems Grandmaster and Blackout The grandmaster fader masters the output of dependent channels patched to the system The blackout key toggles th
79. can perform some ET CLink functions within macros including Record Backup Look and Play Backup Look These commands are only accessible from the Key List and cannot be learned To insert these commands in the Macro Editing display press S8 Key List and find the RecdLook and the PlayLook commands Type their command number and press Enter to insert them in your macro Note For ETCLink commands to function you must have a Link enabled Emphasis Control System To purchase an upgrade contact your dealer Remote Trigger Functions Express facepanels and Video Nodes have the ability to perform a switch closure based upon a macro command For information on wiring the Remote Trigger see Wiring Remote Macros page 258 Remote Trigger commands are only accessible from the Macro Editing display or the Key List To insert these commands in a macro in the Macro Editing display press S3 On Trigger to close the switch S4 Off Trigger to open the switch Macros 187 A Playback Macros Macros can be fired directly using the macro keys M1 through M3 on Express facepanels M1 through M5 on Expression and Insight facepanels To access macros above the direct keys use the M key type the macro number and press Enter To cancel the playback of a macro press M You can also fire macros directly from cues or within a subroutine step For information on linking macros to cues see Link to macros page 11
80. cue s Follow is found on S2 Follow on Express facepanels See Follow page 126 S3 Rate to change the rate setting for the selected cue s See Rate page 126 Label to add a label to the selected cue s See Label page 130 Alternatively you can press the right and left arrow gt and keys to move through the cue list columns The prompt area will display instructions for setting each available attribute as you move from column to column Delete cues within the cue list display Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Press Blind The Blind display defaults to cues Press S2 Cue List to display the cue list Press S6 Delete Cue Press x to select cue x You can also use And Thru and Except to select multiple cues Press Enter to delete the selected cue s To delete the cue s and any levels tracking forward press Track Enter To abort the delete command press Clear Press Enter to confirm that you really want to delete the cue s Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Spreadsheet In the Cue Spreadsheet you can see channel levels for recorded cues in a spreadsheet layout You can edit or delete cues one at a time or by selecting ranges You can also use Track to edit cues and you can create new cues within the spreadsheet Using the replace level feature you can change channels at one level to a new level without having to select them individu
81. display Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 166 Press Blind The Blind display defaults to cues Press Focus Point Enter to view focus points in Blind Press S3 Spread Sheet to display the Focus Point Spreadsheet Press S6 Delete Focus Press x to select focus point x You can also use And Thru and Except to select multiple focus points Press Enter to delete the selected focus point s Press Enter to confirm that you really want to delete the focus point s Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Replace levels in the spreadsheet display Step 1 Press Blind The Blind display defaults to cues Step 2 Press Focus Point Enter to view focus points in Blind Step 3 Press S3 Spread Sheet to display the Focus Point Spreadsheet Step 4 Press x to select focus point x You can also use And Thru and Except to select multiple focus points Step 5 Press Channel y to select channel y You can also use And Thru and Except to select multiple channels Step 6 Press S3 Replace Level z Enter where z is the level you want to replace Only channels at that level are selected Use the Full key to select channels at that level Step 7 Press a Enter where a is the level you want to replace the level 2 Blind Editing 167 This page intentionally blank 168 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Chapter 6 Playback E
82. displayed in the keypad corner before pressing Enter The event is moved to the new time If multiple events are selected the first selected event moves to the new time and other selected events are moved maintaining their original relationship to the first event in time Note To move a single event you can also use the arrow keys to highlight the code time for the event you want to move then press or to adjust the timing Copy time code events Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Press Setup 7 Enter to view the Time Code Events display Press S7 More Softkeys gt S2 Copy Event Press x Enter to select event x Use the And and Thru keys to select multiple events Using the Facepanel numeric keypad enter the new time for the event in hours minutes seconds frames You do not have to enter leading zeros For example to enter a time of 00 03 45 00 press 3 4 5 0 0 The keypad corner displays your entry as you type Make sure the correct time is displayed in the keypad corner before pressing Enter The event is copied to the new time If multiple events are selected the first selected event copies to the new time and other selected events are copied maintaining their original relationship to the first event in time Insert time code events Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Press Setup 7 Enter to view the Time Code Events display Press lt S7 More Softkeys gt S
83. each Built in interfaces Upto 1 536 DMX512 outputs 2 048 on Expression ECS Remote Focus Unit e Supports CE dimming systems Remote Macro control Alphanumeric keyboard Time code control either MIDI or SMPTE DMX512 Input port e Serial mouse Fader functions Fade times programmable from 0 1 seconds to 99 59 minutes Manual override of upfade and or downfade Rate override Split time fades Manual fades Background fades with LTP channels User selectable default fade times e Hold Back functions Playback controls Two timed manual fader pairs e Two Go buttons Two Holg buttons Two Back buttons e Two Rate buttons e Two Clear buttons 24 submasters e Programmable Grandmaster e Blackout function Level wheel Rate wheel Eight softkeys to streamline operations Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Timed control Internal or external clock 12 hour or 24 hour timing References sunrise and sunset with astronomical clock Up to 500 user created Real Time Programs Display functions Two VGA video outputs Extensive online Help displays available for all functions Stage Blind Fader Effects Tracksheet Spreadsheets Cues Submasters Groups and Focus Points Patch Park Setup Flexichannel displays only recorded channels Expand Channel attributes Submaster functions Ten pages of 24 recorded submasters each Fully overlapping channel assignme
84. effect Use And and Thru to select multiple devices at a time Use Except to remove specific channels from the fixture list Use the mouse in the Emphasis mode console displays to select fixtures within the list Fixtures added when another fixture number is selected displayed in yellow will be inserted above the selected fixture Adjustable Parameters in Dynamic Effects Every dynamic effect will be created from a base Dynamic Effect Template These templates contain specific information to initially set up dynamic movement of a specific type You can alter the appearance of a dynamic effect by overriding these parameters and recording the adjusted effect to a cue or submaster You can make these parameter adjustments in Stage as you create the effect which allows you to immediately see how your adjustments change the effect or you can view the recorded dynamic effect in Blind and adjust parameters there EN Live Editing inmate E Fixtur 03 20 PM Label Template Device List Parameters 50 Size 100 Rate 100 Offset Relation 0 Delay Relation 0 4 Distance 100 Fade None Number of Loops 0 Form 100 Size Channel 0 Rate Channel 0 Form Channel AGO KATO 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 0 1 Source ID 1 Devices 103 104 Adjust the parameters of a dynamic effect Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 View the dynamic effect in the Dynamic Effect editing display or by viewing the selected cue or submaster in Blin
85. effect using the submaster s bump button In this case the submaster will follow the bump status set in the Submaster List see Submaster List page 154 and will play the effect in the timing recorded to the submaster see Submasters page 127 Subroutines on Submasters Subs on Subs EN Playback When Subs on Subs are played back it is as if you have added fader pairs to the system LTP and HTP channels interact as if they are playing back on the A B or C D fader pairs The submaster fader masters the intensity channels Play back a subroutine on a submaster Step 1 Bring the submaster fader up to full or to the level you want Step 2 Press the submaster bump button to start the subroutine running Play back a subroutine using Go To Step Step 1 If the subroutine is not currently active make sure the submaster fader is above zero Step 2 Press S7 More Softkeys gt S5 Go To Subr Step x where x is the step number you want to go to Step 3 Press the bump button of the submaster containing the subroutine The step indicated in step 2 above will play back and the subroutine will continue to run as recorded Fade out a subroutine on a submaster Step 1 Press Stage or Fader The Fadeout Subroutine command is only available in the Stage and Fader displays Step 2 Press S1 Fadeout Subr and then the bump button of the submaster containing the subroutine you want to fade out Press Enter instead of a bum
86. enerai Cluster C Use these keys when editing Touchpad Acts as a level ll ntrolling assigned channels or Pairs Use the fader gt ng controller for selected channels manually co g assig The Grandmaster fader masters airs Use the fade shakeys in thie cluster channel levels and lists for additional playback faders using the i fade f 1e Key parameters Also acts as a ora play g the output of dependent channels pairs to crossfade from inpoint tha elamenis Subroutines on Submasters feature ded pinp 5 controller for pan tilt parameters mee patched to the system The one recorded eue Tu that make up the Numeric Keypad The numeric keypad is Blackout key toggles the output of another The faders can p Y celica on the X and Y axes Use the y 1099 p structure of your show for numerical entry This grouping also the system Independent be used to take manual coarse and file buttons to the left ysiem OPD such as groups cues includes the Enter and Clear keys er ta chande the channels are not affected control of a crossfade d eubmst p g ang sUpinastels resolution of control Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Reference Fold outs 299 Emphasis LPC Facepanel Overview Express LPC Front Panel Read from disk RFU fuse F 1 6A
87. from any screen including changes made at facepanel Presentation Features e Configurable reports from data e Configurable plot printing Images from render amp screen bitmaps Worksheet for plot notes Multi format output WY SILink Message log Configurable can be filtered for message type Messaging dependent on AF Standard option for Sensor Dimming system Pop up messages e WYSILink Add On Features About Dimmer About Rack Node Device manager Backup look recording amp playback Graphic dimmer error indication in wireframe views Highlighted dimmer error indication in data views EDMX monitoring E Specifications 275 Express Facepanel Specifications Electrical e Voltage input 100 240 VAC 50 60 Hz Maximum current 0 8 amps Built In Interfaces Up to 1 024 DMX512 outputs Remote Focus Unit Remote Macro control Remote Trigger option MIDI Time code control Console lights Fader Functions Fade times programmable from 0 1 seconds to 99 59 minutes Manual override of upfade and or downfade Rate override Split time fades Manual fades e Background fades with LTP channels User selectable default fade times e Hold Back functions e Two scene preset on all but Express ECS 125 250 facepanels Playback Controls Two timed manual fader pairs e Two Go buttons e Two Hold buttons Two Back buttons Two Rate buttons Two Clear buttons
88. ik 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 01 01 01 01 01 01 02 03 04 OS 26 07 08 OS J 2 13 14 15 FL FL FL FL FL IRE FL FL FL FL FL FL Channel Focus N3 06 07 08 09 10 4 12 13 14 15 6 17 18 19 20 EC ELEL 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 02 02 02 02 02 5S0 1 Icy 3c H t SE 134 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Tracksheet The Tracksheet displays all the cue information for a single channel You can see each recorded level for a single channel across the entire cue list viewing how many cues the channel is recorded into where the channel moves up or down as well as where the channel tracks through consecutive cues at the same level You can also make edits to a cue or a range of cues for that channel L Chan 4 03 19 PM s3 es 3 i S1 2 S4 S5 L Ls i as Page Page Blind Editing 135 Cues Blind allows you to edit cues and cue attributes without affecting the stage output This is useful when you are in the middle of a rehearsal or performance and you need to make a change Blind also allows you to see more detailed information about cues that contain multiple parts effects or subroutines Edit cues in Blind Step 1 Press Blind The Blind display defaults to cues Step 2 Press x Enter to select cue x You can also use the and keys to increment and decrement through the cue list Step 3 Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels Dimmers and Fixtures page 86 S
89. includes the Enter as a controller for pan tilt parameters on of a crossfade groups cues and submasters and Clear keys the X and Y axes Use the coarse and file buttons to the left of the touchpad to change the resolution of control Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Reference Fold outs 297 Express 24 48 Facepanel Overview Grandmaster and Blackout The Grandmaster fader masters the output of dependent channels patched to the system The Blackout key toggles the output of the system Independent channels are not affected Display Keys Use the display keys to choose from the available console displays Cluster A About tells you specific information about your show Learn and Enter Macro are used in editing macros Help provides information about console commands Macro Keys Use the macro keys to store and playback macros Macros are stored series of console commands Navigation Keys Use navigation keys to get around in displays move through menus move through fields in the Fixture Patch display or move through different attributes in the Fixture Box Softkeys Use the softkeys to activate commands displayed at the bottom of various console displays Channels ejej ODD
90. is usually displayed After you have executed the appropriate cue or established the appropriate console state use the procedure below to enable EDMX Step 3 Click OK Enable Disable EDMX manually Step 1 Press Setup on the Facepanel or on the virtual Facepanel in Emphasis Visualization Step 2 Press S8 Enable EDMX Enter to enable EDMX transmission after a powerup show load or manual disable S8 Disable EDMX Enter to disable EDMX transmission manually EDMX Output Range Settings EDMX Output Range settings can be used to limit the EDMX output of the Emphasis Control System This is particularly useful in networks with multiple Emphasis systems controlling various ranges of EDMX addresses This feature does not affect which addresses can be patched parked flashed or checked It only affects which EDMX levels are transmitted EDMX addresses not included in the controllable range for a system will not be transmitted to Emphasis Visualization or to the system as a whole An individual system can have up to 12 ranges of EDMX addresses assigned Systems may overlap addresses within their active ranges EDMX addresses that are unavailable to a system will be displayed in purple in the Emphasis Console Patch and About Dimmer displays System Settings 75 76 Set EDMX ranges for the Emphasis Control System Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 In Emphasis Visualization in the Emphasis mode
91. levels needed in the next look Cue 2 This will not affect the stage output Step 4 Press AB Rate x Enter where x is the upfade time Step 5 Press x Enter where x is the downfade time If the downfade time is the same as the upfade time just press Enter The Rate key will blink to indicate that it is active Step 6 Move the AB Faders toward you When they reach the end of travel the timed fade will begin Timing will remain active on the AB Fader Pair until you press AB Rate again Note You can pause a timed crossfade using the AB Hold key To resume the fade press AB Go Index Numerics 16 Bit Be eh ee es 58 A A B Fader Pair 172 AbOUt 52x Lt aad SL 82 Channel 2 065 82 DIMME sedis ta evum 82 Show aaa 83 NEL 48 114 145 Aa a ts th prn 91 Attribute Setup 62 B Back 22 eed ed nan NS 172 Back Track 48 117 Background fades 178 Cle akin maaninag Pars 178 Beam ideni Cem de obe ups 63 Blackout Key 04 53 Blind e 29 134 BlOCK vied hv Lee us 114 Blocked Channel 48 Blocked Channels 139 Blocking s xis Satire bts 145 Bump KeyS 00 00 eee eae 54 C C D Fader Pair 172 Captured channels 94 Release 94 Channel Attributes 58 Channel Check 95 Channel Faders
92. levels within Visualization Set levels using At Step 1 Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels Dimmers and Fixtures page 86 Step 2 Press At x where x is the two digit percentage You can repeat pressing At x until you have achieved the output you like without re selecting the channels each time unless you record those levels or otherwise deselect the channels Note Channel 1 At 5 Enter sets channel 1 to a level of 50 Using this syntax you can skip the zero in levels like 10 20 30 and so on If you want to set a level lower than 10 you must enter the leading zero At 0 5 to set 5 Set levels using Full or Level Step 1 Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels Dimmers and Fixtures page 86 Step 2 Press Full to set the channel s to 100 or press Level to set the channel s to the output level set in Default Level page 52 EN Live Editing 89 Set levels using the level wheel Expression Insight only Step 1 Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels Dimmers and Fixtures page 86 Step 2 Roll the level wheel away from you to raise the level or toward you to lower the level Note Control channels that are not part of a fixture or accessorized channel now default to control by the Intensity attribute If you have not modified the encoder setup of your console see Encoder Setup Options page
93. load from the Emphasis Software Disk 1 You will be prompted to load subsequent disks by the disk utility Eject the first disk and load the next disk and press ENTER When completed you will be prompted to remove the final CD from the drive and restart the Emphasis Server You can restart the Emphasis Server by pressing the power button twice or by pressing CTRL ALT DELETE After a new version of software has been installed on your Emphasis Server you will need to install Facepanel Software See Installing Facepanel Software page 11 for that procedure Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Registration When you first start your Emphasis Control System you will be prompted to register the system Registration will enable ETC to track your system for support purposes and will enroll your system in the software subscription included with your Emphasis Control System providing you with software upgrades for the duration of the subscription I x Please take a moment to register this Emphasis system You can use an unregistered Emphasis for 15 days after installation of which you have this many days left D days left to use Register Later Emphasis unregistered Exit without registration M Step 1 Registration Submit your registration information in one of these ways Phone Step 2 Validation When you have registered in Step 1 you will be given a registration validation code to be entered into Emphasi
94. manual fader pairs with Go Hold Rate Clear and Back keys Individual last action fade capability for each channel Submasters 24 submasters with bump buttons and integral LEDs 108 on Insight Encoders Expression Insight only Five Moving Light attribute encoders Rate and Level wheels Expression Insight only Trackpad Express only Master slider Blackout button Channel faders and bump buttons Two Scene operation available on Express 24 48 48 96 72 144 Interfaces DMX512 Configurable Outputs Ethernet MIDI MIDI Show Control MIDI Time Code SMPTE Expression Insight only Remote Focus Unit RFU Remote Macro Go Remote Trigger Control Keypad Features Cue attributes 9 999 Cues in the range 1 to 999 9 Split up down fade times Wait times Follow time Link to cue macro or subroutine Modified rate Label Eight part multipart cues Selective cue recording Channel Functions Lists constructed with And Thru Sneak sets channel to discrete or fader level in default specified time Only and Except features for group and channel manipulation Channel Attribute display Independent channel capability Flip provides inversion of pan tilt or lamp scroll programming Last Action Channels Dual fader wheels and five control attributes for moving lights Expression Insight only Moving Light Functions Six pages of attribute encoders Expression Insight only Focus Points 16 bit fa
95. of Channels Step 3 Using the numeric keypad on the Facepanel or the virtual facepanel type in the desired number of channels and press Enter System Settings 51 Default Fade Time Emphasis assumes a five second default for cue upfade and downfade times You can change this default time to whatever you like Each cue you record after you change this default will have the new time recorded Changing this setting will not affect cues recorded prior to the change See Cues page 125 for more information Use the following guidelines when entering time values in Emphasis e Times can range from 0 1 seconds to 99 59 minutes Zero timing is also available Use a decimal point for times less than one second 0 1 0 9 second e Two digit entries are calculated in seconds 42 42 seconds 90 1 minute 30 seconds Three and four digit entries are calculated in minutes and seconds 330 3 minutes 30 seconds 1075 11 minutes 15 seconds Change the default fade times Step 1 On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis Visualization press Setup 1 Enter to display the Systems Settings menu Step 2 Press 3 Enter to choose Default Fade Time Step 3 Using the numeric keypad on the Facepanel or the virtual facepanel type in the desired default upfade time and press Enter Step 4 Using the numeric keypad on the Facepanel or the virtual facepanel type in the desired default downfade time and press Ent
96. of the unit All of the connections available on the full Facepanel are available on the LPC with the addition of 24 Remote Macros for a total of 32 Remote Macros See Expression Insight LPC Rear Panel page 300 for a diagram of the LPC connections Installation Guidelines Make sure to leave at least six inches of space behind the unit s fan to ensure proper cooling e See Installation Guidelines page 9 for general instructions for setting up your Emphasis Control System Configuration Guidelines The Expression Insight LPC requires a configuration setting to tell the Emphasis Server that it has no integral submaster faders It also provides additional Remote Macros that may require some configuration These settings are described here Note You have the same configuration options for DMX input output and show control protocols MIDI MSC and SMPTE that the full Facepanel provides These settings are described in Control Interfaces page 201 Enter the configuration menu on the Expression Insight LPC Step 1 Power up or reboot the LPC and turn on the monitor Step 2 When the prompt appears on the monitor at startup press 1 2 3 on the touchscreen or RFU to enter the configuration menu Once you have entered the configuration menu use the touchscreen to enter data Set the LPC Mode Step 1 Enter the configuration menu Step 2 Using the arrow keys on the touchscreen highlight the Lighting Playback Controller
97. on Express facepanels 164 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Delete focus points within the Focus Point List display Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Press Blind The Blind display defaults to cues Press Focus Point Enter to view focus points in Blind Press S2 Focus List to display the Focus Point List Press S6 Delete Focus Press x to select focus point x You can also use And Thru and Except to select multiple focus points Press Enter to delete the selected focus point s To abort the delete command press Clear Press Enter to confirm that you really want to delete the focus point s Focus Point Spreadsheet In the Focus Point Spreadsheet you can see channel levels for all recorded focus points in a spreadsheet layout You can edit or delete focus points one at a time or by selecting ranges Using the replace level feature you can change channels at one level to a new level without having to select them individually Chan nnels 02 04 06 07 09 40 11 12 13 14 15 46 17 18 19 57 214 14 89 FL 55 47 41 30 78 FL 43 56 14 33 07 FL 49 51 77 33 22 FL 45 AN CAUTION Unlike the Stage and Blind displays changes made in the spreadsheet are recorded immediately without the need for the additional Record command Changes made in the spreadsheet will be stored but will not update levels on stage until you replay cues or submasters or recall th
98. on the facepanel rear panel see Emphasis Facepanel Rear Panel Connections page 294 DMX512 pinout for five pin XLR female Push f pao 7 a b Peo o oy 2 O a O O 250 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Using an optional pointing device Expression and Insight 3 and ECS facepanels have a dedicated port to which a serial pointing device such as a mouse trackball or trackpad can be connected The device must be Microsoft compatible This pointing device is used specifically for controlling pan and tilt of moving light fixtures and cannot be used to access screens on the Emphasis Server Installation Switch off the power to the facepanel Connect the pointing device to the RS 232 Mouse connector at the left side of the facepanel rear panel see Emphasis Facepanel Rear Panel Connections page 294 Device check The pointing device should be ready for use when the system has completed boot up Verify normal operation by patching fixtures as explained in the Emphasis Visualization User Manual Movement of the pointing device should control pan and tilt levels its buttons should reselect fixtures in the Fixture Box window If the device doesn t function as described above Step 1 Verify that the pointing device is Microsoft compatible Step 2 Verify that the pointing device works normally in another system such as with a computer Step 3 If you still have a problem after making the verifications see Hel
99. option in the menu and press Enter Step 3 Press Enter to toggle the Lighting Playback Controller Mode from Disabled to Enabled When LPC Mode is Enabled the Emphasis Control System will know there are no submaster faders at the Facepanel and will allow submaster control from the Emphasis Console screens within Emphasis Visualization When LPC Mode is Disabled the Emphasis Control System will expect submaster faders at the Facepanel and will not allow submaster control from the Emphasis Console screens within Emphasis Visualization Step 4 Press S8 to save your settings and exit to the main configuration menu Configure Remote Macros See Hemote Macros page 205 for setting the Remote Macro assignments 262 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Expression Insight LPC User Interface The C The Expression Insight LPC is a rack mountable unit containing the control electronics for the Emphasis Facepanel It has an LCD touchscreen that provides limited programming capability You can also use a Remote Focus Unit to input commands to an LPC unit The Cue Playback and Macro Playback displays have a pair of arrow keys in the upper right corner that can be used to move from screen to screen The Edit display has a single up arrow key in the lower right corner that will return you to the Macro screen ue Playback Display The Cue Playback display includes a numeric keypad for selecting cue numbers and Go Hold Back and Clea
100. or dimmer at a level but you do not want to record it at that level in your cues use the Except or Solo commands see Special Functions page 128 or the Park command see Park page 109 Record pile on submasters Step 1 Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels Dimmers and Fixtures page 86 Step 2 Set levels using the procedure described in Set Levels page 89 and Moving Light Control page 95 Step 3 Press Record Sub x Enter where x is the target submaster number If the target submaster number has already been recorded a Sub Recorded message will blink on the stage display If you choose to record to a used number the new look will overwrite the old look You may also press Record Sub Bump to record a look directly to a submaster Record inhibitive submasters Step 1 Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels Dimmers and Fixtures page 86 Step 2 Set levels using the procedure described in Set Levels page 89 and Moving Light Control page 95 In the Stage display only channels with levels are recorded to a submaster Step 3 Press Record Sub x Enter where x is the target submaster number If the target submaster number has already been recorded a Sub Recorded message will blink on the stage display If you choose to record to a used number the new look will overwrite the old look You may also press Record Sub Bump to record
101. play back at 5096 When an inhibitive submaster s fader is at the zero position those channels will not play back at all Note Inhibitive submasters do not affect captured channels Effect Effect submasters can be created in Stage or Blind see Blind Effects page 149 The advantage of working in Stage is that you can see the look of each effect step as it is created An effect is made up of channels at levels in steps Steps are played back in the effect at a given rate and in a given direction Typically effects will loop their steps so that they can play continuously In Blind effect steps can be randomized and can be assigned other attributes that affect their playback Dynamic E ffects See Create a simple dynamic effect page 100 Subroutine See Subroutines on Submasters Subs on Subs page 146 EN Live Editing 121 Supermaster See Supermasters page 158 Record Submasters Recording a submaster is very similar to recording a cue All active channels are recorded to the submaster unless you use the Except or Solo commands See Special Functions page 128 Note Remember that the Record function will store all Stage levels in the cue group or submaster you specify Make sure that you have cleared all unwanted channels before recording your cues Stray channel levels may come from captured channels active submasters cues in the fader pairs or channels in the background If you need to leave a channel
102. play back using that new focus information Focus points can be associated with focus positions in Emphasis Visualization See the Emphasis Visualization User Manual for more information on linking a focus position to a focus point Note Focus points can store data for any channel in your show not just fixtures or pan and tilt data Record a focus point Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels Dimmers and Fixtures page 86 Set levels using the procedure described in Set Levels page 89 or by using the encoders or by direct control through Emphasis Visualization Press Record Focus Point x Enter where x is the number of the focus point Recall a focus point for selected channels Step 1 Step 2 Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels Dimmers and Fixtures page 86 Press Focus Point x where x is the focus point number Channels will be captured at the level recorded in the focus point and the number x will be indicated below the level Use focus points as selection groups Step 1 96 Press Focus Point x where x is the number of the focus point you want to use to select channels Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Step 2 Press At y where y is a proportional level or use the level wheel trackpad When you do this you are using the focus point like it is a group No reference t
103. pressing S7 More Softkeys gt S8 Sort Create a Real Time Program Step 1 Press Setup 8 Enter to view the Real Time Programs display Progrm Wednesday 5 February 2003 Program Time Days Date Macro Label 1 O Mon 2 0 i Mon 11 June 2003 Tue Thu Sunrise 08 20 AM Sunset 07 02 PM 51 52 53 S4 S5 56 EY s8 ee turn Step 2 Step 3 Press S1 Select Program gt x Enter to select program number x and move to the Time column Time follows the 12 hour or 24 hour clock setting in the Clock Functions menu To change the clock settings see Setting the time and location page 192 Enter the time of day Enter absolute time directly using the numerical keypad The keypad corner displays your entry as you type Make sure the correct time is displayed in the keypad corner before pressing Enter When you press Enter you are moved to the Days Date column Enter time using the astronomical time clock by pressing S3 Astro Clock You will need to enter the type of offset you want 1 for before sunrise 2 for after sunrise 3 for before sunset 4 for after sunset or 0 for none Press Enter and then enter the amount of time in hours and minutes The Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 keypad corner displays your entry as you type Make sure the correct time is displayed in the keypad corner before pressing Enter When you press Enter you are m
104. show with only a few key presses When you have channel levels that stay the same through a series of consecutive cues those levels are said to track through those cues shaded cells in the table below show tracking channels Track recording will change the whole series of cues in one record action A track record stops changing cues when the tracked channel s level moves to a different level the channel is blocked see Blocked Channels page 137 or a block or allfade cue is encountered see Cue Types page 112 Note Ifyou use Track and have blackout cues in your show make them allfade cues This will keep channels from unintentionally tracking through your blackouts 114 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Track Record Track will modify tracking levels in cues in a forward direction in the cue list Changes made to cue 3 with a Track record will affect the cue list as shown below in bold levels Track changes forward through the cue list Step 1 Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels Dimmers and Fixtures page 86 Step 2 Set levels using the procedure described in Set Levels page 89 and Moving Light Control page 95 Step 3 Press Track x Enter where x is the cue number you want to track from Changes will be made to all channels that remain at the same level from the source cue forward through the cue list until a move channel block or allfade cue is encountered B
105. startup press 1 2 3 to enter the configuration menu Insert the floppy disk containing your configuration into the Facepanel disk drive Using the down arrow y key scroll to Restore from Floppy and press Enter The configuration loads immediately When complete remove the disk from the floppy drive and restart your Facepanel for normal operation To restore factory default settings Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 208 Power up or reboot the Facepanel When the prompt appears at startup press 1 2 3 to enter the configuration menu Insert the Facepanel Software Disk into the Facepanel disk drive See Software Installation page 11 for information on creating a Facepanel Software Disk Using the down arrow y key scroll to Restore from Floppy and press Enter The configuration loads immediately When complete remove the disk from the floppy drive and restart your Facepanel for normal operation Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Show Control Overview In an Emphasis Control System the Facepanel acts as a translator of the show control protocol ETC MIDI MIDI Show Control MIDI Notes SMPTE time code These protocols are translated to EMIDI and ESMPTE This simply indicates the protocol that has been translated for network transmission You can use EMIDI and ESMPTE ID values to establish transmission lines within your system In a single Emphasis Control System w
106. t e go s 212 ETC MIDI Message Formats 213 MIDI Message definitions 214 MIDI Show Control cee eee eee 216 MIDI Show Control MSC Commands 216 MSC Frame Packet a 217 SMPTE tia Ga PINAY ial bie tae ee 220 Time Code Program 000 c cece eee eee 221 Time Code Events Display 221 Run a Time Code Program ssus 225 Emphasis Serial Button Protocol 228 Commands cece eee eee 228 ANQUIMONS u s ee rte a eed wa eee a ede ud 228 Command Examples 20 00ee ee 229 Input Stream Echoing 20 00 0c eee 229 Things to Keep in Mind 000 ee eee 230 The Keyword Table 0 000 e eee eee 230 Appendix A System Defaults 235 Emphasis Visualization and Console Defaults 236 Facepanel Type 0 0 eee eee eee 236 Diagnostics es ne he wae aa eR RO n esie s 236 AA AA ee 236 ASCIl Options 0000 cee eee 237 Emphasis Visualization Defaults 238 Application Options eee eee 238 Emphasis Console Defaults liuius 239 Language esse ey eed Rex dee RR Ra 239 System ID cee lees 239 Expression Facepanel Defaults 240 Express Facepanel Defaults 242 Appendix B Maintenance and Troubleshooting 243 Return the Facepanel to v3 1 Operation 244 Exp
107. the channels you want to include in a step are active Note Ifyou want to record steps out of order press Record Sub x S7 More Softkeys gt S8 Step y Enter to select the step you want to record Using Load Sub You can load a cue group or focus point into a submaster using the Load Sub command Load Sub records the contents of the cue group or submaster into the target submaster with a few keystrokes Cues loaded into submasters will maintain any focus point references recorded in them Focus points will load as if they are groups losing the reference to the focus point itself Load Sub does not affect submaster timing Record a submaster using Load Sub Step 1 Press Load Sub x to select submaster x or Load Sub a Thru c to select a range of submasters Step 2 Press Cue y Enter to load cue y e Group y Enter to load group y Focus Point y Enter to load focus point y Load a range of cues groups or focus points by selecting a range equal to the number of submasters selected in step 1 and pressing Enter Note Load Sub is found on S7 More Softkeys gt S2 Load Sub in Stage on Express facepanels EN Live Editing 123 124 Using Submasters as Groups Recorded pile on submasters can be used for channel selection and level setting just like groups When you use the Group Sub command all the channels recorded in that submaster ar
108. the computer used to run the Emphasis applications This is also referred to simply as the Server Emphasis Facepanel hardware the control console hardware This is also referred to simply as the Facepanel Emphasis Visualization software the application that resides solely on the Server and provides WYSIWYG based functionality Emphasis Console software the application that drives the Facepanel The Console displays resemble the traditional Facepanel displays and can be viewed on either the Server or Facepanel monitors This application usually remains hidden as the displays can be accessed through the Facepanel and Visualization Menus and commands found on the Server are indicated in bold text For example In the File menu click Open Server keyboard buttons are indicated in all CAPS For example TAB or CTRL Facepanel buttons and softkeys are indicated in bold brackets For example Stage or Enter Optional keys are indicated in lt angle brackets gt for example lt Fixture gt or Channels A note about S7 More Softkeys gt this command is always indicated as optional and is only indicated once in an instruction regardless of how many pages of softkeys exist This is because there is no way to predict what softkey page you are on at any given time Press lt S7 More Softkeys gt until you find the required command References to other parts of the manual are indicated in italics When viewi
109. the cue number you want to track from Changes will be made to all channels that remain at the same level from the source cue forward and backward through the cue list until a move channel block or allfade cue is encountered Using Cues as Groups Recorded cues can be used for channel selection and level setting just like groups When you use the Group Cue command all the channels recorded in that cue are selected and their recorded levels can be recalled proportionally You can also use Group Cue with Only to selectively recall levels for selected channels or fixtures from recorded cues Note Cues containing an effect dynamic effect or subroutine cannot be used as groups Use a cue as a group Step 1 Press Group Cue x where x is the cue number you would like to use as a group This will select all the channels recorded in that cue Step 2 Press At y where y is the proportional level or use the level wheel trackpad Use Full to recall the recorded levels in the cue Use Group Cue with Only Step 1 Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels Dimmers and Fixtures page 86 Step 2 Press Only Group Cue x where x is the recorded cue containing the levels you want to recall Step 3 Press Full to recall the levels as recorded in cue x Use the level wheel trackpad or At to recall proportional levels 116 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual St
110. the set channel count are unpatched Note fyou accidentally clear data DO NOT SAVE YOUR SHOW You can reload the show and restore data current to your most recent save It is always a good idea to save your show often during programming Print Functions The print functions menu offers a number of reports that can be printed on a printer connected to your Emphasis Server the local printer port on the Facepanel is not supported The following reports can be printed from this menu e Print Stage Display e Print Cues this report will print cues in Flexichannel format to save paper System Settings 57 58 Print Submasters Print Groups Print Focus Points Print Macros Print Time Code Events Print Real Time Programs Print Channel Attributes Print Profiles Print Patch formatted like the Emphasis Console display Print Cue List Print Submaster List Print Group List Print Focus Point List Print Moving Lights Print Tracksheet Macro List This menu is used in the creation and editing of macros Please see Macros page 181 for the use of this menu Time Code Events and Real Time Programs The Time Code Events menu is described in Time Code Program page 219 and the Real Time Programs menu is described in Real Time Programs page 191 Channel Attributes The Channel Attributes display is used to set the following channel attributes Independent Independent channels are described in Independent Channels
111. the time to completion of that cue Once the cue completes you lose S5 Rate control over the cue If you apply a S5 Rate to an effect or subroutine cue that loops continuously the S5 Rate will apply until you play back another cue in the fader pair S5 Rate adjustments at the fader level can be updated into a cue This is especially useful for adjusting effect times You can apply and adjust the fader rate live and then update the setting into the cue Each time the cue is played back after that the rate will automatically be applied Rates are expressed as percentages of recorded fade times A rate of 100 will play back at recorded times A rate of 200 will play back twice as fast as the recorded time 10 second recorded time will play back at 5 seconds A rate of 50 will play back half as fast as the recorded time 10 second recorded time will play back at 20 seconds You can set rates anywhere between zero and 2000 A rate of zero stops the fade Apply a rate to a fader pair Step 1 Press Stage You must be in the stage display to select a cue for playback Step 2 If required press Cue x where x is the number of the cue you want to play back Step 3 Press Go on the fader pair you wish to use Step 4 Press S5 Rate on the same fader pair As the cue runs you can adjust its rate live by using the rate wheel or trackpad When the cue completes the rate on the fader reverts to 100 175 176 Backg
112. to enter a time of 00 03 45 00 press 8 4 5 0 0 The keypad corner displays your entry as you type Make sure the correct time is displayed in the keypad corner before pressing Enter When you press Enter you are moved to the A B fader pair column Step 5 If required type the cue number to be played in the A B fader pair and press Enter You are moved to the fader Rate column Step 6 If required type the rate value to be applied to the A B fader pair for that cue and press Enter You are moved to the C D fader pair column Step 7 If required type the cue number to be played in the C D fader pair and press Enter You are moved to the fader Rate column Step 8 If required type the rate value to be applied to the C D fader pair for that cue and press Enter You are moved to the submaster Bump column Step 9 If required type the number of the submaster bump and to set the sub bump on or to set the sub bump off and press Enter You are moved to the submaster Rate column Step 10 If required type the rate value to be applied to the submaster and press Enter You are moved to the Macro column Step 11 If required type the number of the macro to execute and press Enter You are moved to the Label column Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Step 12 Step 13 Step 14 If required using the alphanumeric keyboard enter the label for this event and press Enter Press the down arrow k
113. to swapped focus pan encoder controls tilt tilt encoder controls pan or flipped focus you can flip pan tilt or both Swap and Flip cannot be set from Emphasis Visualization and fixtures cannot be patched from Emphasis Console so insert and patch your fixtures first then adjust the swap and flip settings here See how to insert and patch fixtures in the Emphasis Visualization User Manual Fixtur 5 PM Fixture Label ersonal i tu art EDMX Remot Intens Number Chan Start Dimmer cus 111 114 135 135 201 201 215 215 231 231 5 UL4000T 249 249 51 52 53 S4 55 56 57 S8 KAHA ISAN Ez uU NES A EUN Set a fixture to swapped focus Step 1 On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis Visualization press Setup 1 1 Enter to access the Moving Light Functions menu Step 2 Press 2 Enter to display the Fixture Patch Step 3 Press S1 Select Fixture x S6 Swap Focus where x is the fixture number Step 4 Press 1 Enter to enable swap or 0 Enter to disable a swap Set a fixture to flipped focus Step 1 On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis Visualization press Setup 1 1 Enter to access the Moving Light Functions menu Step 2 Press 2 Enter to display the Fixture Patch Step 3 Press S1 Select Fixture x S7 Flip where x is the fixture number Step 4 Press 1 Enter to enable flipped pan or 0 Enter to disable a f
114. use the small black clips provided with the LPC Slide the black clips over the rack mounting holes so that you can thread the screws into them Step 6 Fit the LPC through the front of the equipment rack and position over the mounting holes The L brackets should be on the outside of the rack Step 7 Secure the LPC to the front of the rack using four 10 32x1 2 screws and washers as shown above Keep the rear of the LPC supported to avoid bending the front brackets Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Step 8 Step 9 Using four 10 32x1 2 bolts and threaded clips if necessary loosely attach the two slider brackets to rear holes in the rack that are opposite those holes used to mount the front of the LPC Do not secure yet Line up the slider brackets with the rear brackets on each side of the LPC The threaded studs on the rear bracket should fit into the slider bracket slots Attach each rear bracket to a slider using two 10 32x3 8 screws each The screws fit through slots in the brackets and into threaded slider bracket holes Step 10 Tighten all bolts so that the assembly is level and secure Surface mount Installation The Express LPC may be mounted to a vertical surface or above or below a horizontal surface Four feet two brackets and four screws for mounting the brackets to the LPC are provided You will need to provide the screws and anchors if necessary for mounting the brackets and LPC to the surface
115. v2 0 0 User Manual Clear The fader Clear key is found above or to the side of the fader pair When the fader Clear key is pressed the contents of that fader are cleared from the Stage output You can use the default fader clear time of zero seconds or you can set your own fader clear time see Default Fader Clear Time page 52 Additional Fader Clear Functionality In addition to the normal AB Clear and CD Clear functions if the fader pair is cleared Clear LED on solid and AB Clear or CD Clear is pressed all background cues that were launched from that fader pair will be aborted and their channels cleared Fader contains running effect with a dwell of Hold and is a source of background channels Fader contains running effect with a dwell of Hold and is not a source of background channels Fader contains static cue and is source of background channels Fader contains static cue not a source of background channels AB Clear or CD Clear Clears active channels in Fader Clear time as set in System Settings background cues remain Starts downfade of effect in the recorded downfade time does not clear contents Starts downfade of effect in the recorded downfade time does not clear contents Clears contents of fader pair in Fader Clear time as set in System Settings Overrides fader clear time set in system settings and clears fader ina zero count background cues
116. where x is the dimmer number to select the dimmer Step 3 Press Label and type the label name Labels can be five characters long When done press Enter Step 4 Press S3 Show Hide Labels to toggle label display Patching to a Strand Lighting CD80 Dimmer Rack Strand CD80 dimmer racks have 48 dimmer slots Each dimmer slot holds either two 2 4kW dimmers or one 6kW or 12kW dimmer Refer to the illustrations below to determine the address for the dimmer slots When patching 6kW and 12kW dimmer patch the slot s odd number to the desired channel number Patch the slot s even number to channel zero essentially unpatching the dimmer 1 3 5 7 11 2 4 6 8 12 13 15 17 19 1 21 23 14 16 18 20 22 24 25 27 29 31 33 35 26 28 30 32 34 36 37 39 41 43 45 47 38 40 42 44 46 48 97 1199 101 103 105 107 98 100 102 104 106 108 109 1114 4113 115 41177 119 110 112 114 116 118 120 121 123 125 127 129 13 122 124 126 128 130 132 133 135 137 139 141 143 134 136 138 140 142 144 4911511 53 55 57 59 50 52 54 56 58 60 61 63 65 67 69 71 62 64 66 68 70 72 73 75 77 79 81 83 74 76 78 80 82 84 85 87 89 91 93 95 86 88 90 92 94 96 T45 1147 149 151 153 155 146 17
117. x Enter where x is the page number The current level of each submaster s fader is displayed in the column 01 27 PM Sub Page 1 Sub A Bump Up Dwel Down Type Labe Loade Hold 2 Pile on House Lights Man 0 Man Man Man Man Man Man Man Man Man Man 0 r Hold 5 Lightning Si Car Headlights Man 0 Inhibit INHIBIT FOH Man 0 Man 51 52 S3 S4 S5 Sb 57 s8 EO ee E Sub E I 154 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Edit submaster attributes within the Submaster List display Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Press Blind The Blind display defaults to cues Press Sub Enter to view submasters in Blind Press S2 Sub List to display the Submaster List Press x Enter to select submaster x You can also use And Thru and Except to select multiple submasters You may also use the up and down arrow and keys to scroll through the Submaster List Press S1 Bump Status to change the status of the submaster s bump button Press 1 Enter to enable the sub bump for normal operation 2 Enter to disable the sub bump entirely a D is displayed in the column or 3 Enter to enable Solo operation for the selected submaster s Solo operation causes channels not contained in the submaster to go to zero when the sub s bump button is pressed Time to change the upfade time for the selected submaster s See Time Functions page 125 Time Time
118. y is the target focus point number Blind Editing 163 Note When you edit cues submasters groups or focus points in Stage Fader or Blind changes to channel levels or effects are not recorded until you press Record Enter Focus Point List The Focus Point List displays the number and label of each recorded focus point Use the Focus Point List to quickly find available focus point numbers or to label focus points individually or in ranges You can also delete focus points within the Focus Point List display Focus 12 09 14 AM Labe ocus Label Down Center Down Left Do Up Center Dark Blue Deep Orange S1 s2 s3 s4 S5 S6 S s8 ee a E Edit focus point labels within the Focus Point List display Step 1 Press Blind The Blind display defaults to cues Step 2 Press Focus Point Enter to view focus points in Blind Step 3 Press S2 Focus List to display the Focus Point List Step 4 Press x Enter to select focus point x You can also use And Thru and Except to select multiple focus points You may also use the down and up arrow and f keys to scroll through the Focus Point List Step 5 Press Label and type in the label you want to apply to the selected focus point s Alternatively you can press the right and left arrow gt and keys to move through the Focus Point List columns Note Label can be found on S7 More Softkeys gt Sx Label
119. 1 Insert Event Press x Enter to insert event x Press y Enter where y is the number of events you want to insert Subsequent events are renumbered following the inserted event s Delete time code events Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Press Setup 7 Enter to view the Time Code Events display Press S7 More Softkeys gt S6 Delete Event Press x Enter to select event x Use the And and Thru keys to select multiple events Press Enter to confirm that you want to delete the event s Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Res et Loop Time A Time Code Program typically runs from the first event time to the last event time and then restarts at the first event time running events in a continuous loop Any events in the program with a time stamp prior to the first event time or after the last event time are not played back External timecode will have loop times set at the source It is a good idea to set the internal loop times to the same settings as the external source if used It will take at least 5 seconds for the internal to synchronize with an external source and it is possible for events to be missed while the clocks remain unsynchronized Set the loop time Step 1 Press Setup 7 Enter to view the Time Code Events display Step 2 Press S8 Reset Loop to access the first loop time Step 3 Using the Facepanel numeric keypad enter the first event time in hours minut
120. 1 Operation page 242 Emphasis Visualization Emphasis Visualization is the software application that provides the graphic interface to the Emphasis Control System It is based on the powerful WYSIWYG suite of software applications This is where you patch your show create your plot and prepare your paperwork You can also select and control fixtures pre cue your show and preview recorded cues using the visualization features While Emphasis Visualization is based on WYSIWYG there are some significant changes that allow for interaction with the Emphasis Console See the Emphasis Visualization User Manual for more information on these new features Emphasis Console Emphasis Console is the software application that drives the Facepanel This application usually remains hidden You can access the settings and controls either from the Facepanel or from the virtual Facepanel in Emphasis Visualization Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Installation Guidelines Hooking Up the Hardware Emphasis systems can range from a simple Server and Facepanel combination to fully integrated network systems Regardless of the size of your system there are some basic connections that are common to all systems Note See Expression and Insight DIP switches page 248 for the correct network settings Incorrect settings will not allow your Facepanel and Server to communicate Emphasis uses UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair cable and a hub or s
121. 12 24 Hour Clock Step 3 Press 0 Enter to set a 12 hour clock or 1 Enter to set a 24 hour clock Set daylight saving time Step 1 On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis Visualization press Setup 3 Enter to access the Clock Functions menu Step 2 Press 5 Enter to choose Daylight Savings Time Step 3 Press 1 Enter to set daylight time or 0 Enter to set standard time 8 Real Time Programs 193 A 194 Create and Edit Real Time Programs You may have up to 500 Real Time Programs recorded in your show file Each program executes a single macro You can assign a specific or relative time and a day of week or date for each program to play back on CAUTION By activating a series of macros remotely they will queue up in the order of activation As each macro completes the next macro in the queue will fire When cue loops are required use subroutines instead of macros Macros that fire themselves are not recommended as the self repeating macro never completes and therefore successive macros will not be triggered If subroutines do not produce the cue structure needed consider a time code program using the internal time clock function for playback Emphasis automatically sorts the programs in the Real Time Programs display according to time of day when you exit the display or when you move copy or delete programs You can force a sort anytime you are in the display by
122. 2 6 32 x 1 4 flathead 2 6 32 x 1 4 flathead Surface mount the Express LPC above a horizontal or to a vertical surface Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Remove all mounting hardware from the plastic bag Securely attach the four rubber bumpers to threaded holes in the bottom of the LPC using 4 40x3 8 screws Securely attach the two L brackets to the side panels of the LPC as shown above using two 6 32x1 4 flathead screws each Choose the bracket holes closest to its bend Place the LPC on the mounting surface Mark the surface through the mounting holes in each bracket Remove the LPC Drill holes at the marks of the appropriate diameter for the mounting anchors screws you have provided Securely attach the LPC to the mounting surface Surface mount the Express LPC below a horizontal surface Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Remove all mounting hardware from the plastic bag Securely attach the four rubber bumpers to threaded holes in the top of the LPC using double sided tape not provided with LPC Securely attach the two L brackets to the side panels of the LPC 180 from the bracket position illustrated above the mounting flange should face the top of the E Lighting Playback Controllers 265 LPC using two 6 32x1 4 flathead screws each Choose the bracket holes farthest from the bend Step 4 Place the LPC on the mounting surface Mark the surface through the mounting ho
123. 3 Stage Blind Cue Blind Cue Part 2 Blind Only Cluster B Group Blind Focus Point Blind Submaster BSub Fader Cluster B Cluster B Cluster B Cluster B Part Cluster B Stage 3 Blind Cue 2 Cue List Blind Cue Part 2 Fader 3 Cluster B Cluster B Follow Cluster B Stage Blind Cue 2 Cue List Blind Cue Effect 3 BCES Fader Emphasis Console User Interface 37 38 Facepanel Keys Function Expression Insight Express Channel Cluster C Cluster C Cluster C Cluster C Cluster C Cluster C Cluster C Cluster C And Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual e ano pulg S SMIJOS eo yoolg abed 1xoN eDeg snol naig 0 09 MO O4 ang pulja en Pma S SMLOS 8101 bas ids E TT ang pullg 19says XINQ3 enideo Ng d ds ang eisjeq abeg Kan abeg snoiejg peaidg and eno 181 gag eno pajas MYOS soy 19ays peaids 9 1sn ang AC eas wed deis use jJawwig XINQ3 ede y obeis jeeus eno S 9MYOS 9JO N Jqns 0 05 i ee ome Pus z abe s Sapllaag Co s Tas o 3 ss Tas s ag S 9MHOS Aayyos paubisseun ue ajes pul a qe ay ui seo dwg UOISIOA uorissaJdx3 eui yjesuaq MOI pepeus au ui pelsi SI 1 3uoJaJlip si jos eqyos sseldxy ue J 18411 peyeoipul aye sAsyyos 1uBisuj yuorsseJdx3 sesayjualed ul pajeo pul ase sabed A yyos 19440 0 sduun mojaq 1si aqyos ay ul sAh gt hjos Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual 39 XINQ3 ended 199YSADBA ang pulg unay eno pulg umay e dn
124. 3 For information on inserting a macro into a subroutine step see Style Steps page 144 When you activate a series of macros they will queue up in the order of activation As each macro completes the next macro in the queue will fire Remote Macros You can use an optional set of switches or keys to fire macros remotely using the Remote Macros function See Remote Macros page 205 for configuration information and Using Remote Macros page 257 for information on wiring When you activate a series of macros remotely they will queue up in the order of activation As each macro completes the next macro in the queue will fire CAUTION By activating a series of macros remotely they will queue up in the order of activation As each macro completes the next macro in the queue will fire When cue loops are required use subroutines instead of macros Macros that fire themselves are not recommended as the self repeating macro never completes and therefore successive macros will not be triggered If subroutines do not produce the cue structure needed consider a time code program using the internal time clock function for playback Startup Macro You can also set the system to fire a macro at startup The Startup Macro executes as soon as the show file completely loads into Emphasis Console and Emphasis Visualization The Emphasis Visualization option Reload last document on startup must be enabled for the Startup Macro to run See the E
125. 8 System Overview 5 Emphasis Options Emphasis systems are created by choosing the server type maximum channel count and Facepanel type Emphasis is offered as an upgrade to an existing Express or Expression style console see below for compatible Facepanel types or as a complete package Server Types e 3D Includes full console feature set and full visualization functionality paperwork and presentation tools data tasks 3D CAD drafting complete visualization and rendering The 3D Server will support up to two monitors e 2D Includes full console feature set and limited visualization functionality paperwork and presentation tools data tasks and 2D CAD drafting The 2D Server will support one monitor Channel Counts e 500 channels e 1000 channels e 2500 channels e 5000 channels 10 000 channels 2D only Channel counts refer to the maximum number of control channels you can have in a show All channel options have 32 767 EDMX addresses available Facepanels e Expression with Emphasis Expression ECS Expression 3 Expression 2x Expression LPC Imagine 3 Insight with Emphasis Insight ECS Insight 3 Insight 2x Insight LPC Focus Express all varieties Express LPC Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual System Components Emphasis Server The Emphasis server is a Dell computer optimized by ETC for the best performance of the Emphasis Visualization and Emphasis Console applications
126. 8 150 152 154 156 157 159 161 163 165 167 158 160 162 164 166 168 169 1714 173 175 177 179 170 172 174 1176 178 180 181 183 185 187 189 1 182 184 186 188 190 192 80 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Using the About Command The About command is a powerful tool for viewing information about dimmers channels and your Emphasis Console show About Dimmer Use About Dimmer to view patch data and source data about a specific dimmer Press About lt S7 More Softkeys gt S3 Dim x where x is the dimmer number you want to view to open the About Dimmer display Lobel Channel 1 Proportion 100 Profile 0 Linear Console dimmer level 100 Parked Attributes About Channel Use About Channel to view patch and usage data about a specific channel Press About Channel x where x is the channel number you want to view to open the About Channel display Label Fixture 1 Type Moc500 M2 Gs Ep Attributes Device GRot1 First used 1 Last used 38 Number of cues 20 Number of moves 5 Number of blocks 0 Level 0 Porked n Source None Inhibited n Supermaster n Dimmers System Settings 81 82 About Show Use About Show to view statistics of recorded items in your show Press About Enter to open the About Show display Lobel Number of channels 1 Number of dimmers 2 Subs Groups Focus Points M
127. 8 51 W Cheyenne WY 6 West 41 08 N 104 47 W Chicago IL 6 West 41 50 N 87 41 W Columbus OH 5 West 40 00 N 82 53 W Denver CO 7 West 39 46 N 104 527 W Fargo ND 6 West 46 52 N 96 49 W Hartford CT 5 West 41 45 N 72 41 W Honolulu HI 10 West 21 79 N 157 48 W Las Vegas NV 7 West 36 12 N 115 13 W Los Angeles CA 8 West 34 05 N 118 24 W Indianapolis IN 5 West 39 44 N 86 177 W Madison WI 6 West 43 04 N 89 23 W Miami FL 5 West 25 49 N 80 13 W Minneapolis MN 6 West 44 57 N 93 16 W Montgomery AL 6 West 32 21 N 86 177 W New Orleans LA 6 West 30 03 N 89 55 W New York NY 5 West 40 46 N 73 58 W Oklahoma City OK 6 West 35 28 N 97 30 W Philadelphia PA 5 West 40 00 N 75 08 W Phoenix AZ 7 West 33 32 N 112 04 W Portland OR 8 West 45 32 N 122 39 W City State Latitude Longitude Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual United States Cities Continued Time Zone Standard Raleigh NC 5 West 35 52 N 78 47 W Salt Lake City UT 7 West 40 46 N 111 55 W City State Latitude Longitude San Francisco CA 8 West 37 47 N 122 33 W Seattle WA 8 West 47 37 N 122 21 W Sioux Falls SD 4 6 West 43 32 N 96 43 W Cities Outside the United States Time Zone Standard Abuja Nigeria 1
128. EMIDI Receive settings In this case you would have a single input source broadcasting a MIDI signal ETC MIDI MIDI Show Control or MIDI Time Code to multiple Emphasis Servers The EMIDI Transmit Emphasis Visualization setting maps to the MIDI Output Port EMIDI ID Facepanel setting You cannot have multiple Emphasis Servers with identical EMIDI Transmit settings but you may have multiple Facepanels with identical MIDI Output Port EMIDI ID settings In this case you would have a single transmit source broadcasting the same information ETC MIDI MIDI Show Control or MIDI Time Code to multiple output ports ETC assumes that MIDI users have a working knowledge of MIDI This section provides ETC MIDI interface information message formats and message definitions For information on MIDI wiring see Connecting MIDI page 254 Set the EMIDI ID values on the Facepanel Step 1 Power up or reboot the Facepanel Step 2 When the prompt appears at startup press 1 2 3 to enter the configuration menu Step 3 Using the down arrow key scroll to MIDI and press Enter Step 4 With MIDI Input Port EMIDI ID highlighted press Enter Step 5 Using the facepanel numeric keypad enter the ID number This may be any value between 0 255 0 will disable MIDI Input The default value is 1 Step 6 Press Enter Step 7 Using the down arrow y key scroll to MIDI Output Port EMIDI ID and press enter Step 8 Using th
129. Expression facepanels have a series of LED displays across the top These displays provide supplemental information regarding your faders cues submasters groups and levels E Next Cue Display C D Display shows Record Display shows ihemunberoiine Stowsterumberaitto ihenumberohe he curently selected i i current cue in the C D eee sou amapas fader pair group or submaster fader pair EXTUS Level Channel Group r AB EJE cn Record ES Y Ep expression EEEE HAGE HAGAH E9066 008 08 opo Channel Group Display shows Rate X Display shows the level of Level Y Display shows the level of the low the last selected channel or the high coarse channel in 16 bit fine channel in 16 bit pairs When the Y group pairs When the X wheelisusedasa wheel is used as a Level wheel this display Rate wheel this display is not used shows the level of the selected channel If more than one channel is selected this display shows the level of the highest selected channel number Emphasis Console User Interface 35 36 Hard keys vs Softkeys by Facepanel Type This section provides a comprehensive listing of hard keys and softkeys by facepanel type Some hard keys on Expression and Insight facepanels are not available or are softkeys on Express facepanels These a
130. Ground Macro 1903 05 15 Ground 6 Macro 1903 140 12 Vdc fused O 7 Macro 1904 15 8 12 Vdc fused Macro 1904 2 Connect all Macro pins pins 1 3 5 and 7 to 12 Vdc pins 14 and 15 and switch the leads connecting the Macro pins pins 2 4 6 and 8 to ground pins 12 and 13 3 Provide your own power supply that generates a 12 Vdc potential between the Macro and Macro pins and switch either of these leads 258 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Expression Insight facepanels There are three typical ways to wire the Remote Macros 1 Connect all Macro pins pins 1 8 to ground pin 10 and switch the leads connecting the Macro pins pins 14 21 to 12 Vdc pin 24 as shown in the following diagram 1 Macro 1901 2 Macro 1902 3 Macro 1903 4 Macro 1904 5 Macro 1905 6 Macro 1906 7 Macro 1907 8 Macro 1908 not connected 10 Ground rr 11 12 Vdc 12 not connected 13 not connected 14 Macro 1901 15 Macro 1902 16 Macro 1903 17 Macro 1904 18 Macro 1905 19 Macro 1906 20 Macro 1907 21 Macro 1908 22 not connected 23m Ground 24 12 Vdc 25 not connected 2 Connect all Macro pins pins 14 21 to 12 Vdc pin 24 and switch the leads connecting the Macro pins pins 1 8 to ground pin10 3 Provide your own power supply that generates a 12 Vdc potential between the Macro and Macro pins and switch either of these leads
131. Group List display Step 1 Press Blind The Blind display defaults to cues Step 2 Press Group Enter to view groups in Blind Step 3 Press S2 Group List to display the Group List Step 4 Press S6 Delete Group Step 5 Press x to select group x You can also use And Thru and Except to select multiple groups Step 6 Press Enter to delete the selected group s To abort the delete command press Clear Step 7 Press Enter to confirm that you really want to delete the group s Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Group Spreadsheet In the Group Spreadsheet you can see channel levels for all recorded groups in a spreadsheet layout You can edit or delete groups one at a time or by selecting ranges Using the replace level feature you can change channels at one level to a new level without having to select them individually 01 02 03 04 OS FL FL FL FL FU RN FL FL FL FL 4 y 4 5 A CAUTION Unlike the Stage and Blind displays changes made in the spreadsheet are recorded immediately without the need for the additional Record command Changes made in the spreadsheet will be stored but will not update levels on stage until you recall the group s again Edit groups in the spreadsheet display Step 1 Press Blind The Blind display defaults to cues Step 2 Press Group Enter to view groups in Blind Step 3 Press S3 Spread Sheet to display the group spreadsheet
132. Light Functions menu in the Setup display You can also create new templates as well System Settings 65 66 View the Dynamic Template List Step 1 Press Setup 1 1 Enter to view the Moving Light Functions menu Step 2 Press 5 Enter to view the Dynamic Template List Temp lt 01 47 PM Template Attributes lay Rel Distance 400 t ilt ilt ilt ilt ilt ilt ilt 51 52 53 S4 55 56 5 33 View the contents of a Dynamic Template Step 1 Press Setup 1 1 Enter to view the Moving Light Functions menu Step 2 Press 5 Enter to view the Dynamic Template List Step 3 Press S1 Select Template n Enter where n is the number of the template you want to view Template 18 Color Fade 4 Inde Attribute 0 Cy o Ma o 51 52 3 54 35 56 57 58 Kid nm me Pose Pose A EA RA Dynamic Templates are created using a series of instructions for specific attributes of fixtures The components of a dynamic template are as follows UNE Each line contains the dynamic settings for a single moving light attribute For example a dynamic effect for pan and tilt would contain two lines one for pan and one for tilt Indexes The index value builds a channel offset into the dynamic effect Leave this value at 0 to affect all channels equally in the template Attribute The attribute value is the fixture attribute for this line ette The table is the type of movement you want the
133. Live Editing 109 Park Channels You can park channels at direct levels or with reference to a focus point Channels parked at a focus point will update their parked level if the corresponding focus point is changed See Focus Points page 96 for more information Park channels at direct levels Step 1 In the Stage display press S7 More Softkeys S6 Park In the Park display you do not need to press a softkey before selecting channels Step 2 Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels Dimmers and Fixtures page 86 Step 3 If selected channels are not already at the levels you require press At x where x is the level you desire If they are at the levels you require skip this step Step 4 Press Enter to park the channels In the Park display channels will display the level they are parked to Park channels at focus points Step 1 In the Stage display press S7 More Softkeys gt S6 Park In the Park display you do not need to press a softkey before selecting channels Step 2 Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels Dimmers and Fixtures page 86 Step 3 Press Focus Point x where x is the number of the focus point Step 4 Press Enter to park the channels In the Park display channels will display the level they are parked to and the focus point number they are referencing Park Groups Focus Points Cues and Submasters You can park chann
134. Playback This chapter covers the playback options in the Emphasis Control System With the various facepanels available you have a number of choices when it comes to playing back your show Two scene preset operation of Express consoles is described in Appendix D Express Facepanel Two Scene Operation page 302 This chapter contains the following sections AB and C D Fader Pairs cece 170 e Submasters 0 000 00 0000 ees 179 169 A B and C D Fader Pairs Your Facepanel has two timed fader pairs called the A B and C D fader pairs that are used to play back recorded cues The left hand fader in each pair controls the upfade and the right hand fader controls the downfade of a crossfading cue You may play back cues using the recorded fade timing or by taking control of the fade manually see Manual control page 174 You can also affect the speed of a cue using the rate override feature see Rate page 175 You may play back cues in order or by calling up individual cues one at a time You can also have active cues in both fader pairs at the same time Fader Controls Each fader pair has a dedicated set of controls On Expression and Insight facepanels each fader pair has a set of LEDs that track the current completion level of crossfading cues These LEDs also indicate when the contents of the fader is a subroutine or effect Go Each fader pair has a Go key When you press Go the next cue in t
135. S6 Delete Macro Step 3 Type the macro number on the numeric keypad and press Enter You can use And and Thru to select multiple macros Step 4 Press Enter to confirm you want to delete the selected macros View the contents of a macro Step 1 Type the macro number on the numeric keypad and press Enter Note Youcan also select macros for viewing and editing using the mouse in Emphasis Visualization Simply click the macro number or label in the Console Screens Console or Monitor layout Step 2 Press S3 View Macro to display the contents of the selected macro Step 3 Press S8 Return to return to the Macro List or press S1 Edit Macro to edit the macro Macro Editing The Macro Editing display can be used to create new macros or to edit existing macros using direct entry When you work in the Edit Macro display commands are not executed on stage as they are added to the selected macro Note Because you can place any command in any order it is possible to create non functional macros within Emphasis You may want to test your macro after you create it to make sure that it does what you want it to do Also macros that are imported with an older Express or Expression v3 1 show may contain commands that are not valid in the Emphasis Control System This is especially true of Setup menu commands 40 59 AM Operations Cue 5 0 O0 Go RB Mwait 3 M2 51 52 53 s4 S5 ES 57 58 EX pee en
136. SetD command available from the macro Setdim 5 50 key list Note Note that the accelerator for enter is not an alphabetic character so you can t put it in quotes Input Stream Echoing The input stream is echoed after it is processed This will help in debugging the connection and the commands being entered The input string is not echoed until the end of line is reached carriage return or line feed Each input string is echoed as an interpreted string followed by a carriage return and a line feed Commands are echoed in their interpreted form Quoted strings are echoed as is with the enclosing quotes Independent digits are echoed as is The command separator semicolon is echoed as is Unknown commands are echoed as is followed by a question mark EN Control Interfaces 227 For normal commands the abbreviation is echoed followed by its arguments as they were interpreted followed by a space All levels are echoed as full numbers 0 255 rather than percentages For example Input Echo stage c1t5frqi en st c1t5frqi en st chith5fl re qien st ch 1th 5fl re q ten subpot 42 50 rq 123 4 sp 42 128 rq 123 4 misspelled command misspelled command Things to Keep in Mind The commands for moving faders will only work if there are no devices with physical faders connected This is the same rule explained in Multi console Submaster Fader Support page 16 e The ETCLink commands get passed through Empha
137. To remove levels from a cue press At Clear Note Todeselect channels after pressing At but before entering a new level simply press Channel or Cue Create cues in the spreadsheet display Step 1 Press Blind The Blind display defaults to cues Step 2 Press S3 Spread Sheet to display the cue spreadsheet Step 3 Adjust the track status as necessary see above Step 4 Press S2 Create Cue x Enter to create cue x Step 5 Press Channel y to select channel y You can also use And Thru and Except to select multiple channels Step 6 Press At 2 to set selected channels to level z Step 7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 until all required levels are set Delete cues in the spreadsheet display Step 1 Press Blind The Blind display defaults to cues Step 2 Press S3 Spread Sheet to display the cue spreadsheet Step 3 Press S6 Delete Cue Step 4 Press x to select cue x You can also use And Thru and Except to select multiple cues Step 5 Press Enter to delete the selected cue s Step 6 Press Enter to confirm that you really want to delete the cue s Note When you delete cues in the spreadsheet display channels that track into other cues will not be deleted regardless of the track status To delete a cue and its tracking levels use the Blind display 140 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Replace levels in the spreadsheet display Step 1
138. U9 3 BAON jud nI SG U9 3 Jesu S S9MHOS 9J0 N pale 918 MES SADOS SJON uany 919 9q abe 1xeN abed snol naig 1U9 3 9 0 N juana Adoy uany Jesu 919 doo7 asay sexos eo 0JO N dung 9jeu ono awi apo9 juany pajas Z21S 2918 jqes q OLS apo net owner Upa umay d 9H 181 Aay oDeg 1xoN e6eY snolnald soe day olde 19403 1817 Aay les s s ss ts es cs s fdsa panunu0 sAexyos Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual 45 211a JIWS ajejdway 11 ajejdwa JIWS unay S OMOS eoi abeg 1xeN abeg snoinald einquny mala leqe1 1091S onueu g JINS SJepoou3 jepoou3 dnjes JIWS uny synejeg josoy suondo 12319 Hoon NLUeg abed d ispoous einqui dnies 479 uny syinejeg jesey abed 1xoN eDBeg snol naig age Aoba ae einqunv SINS e JO aus KypeuosJe suonouny 4718 unay abra 1XoN oDeg snoinaig ul d Pana eee JINS ps us jos so 1 59 SS EE panunuo sKexyos Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual 46 Channel Concepts in the Emphasis Control System The Emphasis Control System controls channels using both Highest Takes Precedence HTP and Latest Takes Precedence LTP conventions and stores information for channels using both Preset and Tracking conventions These conventions are described here so that you can understand the expected behavior of your control channels and cue playback HTP vs LTP Emphasis uses two basic channel types Highest Takes Precedence HTP channels a
139. about console commands console displays console commands Fixture Box displays rr rr C a a O A pas a AH 2 ere aTe Maaga aT ela Et ale NG a 1 n 12 13 14 s 25 2 7 a E 36 37 O OODODODODODO DO O e 8 8 3 D Qs e O ID e n n i8 129 T30 isi i33 134 i35 136 idi T2 143 144 PIOODU ES 73 74 75 7 78 82 83 8 DODDOSDODODD DODOODODODON gecce boceto DIODIOD 5 96 3 9 100 101 102 104 tos 106 i07 108 109 itl mz ms da iis lue M7 d8 ns izo 000 HOO T Qs a O O O O aeta OJO O OJOJO OJO OJO OJO OJO OJO OJO 1 2 3 4 y 10 11 12 O O O O Q OOOO DODODODODOO OJO OJO OJO Submasters Use submasters for Grandmaster and Blackout AB and CD Fader cister B in
140. ack Track Track Track will modify tracking levels in cues in a backward direction in the cue list Changes made to cue 3 with a Track Track record will affect the cue list as shown below in bold levels Track changes backward through the cue list Step 1 Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels Dimmers and Fixtures page 86 Step 2 Set levels using the procedure described in Set Levels page 89 and Moving Light Control page 95 Step 3 Press Track Track x Enter where x is the cue number you want to track from Changes will be made to all channels that remain at the same level from the source cue backward through the cue list until a move channel block or allfade cue is encountered EN Live Editing 115 Fill Track Track Track Track will modify tracking levels in cues in both directions in the cue list Changes made to cue 3 with a Track Track Track record will affect the cue list as shown below in bold levels Cuet foo 75 foo 80 90 Cue2 50 75 jeo 80 25 o 7s 75 jso les o 7s 7s jeo so oo 7s f7s foo 55 Track changes forward and backward through the cue list Step 1 Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels Dimmers and Fixtures page 86 Step 2 Set levels using the procedure described in Set Levels page 89 and Moving Light Control page 95 Step 3 Press Track Track Track x Enter where x is
141. acros Time Code System setup Recorded 27 Total 000 000 Size Remaining Size KB 9972 19 235 999 255 1999 3000 28 1449 KB Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Chapter 4 Live Editing This chapter contains information about selecting and controlling channels and fixtures for use in a live environment where changes happen on screen and on stage This chapter also covers parking channels and dimmers recording cues and submasters and timing concepts This chapter contains the following sections EN Live Editing DISDIBVS cc KAN yoda Wee ee ead ek 84 Manual Control ooo 86 AT ee 112 Submasiors ooo a 121 Time FUNC ONS o oooooocccccc 125 Special FUNC ONS o oooooocoonco 128 83 84 Displays To control channels live you need to be in either the Stage or Fader display in Emphasis Console These displays show you the channel levels of the current Emphasis Control System output Stage Display The Stage display shows you the total output of the Emphasis Control System with channel levels generated by manual control cues in the A B and C D fader pairs submasters and channels in the background When Emphasis is set to a System ID other than zero 0 the System ID is visible in the Stage display Remote Focus Units RFU and Wireless Remote Focus Units WRFU will also display non zero System IDs System ID 2 E Chan P 001 3 04 05 006 07 08 09 40
142. ade up in the up time and then remain active until you press the bump button again Apply timing to submasters Step 1 Press Sub x Time where x is the submaster number you want to select Step 2 Press lt a gt Enter where lt a gt is the up time if required Step3 Press lt b gt Enter where lt b gt is the dwell time if required You can also press Clear instead of a time value until either Manual or Hold is displayed Step 4 Press c Enter where c is the down time if required EN Live Editing 127 128 Special Functions The functions listed in this section can be used for cues submasters groups and focus points Except Solo If you need to record a cue submaster group or focus point and there are levels on stage you don t want to include in the record you can use the Except command to remove a channel group cue or submaster from the record instruction Record using Except Step 1 Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels Dimmers and Fixtures page 86 Step 2 Set levels using the procedure described in Set Levels page 89 and Moving Light Control page 95 Step 3 Press Record Cue x where x is the target cue number You can replace lt Cue gt with Sub Group or Focus Point Step 4 Press Except y where y is the channel number you want to exclude Except Group y where y is the group number to exclude c
143. age Effects Effect cues can be created in Stage or Blind see Blind Effects page 149 The advantage of working in Stage is that you can see the look of each effect step as it is created An effect is made up of channels at levels in steps Steps are played back in the effect at a given rate and in a given direction Typically effects will loop their steps so that they can play continuously In Blind effect steps can be randomized and can be assigned other attributes that affect their playback Create an effect in Stage Step 1 Press Stage Step 2 Press Cue x Type 3 to set cue x to the effect type The attribute bar will indicate that the cue is now an effect Dwell Out Lo o 0 0 Step 3 Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels Dimmers and Fixtures page 86 You can select channels fixtures groups or focus points Step 4 Set levels using the procedure described in Set Levels page 89 and Moving Light Control page 95 If a channel references a focus point for its level the level will update when the focus point is changed Step 5 Press Record Enter Active channels will be recorded to step 1 of the effect Step 6 Repeat steps 3 5 making sure that only the channels you want to include in a step are active Each time you press Record Enter the next consecutive step will be recorded Note If you want to record steps out of order press lt S7 More Softkeys g
144. ally Chan Set the track status in the spreadsheet display Step 1 Press Blind The Blind display defaults to cues Step 2 Press S3 Spread Sheet to display the cue spreadsheet Step 3 Press S7 Enable Track to change the track status S7 will always indicate the next available setting Enable Track Enable Backtrack Enable Filltrack or Disable Track You can also use the Track key instead of S7 if you wish The current track status is displayed below the keypad corner A CAUTION Unlike the Stage and Blind displays changes made in the spreadsheet are recorded immediately without the need for the additional Record or Track command Levels will track or not track based on the track status indicated below the keypad corner Changes made in the spreadsheet will be stored but will not update levels on stage until you play back the cue again Blind Editing 139 Edit cues in the spreadsheet display Step 1 Press Blind The Blind display defaults to cues Step 2 Press S3 Spread Sheet to display the cue spreadsheet Step 3 Adjust the track status as necessary see above Step 4 Press x to select cue x You can also use And Thru and Except to select multiple cues Step 5 Press Channel y to select channel y You can also use And Thru and Except to select multiple channels Step 6 Press At 2 to change levels for the selected channel s in the selected cue s to level z
145. amic or manual Type a time value or press Clear to set dynamic or manual fade time The dynamic fade time displayed in purple follows the fade time stored with the cue Press right arrow gt key to set the Follow time This can be fixed dynamic or manual Type a time value or press Clear to set dynamic fade time or Hold Hold takes the place of a Hold for Go command see below Press the down arrow y key to move to the next step Repeat steps 5 through 12 for each step in the subroutine that contains cue information Press Record Enter to record the subroutine To add a subroutine style to a step Step 1 Step 2 Blind Editing Select the step you want to modify and press S8 Style Press 1 Enter for Loop to Step and enter the step number to loop to and the number of loops you want the subroutine to perform The Loop to Step style is typically entered in the last step of a subroutine 2 Enter for Bounce and enter the number of bounces you want the subroutine to perform The Bounce style is typically entered in the last step of a subroutine unless a Subroutine Fade step is also in the subroutine In that case the Bounce step will be the next to last step 3 Enter for Jump to Cue and enter the cue number to jump to The Jump to Cue style is typically entered in the last step of a subroutine 4 Enter for Hold for Go A Hold for Go step causes the subroutine to stop and wait fo
146. an see the submaster type setting Inhibitive submasters display IN for channels recorded to them You can edit or delete submasters one at a time or by selecting ranges Using the replace level feature you can change channels at one level to a new level without having to select them individually Chan Elah las FL FL FL FL xbbtbla tah ak 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 06 O6 06 01 01 01 01 04 01 AN CAUTION Unlike the Stage and Blind displays changes made in the spreadsheet are recorded immediately without the need for the additional Record command Changes made in the spreadsheet will be stored but will not update levels on stage until you move the submaster fader to zero and back to a level The submaster LED will blink to indicate that the active submaster has been changed Edit submasters in the spreadsheet display Step 1 Press Blind The Blind display defaults to cues Step 2 Press Sub Enter to view submasters in Blind Step 3 Press S3 Spread Sheet to display the submaster spreadsheet Step 4 Press x to select submaster x You can also use And Thru and Except to select multiple submasters Step 5 Press Channel y to select channel y You can also use And Thru and Except to select multiple channels Step 6 Press At 2 to change levels for the selected channel s in the selected cue s to level z To remove levels from a submaster press At Clear Note Todesele
147. and 181 any laays ang eunnouqns ang pulg snes dung seinquny einquny asa S S9MHOS 9J0 N asa SKIYYOS 9J0 N casa skayyog eso das 219190 deis asu yBIH mo7 INO IIEMq UI eu deis y XING3 anideo sns dung les vs ss ss ws es cs is tea panunu0 sAexyos Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual 43 e _ _ esi ESC a a a a IN sbumas aaa ewwa oymoug anes ouen mous dmies esas umoa ne wu o LLL 888g ebed snoweid ug uote seqe lage S 9MHOS 910 9PIH MOYS yed enixiJ 2 yoyed uored euni sexos aioyy yoredun abe 1xeN abeg snoIndid uoieg suey 9 1J01d Jawwig pee panunu0 sAexyos Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual 44 IWS suonounj dnjas winjey 145617 buro dies sejjoJg r4 Allg Jasay ee sach ble se jog dnyas dnjas uinjay sayioig dnies a 1j014 o1 Ado u m g ud 0 Jea Jea jueoJed aj oJg 10919 dnjes uunjey ae ws 14014 01 Ado9 gilld pug 19 Iv o wenos j B sonjos dmesg Amos winjay ajyorg Jasay ajosg 0 Adon usamag 14 pug o 12319 vJeoj juaoag alljol Najas seinquny dmes unay age du abeg 1xoN eDeg snol naig ug OL dij4 1uepuedepu 9uueyy dnies d1HS welbold dL1HS Zd1HS wes6Old sweibojd dnjes unay S SMJOS OJON leqe1 0JO N ejeq s amp eq x90 2 01 SY Owl 1919S aw jeay dnyes 918 Hos vOLS Jud na ejejag abeg 1xoN abeg snol naig
148. annels at their Stage levels in the cue group or submaster you specify When you use Record for cues only the cue you specify is affected Track on the other hand can make changes across a series of cues see Tracking page 114 Record cues Step 1 Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels Dimmers and Fixtures page 86 Step 2 Set levels using the procedure described in Set Levels page 89 and Moving Light Control page 95 Step 3 Press Record Cue x Enter where x is the target cue number If the target cue number has already been recorded a Cue Recorded message will blink on the stage display If you choose to record to a used number the new look will overwrite the old look Note Remember that the Record function will store all Stage levels in the cue group or submaster you specify Make sure that you have cleared all unwanted channels before recording your cues Stray channel levels may come from captured channels active submasters cues in the fader pairs or channels in the background If you need to leave a channel or dimmer at a level but you do not want to record it at that level in your cues use the Except or Solo commands see Special Functions page 128 or the Park command see Park page 109 Link Functions There are times when you want cues to play back out of numerical order or you may want other things to happen in your Emphasis Control System when a cue is
149. ar Options 3 Enter to clear the TX and TY encoders on all pages S6 Clear Options 4 Enter to clear unused attributes from encoders on all pages e S6 Clear Options 5 Enter n Enter to clear the encoders on page n S6 Clear Options 6 Enter n Enter to clear the attributes from category n on all pages Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Use S3 Pan Tilt to assign pan and tilt to encoders on all pages Press Setup 1 1 Enter 4 Enter to view the Encoder Setup display Press Step 1 Step 2 S3 Pan Tilt 1 Enter to place pan on the E1 encoder and tilt on the E2 encoder on all pages S3 Pan Tilt 2 Enter to place pan on the X encoder and tilt on the Y encoder on all pages S3 Pan Tilt 3 Enter to place pan on the TX encoder and tilt on the TY encoder on all pages Use S6 Autoload Encoders to load attributes Press Setup 1 1 Enter 4 Enter to view the Encoder Setup display Step 1 Itis best to clear the encoders on a page or pages you want to autoload Only unassigned attributes are assigned to encoders when the Autoload Encoders command is used Also only the E1 E5 encoders are affected by the Autoload Encoders command If you are using more than 5 attributes in a given category you will need to add any missing attributes to your encoder setup manually Step 2 Press S6 Autoload Encoders Enter to load the first five use
150. are displayed individually in the playback cue list and the Fader Status display will show the time remaining and completion percentage for the whole cue not on a per part basis When a part cue plays back the levels for all channels that will move in the cue turn green on the stage display as soon as Go is pressed Movement of those channels depends on the fade times recorded in the part and whether or not a Wait time is applied to the part Effect Cues When you play back an effect cue in a fader pair the faders take on different functions The left hand fader in the pair becomes a level master for the running effect The LEDs for the right hand fader only move to 50 to indicate that an effect is running To fade out of an effect with a dwell time of hold press Clear on the fader pair to start the downfade To clear an effect cue entirely press Clear Clear Subroutine Cues E Playback When you play back a subroutine cue you are actually playing back a series of cues at a given rate see Subroutines page 143 The Fader Status display will indicate the subroutine cue number as well as the currently running cue based on the subroutine s steps see Fader Status display page 173 The faders behave as they do when running an effect cue The left hand fader in the pair becomes a level master for the running subroutine The LEDs for the right hand fader only move to 50 to indicate that a subroutine is running 177 178 Pl
151. are entered in the step but there is no reference to the group If the group changes the effect step will not Select focus points using the Focus Point key When you place a focus point in an effect step it does create a reference to that focus point If levels change in the referenced focus point the effect will play back those changes Press S8 Add Channels to place selected channels into selected steps Press At y to assign level y to selected channels You can set direct levels for any channel or set a level by reference to a focus point Repeat steps 4 through 6 for additional steps or ranges of steps Press Record Enter to record the effect Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Note fyou create a range of steps and then add a range of channels the selected channels will be added one to one in each selected step For example if you create or select steps 1 through 10 and then add channels 1 through 10 channel 1 will be placed in step 1 channel 2 into step 2 and so on This feature will not split up groups or focus points across steps Groups and focus points are always entered into a step in their entirety Delete channels from a step in an effect Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Press Blind The Blind display defaults to cues Press Cue x to select cue x If you want to modify an effect recorded directly to a submaster press Sub x where x is the submas
152. asis Control System Step 7 Click Unzip to extract the software onto the floppy disk Step 8 Click OK when completed Step 9 Close the WinZip window and the Facepanel Software window Step 10 In the Windows Start menu click Log Off Click the Log Off button in the dialog that opens This will return you to the Emphasis Login screen Step 11 Click Emphasis to login as the Emphasis User Step 12 Eject the floppy disk from the Emphasis Server Insert the floppy disk into the disk drive on the Facepanel Step 13 Power up the Facepanel The software will load automatically Step 14 When completed eject the floppy disk from the disk drive and restart the Facepanel Step 15 Press t or to select the Emphasis Server processor to connect to You will need to arrow down to select the processor even if only one processor is listed System Overview 11 Step 16 Press Enter The Facepanel will boot and the Stage displays will open on the attached monitors Installing Software on the Emphasis Server If you are reinstalling a new version of software you will be provided specific instructions for installation with the release notes for that version When installing Emphasis software you are given the opportunity to install only Emphasis program files located on the C drive or to install a full disk image for both the C and D drives AN CAUTION Installing a full disk image for the C and D drives will delete show f
153. asis Control System Specifications 270 Express Facepanel Specifications 276 Expression Facepanel Specifications 280 Insight Facepanel Specifications 285 Note Some functions that are available may be modified over the life of the product In addition functions not described here may also be added In order to maintain the highest possible standards ETC reserves the right to change specifications without notice E Specifications 269 Emphasis Control System Specifications System Capacity 32 767 DMX512 dimmers attributes e 500 1000 2500 5000 control channels 9 999 cues e 500 groups e 255 focus points Effects with up to 100 steps each e 2 000 macros 24 submasters 10 pages 108 10 on Insight Two timed manual fader pairs Hard drive e CD RW drive Diskette drive Single Dual VGA outputs Emphasis Console Facepanel Interface Playback Monitor Fader status Cue List MIDI SMPTE Event List Command Monitor Stage Blind Spreadsheet and List Cue Sub Group and Focus Point Fader A B and or C D fader Submasters Tracksheet Patch Proportional levels 32 User definable profiles Full integration with data and visualization Park Channel or dimmer Setup Expand Flexichannel displays only used channels 270 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Playback Controls Faders Two timed
154. asters e Channel Submaster modes Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Channel functions 8 bit and 16 bit data types Both highest level Highest Takes Precedence and last action Latest Takes Precedence channel types Group function to proportionally manipulate channels Proportional adjustment with level wheel And Except Only and Thru functions for selection of control lists Full function Level sets a channel to an editable default value Independent channels Flip channel Moving Light Functions Patch fixtures through Emphasis Visualization by assigning personalities starting channels starting DMX512 address and remote dimmer Swap focus pan or tilt flip Five attribute categories Fixture box level adjustment Fixture focus with Solo Cue functions Up to 9 999 cues in the range 0 1 to 999 9 Discrete upfade and downfade times 00 00 99 59 for each cue Linked cue sequences Effect cues Split wait times Follow time Link to cue or macro Label Eight part multipart cues Selective cue recording Update cue command Attribute range editing Subroutines with cue or style steps Spreadsheet editing Cue list Group functions Up to 500 groups Any cue or submaster may be accessed as a group Group labels Spreadsheet editing Group list Focus point functions Up to 255 focus points Update cues and submasters when focus point changes Record level of focus point without link Available in eff
155. ate Label DM Preset 4 1 s2 s3 s4 S5 S6 S7 Subr p Overrides Page Page Softkeus Fixture 88 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Set Levels Once channels or fixtures are selected you will want to set a level Levels indicate the intensity level for conventional channels or the attribute setting for fixtures Emphasis Console displays channel levels as a two digit percentage from 00 to FL 100 Note You can view the raw data for 16 Bit channels pan and tilt in the fixture box see Moving Light Control page 95 otherwise the percentage equivalent is displayed in the channel area of the Emphasis Console displays Channel levels can be set directly or by reference to a focus point see Focus Points page 96 Direct levels are stored into focus points and can be recorded into groups see Groups page 108 cues and submasters Direct Levels The simplest way to set a channel level is to do it directly using the At Full and Level keys or the level wheel trackpad This is most frequently used for setting levels for channels that control intensity dimmers When you use fixtures you can set levels directly by channel or by using the encoders or the arrow keys and trackpad If you are selecting fixtures using the mouse in Emphasis Visualization you can set levels using the right click menu or the Design tools See the Emphasis Visualization User Manual for more information on selecting fixtures and setting
156. attribute to perform Available tables include Stop Sine Step Sawtooth Ramp Inverse Ramp Mark On Mark Off Spiral Tangent and Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual graphically 100 100 0 0 100 100 SINE 100 100 0 0 100 100 RAMP 100 100 MARK OFF 100 0 TANGENT Offset eee Size C1 Note Random The following diagram shows these waveforms INVERSE RAMP 100 0 100 SAWTOOTH STEP 100 0 100 100 0 mi 100 SPIRAL 100 N N A a 100 RANDOM This value determines where in the waveform this entry starts 50 starts this entry half way into the waveform 0 starts the entry at the beginning of the wave This setting determines how big a change the dynamic effect will make to a channel level A size of 10 means that the level will vary from 10 to 10 of the base value This setting determines the base rate of movement for the selected line Generally a base rate of 100 means a cycle will take about 4 seconds For more information on Dynamic Effects see Dynamic Effects page 99 System Settings 67 68 Edit Dynamic Effect Template Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Press Setup 1 1 Enter to view the Moving Light Functions menu Press 5 Enter to view the Dynamic Template List Press S1 Select Template n Enter where n is the number of the template you want to edit Press S3
157. ay back a subroutine using Go To Step Step 1 Playback the subroutine cue in either the A B or C D fader pair Step 2 Press lt S7 More Softkeys gt S5 Go To Subr Step x where x is the step number you want to go to Step 3 Press Go on the fader pair currently running the subroutine The step indicated in step 2 above will play back and the subroutine will continue to run as recorded Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Submasters Submasters can contain recorded channel levels effects or subroutines Submasters can also be set to the Supermaster style which allows them to master other submasters Playing back submasters that do not contain subroutines always follow the pile on or Highest Takes Precedence convention This includes effect submasters and submasters created with the Load Sub command Submaster Pages There are ten submaster pages available If submasters are active when a new page is loaded the levels for active subs will not change to the new contents until you bring the submaster fader back to zero and raise it again The submaster s LED will blink to indicate that the active levels do not match the current page To load a new page of submasters press Page x where x is the page number Effects Effects on submasters are always running They do not appear on stage until you raise the fader on the submaster The submaster fader masters the channel levels in the effect You can also play the
158. between the standard 2D and 3D Servers Upto CAD Views Wireframe only Wireframe Isometric and Shaded Emphasis Views Wireframe only Wireframe Isometric and Shaded Emphasis Facepanel The Emphasis Facepanel can be any of the following consoles e Expression with Emphasis Expression 3 Expression 2x Imagine 3 Insight with Emphasis Insight 3 Insight 2x Focus Express all varieties When used in an Emphasis system the Facepanel becomes an input device on the network rather than a stand alone device You are limited to some of the constraints of the individual Facepanel types such as submaster quantities channel fader availability and monitor counts however you gain cue channel and dimmer counts as well as ETCNet2 capability when connected to an Emphasis Server When a Facepanel has been upgraded to Emphasis operation it will no longer operate as a stand alone console The Facepanel essentially becomes a keyboard with some DMX Node functionality As such the Facepanel cannot operate without the Emphasis Server online In case of an emergency you can export your Emphasis show file as a v3 1 show reload the v3 1 software to your Facepanel and run it as a stand alone console The System Overview 7 procedure for exporting your show to v3 1 format is described in the Emphasis Visualization User Manual The procedure for returning your Facepanel to v3 1 operation is described in Return the Facepanel to v3
159. ble in EDMX which corresponds to 64 universes of DMX DMX is the industry standard protocol for controlling dimmers from a lighting control console Each universe of DMX contains 512 addresses Each Emphasis Control System can be custom configured to the needs of the venue so to explain how patching to EDMX addresses gets you industry standard DMX at an output in a simple system please see the diagram below Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Console Patch Configuration NCE Control Channels EE or AAP Zao EDMX Addresses NAIA m 512514 fI025 02 22767 DMX Output Port 1 DMX Output Port 42 DMX Output Port 3 System Settings 73 74 Using Emphasis with Dimmer Doubling Dimmer Doubling is a feature of ETC Sensor dimming that enables you to use a single dimmer and a special two fer to control two Source Four fixtures separately In Emphasis there is no convention for patching dimmers as 1A and 1B to indicate which side of the Dimmer Doubler you are using as was the case in previous control consoles To patch doubled circuits you will need to patch the EDMX address corresponding to DMX 1 256 for the A side of the doublers and EDMX addresses corresponding to DMX 257 512 for the B side of the doublers If you have any questions about patching Dimmer Doubling within an Emphasis Control System please call ETC Technical Services see Help from ETC Technical Services page 3
160. bump on to fade in the submaster and sub bump offto fade out the submaster The submaster will fire as soon as you press Go unless you have entered a Follow time in the cue Link a cue to a submaster Step 1 Press Cue x where x is the cue you are linking the submaster to Step 2 Press Link Sub y Enter where y is the submaster number to link to a sub bump on Link Sub y Enter where y is the submaster number to link to a sub bump off You can press the actual submaster bump button instead of entering the number Link Sub Sub Bump y Enter You still need to indicate 4 or to indicate whether you want the submaster to turn on or off Clear a link You can only have one item linked to a single cue at a time If you have a cue linked to another cue and then link a macro to that same cue the cue link will be replaced with the macro link You can also clear a link completely Clearing a link does not clear any associated Follow time see Follow page 126 Clear a link Step 1 Press Cue x where x is the cue number containing the link Step 2 Press Link Clear This removes the link Tracking Tracking is an editing method that enables you to change channel levels through consecutive cues You can track forward track backward or both directions at once Tracking is a powerful tool that should be used with care as it can make sweeping changes in your
161. can remove channels from a selection using the Except key The same is true of fixture selections In most cases the channel key s LED is lit making the Channel key press optional Select channels Press Channel x to select a single channel e Press Channel x And z to select non consecutive channels Press Channel x Thru z to select a range of channels e Press Channel a Thru g Except c to select a range of channels except channel c You can use Except multiple times to remove multiple channels from the selection Channels 1 Thru 1 0 Except 5 Except 7 selects channels 1 4 6 and 8 10 e Press Channel Enter to select all channels with levels above zero In Emphasis Visualization you can click on a fixture symbol to select its channel See the Emphasis Visualization User Manual for more information on selecting fixtures using the mouse Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Select Accessorized Channels e Press Channel y where y is the intensity channel The fixture box is displayed and the encoders or arrow keys and trackpad can be used to control intensity and other accessory attributes simultaneously e Press Channel z where z is the accessory channel Control of the slected accessory is available on the level wheel or trackpad Select dimmers Press S7 More Softkeys gt S3 Dim x to select a single dimmer for dim
162. cepanel or the Emphasis Server keyboard when the Emphasis Console application is visible or in Emphasis mode Because of this you can use some of the Emphasis Console keyboard shortcuts For example c1t5f will be interpreted by Emphasis Console if you re not in label mode as Channel 1 Thru 5 Full Serial Button Protocol communicates with Emphasis Console only so you cannot use any of the Emphasis Visualization shortcuts here Digits that appear outside of arguments for keywords will be interpreted as pressing the appropriate numeric keys on the Facepanel Individual commands are normally separated by a space a tab or a semicolon Adjacent commands only have to be separated if they both are alphabetic a z Commands cannot span more than one line Arguments Arguments come in three types Numeric This is a string of digits interpreted as a number Numeric oon o arguments can be preceded by or Negative numbers are normally only used for wheel movements e g 12345 e CueName This is a string of digits and possibly a decimal point interpreted as a cue name Only three digits before and one digit after the decimal point are supported e g 123 4 Level This is used for pot channel and dimmer levels It is normally a number between 0 and 100 and is interpreted as a percentage An optional 96 can follow the number If the number is followed by a it
163. changes to the selected cue s Track Enter to record changes and track levels forward You cannot use back track or fill track in the Tracksheet display Note Tracksheetcan be found on S7 More Softkeys S8 Tracksheet in the Blind display on Express facepanels Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Subroutines Subroutine is a special type of cue or submaster that places other cues within steps to be played back in order Steps can either contain a cue or be set to a style A style step contains an instruction that controls the subroutine s playback Styles include filters to limit playback to a certain group of channels loop and jump commands and other playback specific styles Available styles depend on whether the subroutine is recorded to a cue or to a submaster Subroutines in Cues Subroutines in cues play back within the cue list and can be played back on the A B and C D fader pairs If you use Load Sub to place a cue containing a subroutine on a submaster the subroutine will retain the characteristics of a subroutine cue not a subroutine on submaster Cue Steps Cue steps execute the cue number they reference If you change channel levels in a referenced cue any subroutine that contains that cue will play back the modified levels Cue steps can be given any of the standard cue fade types e Crossfade A crossfade cue step fades all increasing levels in the upfade time and all decreasing
164. ck Looks with Timing o 304 vii This page intentionally blank viii Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Introduction This manual covers the basic installation and operation of the Emphasis Control System Specifically this volume contains the operational instructions for Emphasis Console the facepanel interface to your Emphasis Control System For information on using Emphasis Visualization please see the Emphasis Visualization User Manual The introduction contains the following sections Using this Manual 0 6c eee eee 2 Help from ETC Technical Services 3 If you are reading these manuals cover to cover please begin with the Emphasis Visualization User Manual The Emphasis Visualization User Manual contains a Quick Start chapter that contains a tutorial for new users and some basic information for users familiar with WYSIWYG and or Expression style consoles Nu Introduction Using this Manual This manual is intended for use in conjunction with the Emphasis Visualization User Manual This manual assumes that you have a basic familiarity with the Microsoft Windows operating system opening and closing files closing and resizing windows using Windows Explorer and performing basic disk operations In order to be specific about where features and commands are found the following naming and text conventions will be used Emphasis Server hardware
165. ck run but you also need time to get from the console to the stage you can use these two macros to accomplish this task Turn Worklights On and Clear the Fader Pairs Channel x Full Clear AB Clear CD This macro brings a worklight channel x to full then clears the cues from the A B and C D fader pairs You can add a range of channels to your selection using the And and Thru commands if needed Turn Worklights On and Clear Both Faders and Background Channels Channel x Full Clear AB Clear CD S3 Backgrnd Overrides Enter Enter This macro brings a worklight channel x to full then clears the cues from the A B and C D fader pairs and any background channels You can add a range of channels to your selection using the And and Thru commands if needed Turn Worklights On and Clear All Playbacks Channel x Full Clear AB Clear CD S3 Backgrnd Overrides Enter Enter S1 Fadeout Subr Enter This macro brings a worklight channel x to full then clears the cues from the A B and C D fader pairs any background channels and any running subroutines on submasters You can add a range of channels to your selection using the And and Thru commands if needed Macros 189 190 Turn All Channels Off Except Worklights Channel 1 Thru At 0 0 Enter Channel x Full This macro selects all channels and sets them to zero and brings up the worklights channel x to full
166. coders are Grandmaster and Blackout The A B Keyswitch Use the keyswitch to submasters for controlling assigned channels used when controlling moving lights or grandmaster fader masters the output of switch the facepanel between system or for additional playback faders using the fixtures Each attribute of a fixture is typically dependent channels patched to the IDs in multiple server systems Subroutines on Submasters feature These assigned to an encoder There are six pages of system The blackout key toggles the faders can be switched to channel mode to encoders to accommodate required attributes output of the system Independent directly control the first 108 channels in your Insight 3 and Insight ECS only channels are not affected system 1 1 2 2 1 aad ooo Lo Lo Lo Lo Lo Lo Lo koko OOO AA OO 42 43 44 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 68 69 oe E A se O T To M 1 3 3 3 x o ER A HR S D 9 Sale ojo oye ale ale ojo oye ae alpa Sale ojo offo ala ojo alfa a L LL ESTE o PIL ES 89 90 91 92 93 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 M i i P gt SSeS 78 74 75 76 7i 9 84 26 87 AB and CD Fader Pairs Use the fader Control Keypad The control keypad Rate and Level Wheels The rate and level pairs to crossfade from one recorded cue contains various keys for controlling and wheels adjust the playback rate of cues and to another The faders
167. ct channels after pressing At but before entering a new level simply press Channel or Sub 156 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Delete submasters in the spreadsheet display Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Press Blind The Blind display defaults to cues Press Sub Enter to view submasters in Blind Press S3 Spread Sheet to display the submaster spreadsheet Press S6 Delete Sub Press x to select submaster x You can also use And Thru and Except to select multiple submasters Press Enter to delete the selected submaster s Press Enter to confirm that you really want to delete the submaster s Replace levels in the spreadsheet display Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Blind Editing Press Blind The Blind display defaults to cues Press Sub Enter to view submasters in Blind Press S3 Spread Sheet to display the submaster spreadsheet Press x to select submaster x You can also use And Thru and Except to select multiple submasters Press Channel y to select channel y You can also use And Thru and Except to select multiple channels Press S3 Replace Level z Enter where z is the level you want to replace Only channels at that level are selected Use the Full key to select channels at that level Press a Enter where a is the level you want to replace the level z
168. cted channels of selected fixtures Channel Levels White on Red Selected channel s level as it is being raised or lowered Yellow In Stage this level is generated by a submaster White In Stage and Fader this level is generated by an Effect In Blind Spreadsheet and Tracksheet this level is recorded in a submaster group focus point or an allfade cue Red ess In Stage and Fader this level belongs to a captured channel In Blind and Tracksheet unrecorded levels appear in red s Green Channel level has moved from its recorded level in the previous cue In Blind Spreadsheet and Tracksheet the recorded level is lower than in the prior cue Blue In Blind Spreadsheet and Tracksheet the recorded level is higher than in the prior cue e Purple Channel level is the same as in the prior cue 28 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Gray In Blind this level is recorded into a multi part cue see Multi Part cues page 136 but is not recorded into the currently displayed cue part Beneath Channel Levels Frames Light Green Lower half of frame value Violet Center of frame value Light Blue Upper half of frame value Stage Blind and Fader The Stage display shows you the current levels of all active channels The Blind display looks almost exactly the same as Stage but is used to view and edit
169. cues groups submasters subroutines and effects without affecting the look on stage Emphasis Console User Interface 29 Expression Insight facepanels Display Name Indicates the current display and time 004 473 04 05 006 f 3 5 3 1 9 20 021 Channel Area Displays the channels in your show A in gray the levels of those 051 channels in various colors and any focus point nag reference below the level E Indication of reference to a Focus Point Attribute Bar Displays current settings for the selected cue group or submaster wue Type Up Down Wait Link Follow Rate Label 101 02 03 04 OS 106 07 08 09 10 444 Express facepanels Grandmaster 100 Sub Page 1 ULI ko Keypad Corner Indicates how Emphasis will interpret the next numerical entry If you enter a range only the last number in the value will be displayed Prompt Area Shows a prompt related to the next or just completed action Playback displays see u Fader C 3 gt Wait Link Follow Rate Complete Clear Cue Type Time Wait Link Follow Rate 2 5 Softkeys Additional Emphasis Console i E 5 A gem cmm um remotum EU IL The Fader display is accessed by a hard key on Expression and Insight facepanels and by a softkey on Express facepanels The Fader display selectively displays the contribution to the stage output of the A B and or C D fader pairs individual submasters or background 30 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Man
170. d Press S6 Edit Parameter Press 1 Enter to select Size Enter a size value between 0 2000 100 is the normal value less than 100 will contract the size of the movement above 100 will expand the size of the movement 2 Enter to select Rate Enter a rate value between 0 2000 100 is the normal value less than 100 will slow the movement above 100 will speed up the movement 3 Enter to select Offset Relation ship The offset relationship determines the spread of fixtures along the path For example if the movement is a pan tilt circle the offset relationship determines the spread of fixtures around that circle Offset relationship may be set to All all fixtures move together Even the total number of fixtures is spread evenly along the path Ratios the total number of fixtures is distributed in groupings set by the selected ratio For example 1 2 creates two groupings of fixtures like odd even 1 3 creates groupings of every third fixture and so on 4 Enter to select Delay Relation ship The delay relationship determines whether fixture groupings take turns or not Delay relationship may be set to All all fixtures move together no delay Even Each fixture takes a turn the first completes a full cycle of the dynamic effect before the next fixture starts and so on Ratios delay is determined by groupings of fixtures set by the selected ratio For example 1 2 dela
171. d Fader displays By reducing the number of channels you have to display you can reduce the amount of paging from screen to screen you need to do to view your data This of course assumes that you are using fewer than the maximum number of channels in your system or that your patch places channels all over the place with numerous gaps between them If you are using all the available channels Flexichannel will only change your display from horizontal to vertical channels Chan Cue Tupe Up Down Wait Link Follow Rate Label Cues left 9975 51 52 EE S4 55 Sb S s8 Mea update zo Page NE gg PRA Picture Expression Insight display shown Which channels are displayed is determined by the following guidelines Flexichannel displays channels with set levels whether those levels are recorded or not e Flexichannel does not display channels whose channel attributes see Channel Attributes page 58 have been changed unless levels are also set e Flexichannel displays all channels patched to fixtures Flexichannel displays links to focus points just as you would see in other channel displays Channels not displayed in Flexichannel displays are shown in gray in Spreadsheet Tracksheet and Patch Enable or disable Flexichannel Step 1 On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis Visualization press Setup 1 Enter to display the Systems Settings menu Step 2 Press 9 Enter to access the Fl
172. d attributes by category inthe E1 E5 encoders on each page page 1 position 2 image 3 color 4 beam 5 other S6 Autoload Encoders x Enter y where x is the encoder page and y is the category number to load the first five used attributes of category y in the E1 E5 encoders on page x S6 Autoload Encoders 7 Enter to load the attributes used in the show This is the functionality of the pre v1 8 0 Autoload Encoders command S6 Autoload Encoders 8 Enter to load the suggested Source Four Revolution encoder setup Reset encoder assignment defaults Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis Visualization press Setup 1 1 Enter to access the Moving Light Functions menu Press 4 Enter to display the Encoder Setup Press S7 Reset Defaults Press Enter to confirm or Clear to cancel the command Pressing Enter will restore the default encoder assignments The Dynamic Template List Dynamic Templates contain settings for moving light attributes that create movement such as a pan tilt circle or a rainbow color chase and are used when creating dynamic effects see Dynamic Effects page 99 Emphasis is provided with a number of Dynamic Templates already available These templates create some of the most popular types of moving light effects You can view and edit the contents of the templates in the Moving
173. d en a o PEN 179 Subroutine Cues 2c eee eee ee 179 S binaslers 1 curre la ae ace Se eee AG 181 Submaster Pages cece eee eee 181 ETMOCIS a ia NN eee 181 Subroutines on Submasters Subs on Subs 181 Submaster Rate cee eee 182 Supermasters 0c cece eee eee 182 WA CIOS uot AA arial ott na 183 Create Macros 00 eee eee 184 Learn Macro paaa pa ka Nanang Eee BG ad 184 Display Macros cece eee 184 Macro Editing s i any ARAB KARA deed KAG GAS xa 186 Special Macro Functions aaa 189 Playback Macros 0 0 e ee eee eee eae 190 Remote Macros 00000e eee eeeeee 190 Startup Macro 000 e eee eee 190 Sample Macros 000 cece ees 191 Real Time Programs 193 Real Time Programs eee eee eee 194 Setting the time and location 194 Create and Edit Real Time Programs 196 Enable Real Time Programs 199 Time and Location 0c eee eee 200 Control Interfaces 203 ETIGNeI2 d eret beeubeel Aaah bak aetna bete a 204 EDMX Basics ETCNet2 v4 0 0 and above 204 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual DMX Output 206 DMX Input i bene hn ee ede bee La 207 Remote Macros 0 00 eee 207 Remote Trigger a 208 Facepanel Configuration llle 210 Show Control Overview cee eee 211 MIDI Basics 2 ooh m rend em
174. d fixture s channels will be parked at their direct level or at the level generated by a referenced focus point or at zero if they were without a set level when parked When you unpark channels and dimmers they are released to the highest control input level or are sent to zero output Unpark channels Step 1 In the Stage display press S7 More Softkeys S6 Park In the Park display you do not need to press a softkey before selecting channels Step 2 Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels Dimmers and Fixtures page 86 You can also select channels to unpark by Group Cue Sub and Focus Point Step 3 Press Release to unpark the channel s Note Tounpark all channels from Stage press S6 Park Release Enter To unpark all channels in the Park display press Release Enter Unpark dimmers Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 In the Stage display press S7 More Softkeys gt S6 Park In the Park display you do not need to press a softkey before selecting dimmers Select dimmers using the procedure described in Select Channels Dimmers and Fixtures page 86 Press Release to unpark the dimmer s Note Tounpark all dimmers from Stage press S6 Park S7 More Softkeys S3 Dim Release Enter To unpark all dimmers in the Park display press S7 More Softkeys S3 Dim Release Enter EN Live Editing 111 112 Cues
175. d that you read Patching and EDMX in Emphasis Visualization Patch dimmers spare circuits in Emphasis Console Step 1 On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis Visualization press Patch to access the Patch display Step 2 Press S1 Dim x Enter where x is the dimmer number to select the dimmer You can use And Thru and Except to select ranges of dimmers Step 3 Press Channel y Enter where y is the channel number You cannot patch selected dimmers to more than one channel nor can you patch selected dimmers across ranges of channels Step 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for additional dimmers Unpatch dimmers in Emphasis Console Step 1 On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis Visualization press Patch to access the Patch display Step 2 Press S1 Dim x Enter where x is the dimmer number to select the dimmer You can use And Thru and Except to select ranges of dimmers Step 3 Press S6 Unpatch Note You cannot unpatch dimmers assigned to moving light fixtures using S6 Unpatch You must unpatch the fixture in Emphasis Visualization System Settings 71 72 Note Itis recommended that you NOT set patch 1 to 1 and then add moving lights This will create duplicate entries of Spare Circuit and moving lights which will in turn clutter the data spreadsheet and patch display Range Patching
176. de resolution Pop up displays E Specifications 271 272 Group Functions 500 groups with labels Any cue or submaster may be accessed as a group Submaster Functions Ten pages of 24 108 on Insight submasters with labels timing and rate attributes Bump buttons may be enabled disabled or solo Range editing of submaster attributes in submaster list Submasters 13 24 73 108 on Insight may be individually changed between pile on and inhibitive Supermasters Effect Functions Live effects editing 100 steps each Step times In Dwell Out step times High Low levels In Dwell Out effect times Effects may be recorded as cues and loaded to submasters Range editing of effect step values and attributes Subroutines Subroutines on submasters Up to 26 cue stacks 110 on Insight 100 steps with level and timing attributes Multiple step types Four playback styles Filter for selective playback Macros Macro List 2 000 macros 1 000 steps each Macros may activate any key or command sequence on the console Live Learn mode Blind editing Remote Macros via facepanel and video nodes Astronomical Time Clock Program up to 500 events Play back according to date day of week time of day Program longitude latitude of show location Play back in reference to time before after sunrise or sunset System Requires Emphasis Facepanel and Ethernet Hub Switch for o
177. der is at full the assigned submasters can play back their full output dependent upon the fader levels of the individual assigned submasters As you bring down the Supermaster s fader the levels of the assigned submasters are mastered proportionally Note Supermasters have no effect on inhibitive submasters Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Chapter 7 Macros Macros Macros are very powerful tools that can be used to customize your working environment and increase playback options This feature allows you to record up to 1 000 console commands to a single macro that can be activated by a single key press or can be linked to a cue for automatic activation You can have 2 000 macros in a show file This chapter contains the following sections Create Macros cect eee 182 Playback Macros 0 0 00 cece eee 188 Startup Macro 00 cc tes 188 Sample Macros 0000 0c ees 189 181 Create Macros Macros can be created using direct entry or by learning the commands as you perform them Macros can contain any button press command as well as some ETCLink functions Fader trackpad and encoder movements cannot be recorded into macros You can enter wait times into macros to pause their playback and you can fire macros from other macros Macros can be triggered directly by links to cues within subroutines and by using Remote Macros see Remote Macros page 205 for configurat
178. e Step 5 Raise the faders to move forward through the crossfade manually Once you reach level 10 on the faders the crossfade completes and you no longer have control over the levels in the cue You could also pull the faders down to zero to return to the previous cue state and then fade the cue up manually from there Note Grabbing crossfades manually is useful if you need to quickly force a cue to completion like when you need to setup for a scene in a rehearsal or if you need to edit a cue with a long crossfade Start a cue with manual control Step 1 Press Stage You must be in the stage display to select a cue for playback Step 2 If required press Cue x where x is the number of the cue you want to play back Step 3 Bring both faders down to the zero level closest to you Step 4 Press Go on the fader pair of your choice The cue will load but will not begin its fade until you slide the faders off the zero level Step 5 Raise the faders to move forward through the crossfade manually Once you reach level 10 on the faders the crossfade completes and you no longer have control over the levels in the cue Rate 6 Playback You can also temporarily modify a cue s playback by applying a S5 Rate to the fader pair S5 Rate settings are applied on a per cue basis and will not override the whole cue lists recorded times If you apply a rate to a standard crossfading cue the rate will affect
179. e Right click My Computer and click Properties Click the General tab You will find the Windows version information as well as the Emphasis system version The Support Info button also displays the version number as well as the phone numbers for ETC Americas ETC Europe and ETC Asia Note You can also use the shortcut A PAUSE BREAK to view the System Properties System Overview System Properties 2 x System Restore Automatic Updates Remote General Computer Name Hardware Advanced emre System Microsoft Windows XP Professional Ay Version 2002 i Suc Emphasis Server Bectronic Theatre Controls 5 sOEM a0 83 08 Manufactured and supported by CD heat Control CD 1 0 00 9 1 019 af 4 esed 512 MB of RAM __ Support Information Information Cla If you are asked to provide specific component version numbers it is recommended that you use the first method to find all the version numbers at the same time If that is not possible use one of the other methods to find the specific information you are looking for To find the complete list of version numbers on the Server Step 1 Minimize Emphasis Visualization and right click on Start menu on task bar and click Explore Alternatively you can press 4 E to launch Windows Explorer at any time Step 2 Navigate to this location C Program Files ETC Step 3 Double click the Emphasis Component Report This report contains versi
180. e output of the system Independent channels are not affected A B Keyswitch Use the keyswitch to switch the facepanel between system 10 7 Encoders and Page Keys The encoders are used when controlling moving lights or fixtures Each attribute of a fixture is typically assigned to an encoder There are six pages of encoders to accommodate required attributes Expression 3 and Expression ECS facepanels only 296 Express 125 250 ECS Facepanel Overview E Macro Keys Use the macro keys to Grandmaster and Blackout The Cluster A About tells you specific store and playback macros Macros are Navigation Keys Use navigation keys to Grandmaster fader masters the output of information about your show Learn stored series of console commands get around in displays move through dependent channels patched to the system The and Enter Macro are used in editing menus move through fields in the Fixture Blackout key toggles the output of the system macros Help provides information i Patch display or move through different Independent channels are not affected about console commands Display Keys Use the display attributes in the Fixture Box keys to choose from the available console displays Softkeys Use the softkeys to activate commands displayed at the bottom of various console Submasters Use submasters for displays manually controlling assigned channels or 0 d
181. e Register dialog click the I have my validation code button Enter the Registration Validation Code in the dialog Make sure to use all uppercase letters when you enter the code Insert Registration Code ax Please enter your code Click OK Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Upgrades To upgrade your Emphasis Control System contact the ETC dealer who provided your Emphasis Control System to purchase the upgrade When purchased you will receive an Upgrade Code that will unlock the new features you have purchased You can upgrade from a lower channel count to a higher channel count and or from 2D to 3D operation You can also purchase an activation code for the Wireless Remote Focus Unit WRFU and or WYSILink If you want to upgrade from a single monitor system to a dual monitor system to expand your desktop area you may need to send the Emphasis Server back to ETC for that hardware upgrade This hardware upgrade does not affect any functional abilities of the Emphasis Control System only the available monitor space Emphasis 3D will operate the same on single and dual monitor systems To upgrade your Emphasis Control System Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 System Overview Contact your ETC dealer to purchase your Upgrade Code When you have your Upgrade Code continue to Step 2 Power up your Emphasis Server In the Help menu click Upgrade Enter your Upgrade Code in the dia
182. e Trigger The Remote Trigger feature sends an On or Off signal to any external device that responds to a remote contact closure The Remote Trigger commands On Trigger switch closed and Off Trigger switch open are stored in macros You can set the Remote Trigger ID in Emphasis Visualization for mapping in multiple Facepanel systems Remote Trigger ports are available on Express Facepanels and on ETCNet2 Video Nodes To set the Remote Trigger ID in Emphasis Visualization Step 1 In the Emphasis mode Setup menu click IO xl EDMX Priority 1 ESMPTE Receive 1 EMIDI Receive 1 EMIDI Transmit 2 Remote Trigger ID 1 DK Cancel Step 2 In the Remote Trigger ID field enter the new value This may be any value between 1 255 The default value is 1 Step 3 Click OK Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual To set the Remote Trigger ID values on the Express facepanel Step 1 Power up or reboot the Express facepanel Step 2 When the prompt appears at startup press 1 2 3 to enter the configuration menu Step 3 Using the down arrow y key scroll to Remote Macros and press Enter Step 4 With Trigger Out System ID highlighted press Enter Step 5 Using the facepanel numeric keypad enter the System ID number This number should match the system ID of the facepanel and server Step 6 With Trigger Out Trigger ID highlighted press Enter Step 7 Using the facepanel numeric keypad en
183. e facepanel numeric keypad enter the ID number This may be any value between 0 255 0 will disable MIDI Output The default value is 2 Step 9 Press Enter Note If you make an error while changing any of these settings and you want to return to the previously stored values do not press S8 Simply turn the facepanel power off and on again The previous settings will be restored Step 10 Press S8 to save your settings and exit the MIDI configuration screen Step 11 Press S8 to save your settings and exit the main configuration screen Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Set the EMIDI Receive and Transmit values in Emphasis Visualization Step 1 n the Emphasis mode Setup menu click IO x EDMX Priority 1 ESMPTE Receive EMIDI Receive 1 EMIDI Transmit 2 Step 2 In the EMIDI Receive field enter the new value This may be any value between 0 255 0 will disable EMIDI Receive The default value is 1 Step 3 In the EMIDI Transmit field enter the new value This may be any value between 0 255 0 will disable EMIDI Transmit The default value is 1 Step4 Click OK ETC MIDI Message Formats The following MIDI message formats are used to control the console All numbers are in hexadecimal format Note off message format lt 8n gt lt kk gt lt vv gt Boda Baltes Note off status 0 Ub eem na MIDI channel number 0 F IKK ig ca ease ce Mies Key numb
184. e focus point s again Blind Editing 165 Edit focus points in the spreadsheet display Step 1 Press Blind The Blind display defaults to cues Step 2 Press Focus Point Enter to view focus points in Blind Step 3 Press S3 Spread Sheet to display the Focus Point Spreadsheet Step 4 Press x to select focus point x You can also use And Thru and Except to select multiple focus points Step 5 Press Channel y to select channel y You can also use And Thru and Except to select multiple channels Step 6 Press At 2 to change levels for the selected channel s in the selected cue s to level z To remove levels from a submaster press At Clear Note Todeselect channels after pressing At but before entering a new level simply press Channel or Focus Point Create focus points in the spreadsheet display Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Press Blind The Blind display defaults to cues Press Focus Point Enter to view focus points in Blind Press S3 Spread Sheet to display the Focus Point Spreadsheet Press S2 Create Focus x Enter to create focus point x Press Channel y to select channel y You can also use And Thru and Except to select multiple channels Press At z to set selected channels to level z Repeat steps 5 and 6 until all required levels are set Delete focus points in the spreadsheet
185. e is received at the Facepanel the event list pointer jumps to agree with the frame of the external clock and the current clock time is displayed in the TimeCd field of the screen External time is displayed in green Because the event list pointer jumps to match the incoming time code some events in your list may be skipped These events will play on the next loop To use external time code you will need to enable time code input in the Options Settings menu You can use the internal clock to backup the external clock If the external signal fails the internal clock will take over and continue to play back events The order in which you enable external and internal clocks is important and it will take at least five seconds for the two clocks to synchronize During that time events may be skipped They will be picked up on the next pass of the loop Use external time code input Step 1 Press Setup 2 Enter to view the Options Settings menu Step 2 Press 4 Enter to select Time Code Input Step 3 Press 1 to enable time code input e 0 to disable time code input Step 4 Press S8 Return to return to the Setup display Step 5 Press 7 Enter to view the Time Code Events display If external time code is running the time will be displayed in green in the TimeCd field If external time code is not yet available Waiting for Input will be displayed Step 6 Press S2 Enable Clock to enable the internal clock for back
186. e keypad interface of Emphasis Console Select Channels Dimmers and Fixtures Channels are the means by which Emphasis stores cue data Everything you want to store in a cue or submaster needs to be patched to a channel Channels may have accessories like color scrollers associated with them Moving lights use multiple channels to control all their parameters Emphasis uses fixture personalities to organize the channels required for an accessorized channel or a moving light When you want to use conventional fixtures with DMX controlled accessories and or moving lights in your show patch them using the personalities available in the libraries in Emphasis Visualization See the Emphasis Visualization User Manual for how to insert fixtures in data and CAD modes You can also access dimmers directly for troubleshooting purposes or to park them at a level see Park page 109 Selected channels are under your immediate control There are a number of ways to select channels and fixtures directly by number by selecting a group containing the desired channels see Groups page 108 and or by selecting a Concept see Concepts page 87 Dimmers must be selected using the Dim softkey Direct Selection The most direct way to select a channel or fixture is to simply type its number on the Facepanel s numeric keypad You can select single channels or multiple channels using the And key or ranges of channels using the Thru key and you
187. e more detailed information about submasters that contain effects subroutines or are set as Supermasters Edit submasters in Blind Step 1 Press Blind The Blind display defaults to cues Step 2 If required press Page x Enter to select the submaster page you want to view There are ten pages available Step 3 Press Sub y Enter to select submaster y You can also use the and keys to increment and decrement through the submasters on the current submaster page Step 4 Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels Dimmers and Fixtures page 86 Step 5 Set levels using the procedure described in Set Levels page 89 and Moving Light Control page 95 Not Recorded will blink in the lower left corner of the channel area Step 6 Press Record Sub y Enter where y is the target submaster number Note When you edit cues submasters groups or focus points in Stage Fader or Blind changes to channel levels or effects are not recorded until you press Record Enter Changes to overall cue or submaster timing do not require Record Enter Submaster List In the Submaster List display you can view and edit the submaster numbers and their attributes You can edit one or a number of submasters at a time using the arrow keys to navigate within the list You can only view and edit one page of submasters at a time To view and edit submasters on other pages press Page
188. e selected and their recorded levels can be recalled proportionally You can also use Group Sub with Only to selectively recall levels for selected channels or fixtures from recorded submasters Use a submaster as a group Step 1 Press Group Sub x where x is the submaster number you would like to use as a group This will select all the channels recorded in that submaster Step 2 Press At y where y is the proportional level or use the level wheel trackpad Use Full to recall the recorded levels in the submaster Use Group Sub with Only Step 1 Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels Dimmers and Fixtures page 86 Step 2 Press Only Group Sub x where x is the recorded submaster containing the levels you want to recall Step 3 Press Full to recall the levels as recorded in submaster x Use the level wheel trackpad or At to recall proportional levels Note Effect dynamic effect Subroutine and Supermaster submasters cannot be used as groups Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Time Functions Cues and submasters can fade levels in time In a cue you can establish upfade downfade wait and follow times Submasters can be assigned up dwell and down times Both cues and submasters can be modified by rate which applies a multiplier to the recorded fade times either speeding up or slowing down the playback Use the following guidelines when e
189. e time is 5 seconds 117 MBB Rules Any cue that fits all of the requirements below will execute an MBB delay and fade all moving non intensity channels of fixtures that fade their intensity up from zero in the next cue The next bright cue must have one or more non intensity pan tilt color etc fixture channels that move The next cue must have the fixtures associated intensity channel s on at a level above zero The current dark cue must have the fixtures associated intensity channel s off at zero The MBB flag for the next cue must be enabled This applies to subroutine steps as well as cues in the cue list Move Before Bright must be enabled in System Settings There shall be no MBB execution in any of the following situations The dark cue is run by pressing the Back button e Quickstep is enabled e The dark cue is executed because of a Jump to Cue step in a subroutine View MBB Status You can view the MBB status of channels and cues Channel information is displayed in the About Channel window Channel status may be noted as Wait Running Done or None Channels affected by MBB are displayed in blue on the Stage display Cue status is indicated in the A B and C D fader status displays and in the Subroutine window If MBB will run at the end of the running cue or subroutine step the window displays Wait If MBB is currently fading the display indicates
190. ects Printout available Spreadsheet editing Focus point list Specifications 287 Macro functions Macro List Up to 2 000 macros with 1 000 steps each Macros may activate any key except Enter Macro Live Learn mode Macro view and macro editing modes Macro wait times are programmable Caninclude in real time programs Caninclude in time code events Eight macros operated by remote switches Startup macro e Remote Trigger function through ETCNet2 Video Node Effects functions Effects may be recorded as cues or submasters e Upto 100 steps each Live effects recording Spreadsheet editing e 8 bit and 16 bit data types Variability of rate during playback Step times e In Dwell Out Step fade times e High Low Levels n Dwell Out Effect fade times Range editing of effect attributes and step values Profile functions e Profiles may be assigned to dimmers Ten preset profiles nine of which are editable Twenty three additional profiles that may be programmed Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Level X and Rate Y wheels Proportional intensity control of channels or groups Proportional rate control of cues and submasters 0 2000 percent Encoders Five encoder knobs e Six encoder pages e Reassignment individually or automatically with Autoload function Diskette Functions e S 5 inch high density diskette drive for software and configuration loading Options Alp
191. ed fixtures To quickly change the order of fixtures channels in the list press S7 Sort Devices 1 Enter to sort all fixtures then channels in ascending order S7 Sort Devices 2 Enter to sort all channels then fixtures in descending order S7 Sort Devices 3 Enter to sort all fixtures and channels in random order Repeat this step to rearrange the devices in another random order if desired Press S3 Template to view the available templates Use the or numeric keys to navigate the Dynamic Template List When the template you want to use is selected press Enter Alternatively you can use the mouse to click the template you want in the template list on the Emphasis Visualization console screens If you are creating the dynamic effect in Stage the fixtures in the Fixture List will begin to perform the movements as set by the template you ve selected For more information on templates see The Dynamic Template List page 65 Step 5 Step 6 Certain combinations of fixtures and dynamic effects may not create the shape indicated in the template name This can be due to the fixture type hanging location base point and other variables For example fixtures with moving heads at their 50 50 pan tilt position will not create circle or square effects that look like circles or squares they will move in figure 8 shapes Temp It 03 31 PM Temp late yno
192. ee o 25 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Americas m 3031 Pleasant View Road P O Box 620979 Middleton Wisconsin 53562 0979 USA m Tel 1 608 831 4116 m 800 688 4116 m Fax 1 608 836 1736 m 800 555 8912 Europe m Unit 5 Victoria Industrial Estate Victoria Road London W3 6UU UK m Tel 44 0 20 8896 1000 m Fax 44 0 20 8896 2000 Asia m Room 605 606 Tower Ill Enterprise Square 9 Sheung Yuet Road Kowloon Bay Kowloon Hong Kong m Tel 852 2799 1220 m Fax 852 2799 9325 Web www etcconnect com m Email US mail etcconnectcom m UK mail etceurope com m Asia mail etcasia com Service service etcconnect com m Toll free 800 775 4382 m Comments about this document techcomm etcconnect com 4200M1211 2 0 1 II Rev A I Released 11 2004 WW Copyright 2004 Electronic Theatre Controls Inc All Rights Reserved Product information and specifications subject to change
193. eed to precede with At or follow with Enter Use Rel to release selected captured and independent channels Selected channels may be edited in any display Channels may be captured in the Stage or Fader displays and cannot be controlled by cues or submasters Independent channels are unaffected by Grandmaster Flash Solo and Blackout controls Press Rel 1 3 times to release channels in the following order first selected channels then captured channels then independent channels Use the Focus Point key to set levels by reference Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Reference Fold outs Express Keypad Expression Insight Keypad H O QOS e E e aos Q Q 9 Q Q Q QO Q Stage Blind Fader m ck Patch Park Setup Expand Q O O O O O O O M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M Macro Enter O O O O O O O Q About Learn Help lt 4 Y gt S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 SI S8 O QO O O o Page Type Cue 1 8 9 Channel Dim O O O O O toad IU ony Sub 4 5 6 Thru At O O O O O Link Part Group 1 2 3 And Full SN 1 O O O O O
194. een CAD mode Wireframe Quad Flight case Shaded Data mode Spreadsheet H Select V Select Patch Errors Presentation mode Reports Plots Images Worksheet Link mode Message log Shaded and Isometric views available with Emphasis 3D only EN Specifications 273 Control Features Graphic selection of fixtures Mouse click Multiple selection Mouse click CTRL Left click dragged box Right click dragged box specify by type By layer By Concept Menu tools Intensity Full Out Specify Focus Iris Wide Tight Specify Colour Palette amp Library Console toolbars Screen mode selection record tools configurable buttons Virtual console Clickable menu items and softkeys Faders mirror levels from facepanel Blind editing with visualization for Cues Groups Submasters Focus Points Preview Mode visualize any cue and current cue 1 2 3 Storyboard visualize multiple cues and activate live from window Rendering Emphasis 3D only File image and bitmap output Variable resolution Full color mixing amber shift haze smoke Radiosity shadow ambient light CAD Features 274 Comprehensive libraries Fixtures over 1400 from 72 manufacturers Truss over 1400 items from 19 manufacturers Theatrical scenic elements including over 170 people Colour gel catalogs from 18 manufacturers Gobos catalogs from 22 manufacturers Accessories Len
195. effect will play back at random rates between the minimum and maximum you set Blind Editing 149 150 gt ue Type 7014 Step containing channels Attribute setting Random Rate settings Cue 701 44 05 AM Random rates 100 100 Time In Dwell Qut Lo Hi 0 2 1 0 5 1 O FL 1 O FL 1 D FL O FL Up Dwell Down Link Follow Rate Label 0 Hold 0 Cues left 9976 51 2 53 S4 S5 S6 S 58 Effect Cue or Step containing a Submaster Attributes focus point Create an effect Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Press Blind The Blind display defaults to cues Press lt Cue gt x to select cue x If you want to record an effect directly to a submaster press Sub x where x is the submaster you want to record Press Type 3 Enter to set the effect type The blind effect display will appear on the screen and the prompt area and keypad corner will request that you enter a step number Press lt S1 Step gt 1 Enter to create step 1 and move to the contents column You can also create a range of steps using the Thru key Select channels Select channels one at a time or with the Thru And and Except keys Select groups using the Group key You can also select channels recorded in cues and submasters using Group Cue and Group Sub When you use grouped channels in an effect step the channels and levels recorded in the group
196. els at levels based upon recorded groups focus points cues and submasters When you park based upon recorded levels you have the option of parking at the recorded levels or at a proportional level Park channels relative to recorded levels Step 1 In the Stage display press S7 More Softkeys S6 Park In the Park display you do not need to press a softkey before selecting channels Step 2 Press Group x where x is the group number Group can be replaced with Cue Sub or Focus Point as needed Step 3 Press Full to park at recorded levels or press At y where y is the proportional level For example channel 1 is recorded into group 1 at full 100 You park Group 1 At 5 0 Channel 1 will park at 50 110 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Park Fixtures If you need to park a moving light you can park whole fixtures one at a time or in ranges You can park them with direct levels or with reference to a focus point You can only park fixtures from the Stage display and when you park a fixture all associated channels are parked whether you select them to set levels or not Park fixtures Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Unpark Press Stage Select fixtures using the procedure described in Select Channels Dimmers and Fixtures page 86 Set levels for the fixture s as described in Moving Light Control page 95 Press S7 More Softkeys gt S6 Park Enter The selecte
197. em The wallpaper is set to None as a default Additional software applications games internet browsers word processors etc It is not advisable to load additional applications onto your Emphasis Server Conflicts may occur between applications that could severely impact your system s performance The Emphasis Server should not be connected to the Internet On a 3D Server with dual monitors you may experience problems with shaded views especially on the second monitor If your shaded views appear to refresh incorrectly especially after shaded view windows have been overlapped you may want to change the OpenGL options to Safe Rendering Donotenable hyperthreading on GX270 or GX280 servers Hyperthreading causes the server to operate a single processor as if it were a dual processor system This has been known to cause Emphasis to crash To change the OpenGL settings Step 1 In the Emphasis Visualization Options menu click Application Options Step 2 Click the OpenGL tab Step 3 Click the button for the following settings Fast Rendering This is the ideal setting Fast Rendering for Primary Display Only Default This sets the primary monitor to Fast Rendering and the second monitor to Safe Rendering and will solve the incorrect refresh problem on the second monitor Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Safe Rendering This sets both monitors to Safe Rendering If you have problems using your Empha
198. emphasis Lighting Control System Console User Manual v2 0 1 Copyright Electronic Theatre Controls Inc All Rights reserved Product information and specifications subject to change Part Number 4200M1211 2 0 1 Rev A Released November 2004 ETC Emphasis Expression Insight Imagine Focus Express Unison Obsession Il ETCNet2 EDMX Sensor and WYSILink are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Electronic Theatre Controls Inc in the United States and other countries The name WYSIWYG is a trademark of CAST Lighting Limited Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Dell is a registered trademark of Dell Computer Corporation Autodesk and AutoCAD Pare registered trademarks of Autodesk Inc in the United States and other countries Table of Contents Introduction 00000 eee 1 Using this Manual 0c eee eee 2 Help from ETC Technical Services 3 Americas eee BAGA RR xor x eee ee 3 Europe 2 2 c 4mm eran 3 AA seek SEI RS ases RE 3 Chapter 1 System Overview 5 Emphasis Options lees 6 Server Types 00 0 c eee eee 6 Channel Counts 0c eee ee eee ee 6 Facepanels 122 sae sue eux pue he Pe aan 6 System Components cece eee eee eee 7 Emphasis Server 000 cece e eee eee 7 Emphasis Facepanel
199. en on screen only Levels on stage are unaffected Blind editing is useful when making changes during rehearsals or when you need to see data across many cues This chapter contains the following sections HEU oco Em 132 Eoo DC 136 e Subroutines 060 eee 143 NGOS Mem 149 e SUDINABSIOFS ND cee abre 154 e SANOUDE orau kod dee kae du a ROS oh HO dice a ee 159 FOCUS POIBIS oes e a Ru eds wees 163 Blind Editing 131 Displays There are more displays available when working blind You can use the Blind display which looks just like the Stage display or you can use the list and spreadsheet displays to view and edit data for multiple cues submasters groups or focus points on one screen Blind The Blind display is accessible from the Facepanel by pressing Blind All list and spreadsheet displays are accessible from the Blind display The Blind display allows you to view previously recorded cues submasters groups and focus points You can also create these in the blind display Channel levels are displayed in the same configuration as in the Stage display and you can only view one cue submaster group or focus point at a time When viewing cues color coding of levels indicates level relationships between the current cue and the previous cue in the list see Colors in Displays page 28 11 03 RM 04 05 006 07 08 09 10 011 12 13 14 9 410 444 12 E 5 6 8 19 20 1212 Cue Type Up Down Wait Link Follow
200. er Default Level The Level key can be assigned any level between zero and full 10096 The default setting is full Use this menu item to change it to whatever level you would like See Set Levels page 89 for more information Change the default level Step 1 On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis Visualization press Setup 1 Enter to display the Systems Settings menu Step 2 Press 4 Enter to choose Default Level Step 3 Using the numeric keypad on the Facepanel or the virtual facepanel type in the desired level This entry self terminates at a two digit entry you don t have to press Enter so use the Full key to enter 100 Default Fader Clear Time The A B and C D fader pairs have a Clear key To remove a cue from the stage output clear the fader pair containing that cue Channels in that cue will be released to the next highest control input fader pair or submaster or will fade out completely See Fader Controls page 170 for more information The default fader clear time is zero seconds causing cleared channels to drop to zero immediately If you would prefer that clearing a fader takes a longer time to achieve a blackout change the default fader clear time The fader clear time can be set to anything from zero to 99 59 minutes following the guidelines in Default Fade Time page 52 Change the default fader clear time Step 1 On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the vir
201. er 0 7F OW panga aos Note off velocity 0 7F Note on message format lt 9n gt lt kk gt lt vv gt S oe a ene ate Note on status AM vetiades de wares MIDI channel number 0 F O Key number 0 7F e Wisin ads Note on velocity 0 7F 00 Note off Control change message format lt Bn gt lt kk gt lt vv gt s Bibles Control change status o d Gaudi wie aes MIDI channel number 0 F MEM CEPIT Control number 70 92 eo Wiig ee ead eed ate Control value 0 7F EN Control Interfaces 211 212 Program change message format lt Cn gt lt kk gt Program patch change status MIDI channel number 0 F Program number 0 7F Pitch bend message format lt En gt lt ll gt lt mm gt Pitch bend status MIDI channel number 0 F Least significant 7 bits of pitch bend value 0 7F Most significant 7 bits of pitch bend value 0 7F MIDI Message definitions Submaster bump switch execution Express and Expression Submasters 1 12 Submasters 13 24 C5 B5 60 71 C6 B6 72 83 Submaster bump switch execution Insight Submasters 1 36 Submasters 37 72 C 0 C3 1 36 C 3 C9 37 72 Submasters 73 108 C 6 C9 73 108 Note C5 MIDI note 60 or middle C Cue execution in AB fader pair Next cue Cues 1 127 Cues 128 255 Cues 256 383 Cues 384 511 Cues 512 639 Cues 640 767 Cues 768 895 Cues 896 999 Program change 0 Prog
202. er fader pair when played back Block A block cue forces all LTP channels to fade to completion in background cue timing and then runs in a physical fader like any other cue Use block cues to end effects running in the background without having to use the S3 Background Overrides command Effect Instead of simply fading from one stage look to another an effect cue runs a dynamic series of steps at a given rate Each step contains channels or groups at levels An example of a simple effect is a chase where lights turn on and off in sequence Complex effects can be made as well to emulate lightning or fire or reflections off water for example Effects can also be used with moving lights See Stage Effects page 117 for information on creating effect cues Dynamic E ffect See Create a simple dynamic effect page 100 Subroutine Subroutine cues are like effects but instead of using channels and groups as the base element subroutines use cues In a sense a subroutine is a cue list of its own that can run as an automated loop or can wait for a manual go for each step Subroutines are very useful for creating complex moving light effects Subroutine cues are slightly different than Subroutines on Submasters described in Subroutines on Submasters Subs on Subs page 179 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Record Cues Emphasis provides two basic recording functions Record and Track The Record function saves all ch
203. es seconds frames You do not have to enter leading zeros For example to enter a time of 00 03 45 00 press 3 4 5 0 0 The keypad corner displays your entry as you type Make sure the correct time is displayed in the keypad corner before pressing Enter Step 4 Enter the time for the last event time in hours minutes seconds frames and press Enter Note The minimum loop time is 5 seconds If you enter a loop time less that five seconds Emphasis will automatically change the last event time to accommodate a five second loop Run a Time Code Program You can run the time code program using internal time code external time code or in manual mode When you are running with external time code the internal clock acts as a backup to continue the program if the external clock fails If you are using time code to play back events you may want to switch the Cue List in Stage and Fader to the Time Code List Time Code List display Display the time code list instead of the cue list Step 1 Press Setup 2 Enter to view the Options Settings menu Step 2 Press 6 Enter to Display Cue Time Code List Step 3 Press 1 to choose the Time Code List 0 to choose the Cue List EN Control Interfaces 223 224 Using the Internal Time Clock You can start the internal clock at any time This is useful for viewing only a portion of your program without having to wait for all of the prior events to play back Yo
204. esired for labeling items on the console such as cues groups and submasters The second keyboard is not required but may be added for convenience Connect your monitors There will be at least one monitor on the Server and one on the Facepanel e Servers configured for 2D operation will only support one monitor e Servers configured for 3D operation are supplied with a dual video card Monitors are connected to this card using a Y cable provided with your Server Expression and Insight consoles support two monitors Express consoles support one monitor only Connect power cables to Server Facepanel and hubs or switches A A CAUTION When you plug in the server it may boot it may not wait for you to press the power button If the keyboard and or mouse are not plugged in when you power up they will not be recognized by the Server You will have to force the Server to power down plug them in and restart Connecting a Printer Connecting a printer to your Emphasis Server follows the same setup rules as any Windows computer If your printer requires a software installation you will need to logon as the System Manager If you have problems connecting a printer to your Emphasis Control System please contact ETC Technical Services see Help from ETC Technical Services page 3 Install a printer from the System Manager login Step 1 Login as the System Manager see Login as a Different User page 17 Step 2 R
205. et is not determined you can create a focus point for each of your focus positions When you write your cues with reference to these focus points and the furniture placement gets changed you can simply refocus your lights and update the focus points with new pan and tilt values and all your cues will play back using that new focus information You can record and edit focus points in Stage or in Blind In Blind you have access to the additional Focus Point List and Focus Point Spreadsheet displays Focus points can store data for any channel in your show not just fixtures or pan and tilt data Chan 03 09 AM 001 02 03 04 OS 09 10 011 12 13 14 15 015 FL 1 44 89 6 5 40 041 42 43 44 45 046 9 35 j FL 4 60 061 62 64 65 066 67 68 69 70 85 7 FL 43 09 40 111 12 FL Focus 51 s2 s3 S4 S5 S6 S ES Bist ES d NEEDS NEN Ee Edit focus points in Blind Step 1 Press Blind The Blind display defaults to cues Step 2 Press Focus Point y Enter to select focus point y You can also use the and keys to increment and decrement through the recorded focus points Step 3 Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels Dimmers and Fixtures page 86 Step 4 Set levels using the procedure described in Set Levels page 89 and Moving Light Control page 95 Not Recorded will blink in the lower left corner of the channel area Step 5 Press Record Focus Points y Enter where
206. ete kanaan RA RANA Red RR ER RAT ee 131 Label ec e ee Rede Pate Ee 132 Blind Editing 133 DisplayS see Re Re err x va 134 Blind CA 134 List Displays 0 0 e eee eee 135 Spreadsheets cee eee eee ee 136 Tracksheet 0000 e eee eee 137 QUES i ieee NG A eee I CUR end E ae 138 GUS LISE ut iac HY Raa eae Dn da a Re 139 Spreadsheet 000 cece eee eee 141 Tracksheet 00 cee eee eee eee 144 Subroutines eee 145 Subroutines in Cues llli 145 Subroutines on Submasters Subs on Subs 148 Elects annua a Ret dE RE 151 Blind Effects a c eR wee a 151 Submasters 0 0 elles 156 Submaster List 0 0 0 c cee ee iias 156 Submaster Spreadsheet 158 Supermasters 0c cece eee eee 160 GIOUDS ise a pho Ree ele UR iR eet ae 161 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 Group List cues sd Hades deka 162 Group Spreadsheet 0a 163 FOCUS ROMS eA DIE ESI 165 Focus Point EISE erences ated dated wa ma yet aes 166 Focus Point Spreadsheet 167 PIAVOACK cass ice AA Ue doe 171 A B and C D Fader Pairs 00000 cea 172 Fader Controls serae rei td Mae aimed nd 172 Playback Cue List 0 eee eee 174 Fader Status display aa 175 Cue Playback 020 cee eee 176 ee AA 179 Multi part Cues 0 0 00 cece eee 179 Effect CUCS kagat a a an
207. exichannel option Step 3 Press 1 Enter to enable Flexichannel or press 0 Enter to disable Flexichannel Step 4 Press Stage to return to the Stage display Working with Flexichannel active will change how you select channels For information on channel selection please see Channel selection in Flexichannel page 88 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Updating the Flexichannel Displays If the channel usage changes such as when you shutdown and restart Emphasis you load a new show or channels that once fulfilled the guidelines above no longer do you will need to update Flexichannel Press Setup 1 S1 Purge Flexi to update Flexichannel Spreadsheet Spreadsheets are available through softkeys in the Blind display You can use spreadsheets to view and edit channel data across a number of cues groups submasters and focus points adsheet Chan PM annels 5 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 FL FL FL FL Eig eyab ab ghia ab ak hab dab yE tabla bil 51 s2 s3 S4 S5 S6 S 8 Tracksheet The Tracksheet displays all the cue information for a single channel You can see each recorded level for a single channel across the entire cue list viewing how many cues the channel is recorded into where the channel moves up or down as well as where the channel tracks through consecutive cues at the same level You can also make edits to a cue or a range of cues for that channel Channel 4 n 4
208. ey 4 to advance to the next event number If no event exists below this one a new event will be created Repeat steps 4 through 12 to create more events Note You can also use the right and left arrow gt and keys to move from column to column and the down and up arrow and 4 keys to select other events to edit Create a time code program using Learn Mode Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Press Setup 7 Enter to view the Time Code Events display The display defaults to event 1 Press S6 Learn Mode to enable Learn Mode TimeCd Learn flashes in red in the upper left corner of the screen If you are using the internal clock press S2 Clock Enable to start the clock running Press Stage to return to the stage display If you are using external time code start the clock running Make sure you have enabled Time Code Input in the Options Settings menu see Time Code Program page 219 Play back the cues submaster bump buttons and macros you need to record as events as you want them to be played back by the time code program Press Record to record an empty event When you are done press Press Setup 7 Enter to view the Time Code Events display The display should contain events for each cue submaster bump and macro you played back Press S6 Learn Mode to disable Learn Mode Use the direct entry method to edit your recorded e
209. eys to navigate within the list 02 43 Phi CuerType Up Down Wait Link Follow Rate 94 D 0 2 2000 95 gt F F F F F F i is is iS iS g F g F g F g F g F 9 Fi g Fi 9 Fi B Fi g Fi g Fi 2000 Big La pm ES Previous Ka a Deere pe pe age ue Edit cue attributes within the cue list display Step 1 Press Blind The Blind display defaults to cues Step 2 Press S2 Cue List to display the cue list Step 3 Press x Enter to select cue x You can also use And Thru and Except to select multiple cues You may also use the up and down arrow and f keys to scroll through the cue list Step 4 If necessary press Part y to select part y of cue x Only timing functions can be edited for cue parts To add a link follow time and or rate to a part cue select the whole cue number Step 5 Press Type to change the cue type for the selected cue s See Cue Types page 112 Blind Editing 137 138 Time to change the upfade time for the selected cue s See Time Functions page 125 Time Time to change the downfade time for the selected cue s Wait to change the upfade wait time for the selected cue s See Wait page 125 Wait Wait to change the downfade wait time for the selected cue s Link to link the selected cue s to another cue macro or submaster See Link Functions page 113 Follow to change the follow time for the selected
210. fferent cue number or to a submaster Sneak With the sneak function you can manually set direct levels over time When you use the At Full Level and Release keys the new level takes affect immediately When you use the level wheel or trackpad you may not fade to the new level evenly If you need to change channel levels and you want the change to be smooth or go unnoticed like in a performance situation you can use the sneak function to have channels assume new levels or restore to recorded levels over a given period of time You can use the default sneak time set in Default Sneak Time page 53 or you can set the sneak time yourself Note You cannot sneak to a focus point only to direct levels Set channel level using S6 Sneak Step 1 Press lt Stage gt The sneak softkey is only available in the Stage display Step 2 Press S6 Sneak This activates the sneak mode Step 3 Select the channels you want to sneak using the procedure described in Select Channels Dimmers and Fixtures page 86 You do not need to press Channel Step 4 Choose one of the following options Press Enter to sneak the channels out or to recorded levels in the default Sneak time Press Time y Enter to sneak the channels out or to recorded levels in the time y Press At x Enter to sneak to level x in the default Sneak time Press At x Time y Enter to sneak to level x in the time y
211. fined s AP Address aaa paa BENG et Loewe wa Nalang 10 101 45 101 e Gateway Address 0 10 101 45 101 e Subnet Mask 00 eee eee eee 255 255 0 0 Display Processor LiSt o oo oo Enabled Label c eaae rece d Ge Wee Defaults to console type e Use Configured IP Parameters Disabled DMX DMX Output Port Timing Max DMX Output Port 1 Start Channel 1 DMX Output Port 1 Channel Count 512 DMX Output Port 2 Start Channel 513 DMX Output Port 2 Channel Count 512 DMX Output Port 3 Start Channel 1025 DMX Output Port 3 Channel Count 512 DMX Output Port 4 Start Channel 1537 DMX Output Port 4 Channel Count 512 DMX Input Port Start Channel Start Number 10001 e DMX Input Port Channel Count 512 DMX Input Port Disabled DMX Input Port Priority 00 2 MIDI e MIDI Input Port EMIDI ID 1 MIDI Output Port EMIDIID 2 A CAUTION nEmphasis Control Systems with multiple Facepanels the MIDI Input Port EMIDI ID cannot be the same on all Facepanels It is illegal to have multiple MIDI sources at the same ID in a single system Set the unused Input port s to another value to avoid this conflict 238 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual SMPTE SMPTE Input Port ESMPTEID
212. for additional playback faders using the Subroutines on Submasters feature C Submasters IBBOBHBHBBBEBE OJOIDIDIODIDIOIOIOIDIO Q C O O O CO IO O O e O O ONO ONO D a a D gt eo U o OJOO SINWBHUAN AD CnuNwaUuavawa 10000000606 DISQ O O CO C C 2 2 O OOOO OJ OJO OJOJOJOIO KOLIO OJOJOO JO OJOJOIOJO O OJOJOJOJO OJOJOJOL AB and CD Fader Pairs Use the fader pairs Cluster B In general the keys in this Numeric Keypad The numeric Cluster C Use these keys when Touchpad Acts as a level controller for to crossfade from one recorded cue to another cluster pinpoint the elements that make keypad is for numerical entry This editing channel levels and lists selected channels parameters Also acts The faders can be used to take manual control up the structure of your show such as grouping also
213. from column to column and the down and up arrow and keys to select other programs to edit Note Itis possible to see a Real Time Program run while you are editing it Edits are held in a buffer until you exit the display or sort the programs at which time your changes take effect If you do not want Real Time Programs to run while you are making changes disable the Real Time Programs in the Options Settings menu see Enable Real Time Programs page 197 Delete a Real Time Program Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 EN Real Time Programs Press Setup 8 Enter to view the Real Time Programs display Press S7 More Softkeys gt S6 Delete Program Press x Enter to select program number x Use And and Thru to select multiple programs Press Enter again to confirm that you want to delete the selected program s 195 Insert Real Time Programs Step 1 Press Setup 8 Enter to view the Real Time Programs display Step 2 Press lt S7 More Softkeys gt S1 Insert Program Step 3 Press x Enter to select the program number x you want to insert Step 4 Press y Enter where y is the number of programs you want to insert Program x will be inserted along with any other programs as determined by y at the appropriate point in the list All following programs are moved down in the list and are renumbered Move Real Time Programs Step 1 Press Setup 8 Ente
214. g ajey leqe1 smeis dung 1817 qnsg unay qns alajaq oDeg 1xoN eBeg snolnald 91ey snes dung Jejseuiqng ansg skayyos alon age oDeg 1xoN eBeg snol naig OJOS leqe1 snis dung uM l shayyos mal ele ojos snieis dung z ansg E asri XWa3emdeo oo aioy MS 99180 erey Auo pane anehna ere qnsg Jojseuiqns XINQ3 sanag Sii n qns aja ag abe 1xoN obeg snol naig ee a ng isi qns pajas PR MOS ION 109ys peelds qns 151 qns os zs ss ss vs es cs is tea panunu0 sAexyos Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual 42 abe s unay XINQ3 ande uo S 0943 omeuig SOS pA ojweuAg MOJJOJ uMoq df 19pey S 9MHOS 9J0 N y 19pey deis S 9MYOS 9J0 N med ered Jqng O 05 Ske Had sen ll swa S 9MHOS 9J0 N bed 1xoN e8eg snoinald jeeus ang ans peo dajsyoino 9 qeU3 19pey s yYYOS SON ejeieg e 10pe S SMYOS ON 9 9 3G z 19pey skayyos aso PEI PASS Mo O4 Aug 984 1X9N z 19pey SKIYYOS 9J0 N Tepesidesies S S9MHOS 9J0 N esog S S9MHOS 9J0 N Sisson za y XINGQ3 ende deis uesu one7 ad L ojos deis ojos eunnouqng 01 05 SAPHIBAO pulbxoeg S9piJaAO pusbyoeg eno Joajes dajsyoina o qeu3 eunnouqng mnoapey aunnolqns moapey MO O4 umoq dn sog S 9MHOS 9J0 N deis eiejeq esog skoyyos soy MI NABA deis uesu one7 ad L abe 1xoN abe dy SNOIAdd y XAA anideo any palag 1817 peeJds an7
215. g the number of dimmers will not automatically restore dimmers lost in the patch It is recommended that changes to the number of dimmers be made before you patch in order to avoid inadvertently unpatching dimmers Change the number of dimmers Step 1 On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis Visualization press Setup 1 Enter to display the Systems Settings menu Step 2 Press 1 Enter to choose Number of Dimmers Step 3 Using the numeric keypad on the Facepanel or the virtual facepanel type in the desired number of dimmers and press Enter Number of Channels The Number of Channels setting adjusts the number of control channels you have available You may find that you do not need the maximum number of channels in your system for a particular show By setting the number of channels to a reduced number you reduce the number of pages of channels you might have to page through in channel and patch displays If you do choose to reduce the number of channels in your system keep in mind that moving light fixtures and other DMX controlled devices often require more than one control channel to operate Make sure that you include enough channels to control these devices Change the number of channels Step 1 On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis Visualization press Setup 1 Enter to display the Systems Settings menu Step 2 Press 2 Enter to choose Number
216. gs level MBB will only occur if the option has been enabled in the Systems Settings menu You can edit MBB for a cue in the Stage Blind Fader displays and in the Blind Cue List Which softkey MBB appears on depends upon which display you are using Generally S1 MBB appears in Stage and Fader displays and S8 MBB appears in Blind displays Disable Enable MBB for a specific cue Step 1 Enter the display you want to use to edit the cue Step 2 Press Cue x lt S7 More Softkeys gt S1 MBB or S8 MBB 1 Enter to enable MBB 0 Enter to disable MBB EN Live Editing 119 120 Disable Enable MBB for a subroutine step Step 1 View the subroutine cue in the Blind display Step 2 Press S1 Step x S7 More Softkeys gt S1 MBB Step 3 Press 0 Enter to set dynamic MBB which uses the MBB state recorded in the source cue for the step 1 Enter to enable MBB regardless of the recorded MBB state in the source cue 2 Enter to disable MBB regardless of the recorded MBB state in the source cue Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Submasters Submasters are available on every Emphasis Facepanel A submaster is a fader that contains channel levels an effect or a subroutine Submasters can also be turned into Supermasters A Supermaster acts as a master fader for a number of assigned submasters Submasters can contain timing but they cannot be played back in the A B or C D fader
217. h steps until it encounters a loop to step style step You can set which step to loop back to and how many times to run the loop The subroutine runs through steps until it encounters a bounce style step The subroutine will then run backwards through the steps until it reaches the first step and then starts again The subroutine will bounce for the number of times you set in the bounce step one bounce equals one pass backward and one pass forward The subroutine fade style allows you to place a fadeout time on the whole subroutine This is not an executable step rather a time instruction that is used when S1 Fadeout Subr command is executed in the Stage display If no subroutine fade time is included in a subroutine the S1 Fadeout Subr command will use the default fader clear time set in the System Settings display The subroutine runs through steps until it encounters a hold for go style step It then pauses until you press the submaster bump button Filter steps are usually placed in the first step of the subroutine A filter determines which channels will respond to subroutine commands A filter of group O includes all patched channels Any other group can be used to limit playback to the channels recorded in the group Only one group may be entered in this step The subroutine runs through steps until it encounters a jump to step style step You can set which step to jump to A macro step executes a macro from within
218. hannels in that group Except Sub y where y is the submaster number to exclude channels in that submaster Except Cue y where y is the cue number to exclude channels in that cue Step 5 Press Enter The S3 Solo command can be used in a similar way as Except to limit channels that are recorded into a cue submaster group or focus point When you use Except you need to know and select all the channels you want to exclude from a record command With S3 Solo you can select the channels you want to record and exclude all unselected channels When used in this way S3 Solo does not force any channel levels to zero so your Stage output is not affected Note S3 Solo causes only SELECTED channels not captured channels to be recorded Make sure that all the channels you want to include are selected not just captured Record using S3 Solo Step 1 Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels Dimmers and Fixtures page 86 Step 2 Set levels if required using the procedure described in Set Levels page 89 and Moving Light Control page 95 Step 3 Press Record Cue x where x is the target cue number You can replace Cue with Sub Group or Focus Point Step 4 Press S7 More Softkeys gt S3 Solo Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Update Update is a record function that allows you to add or modify channel levels for a cue
219. hanumeric keyboard Remote Focus Unit Wireless Remote Focus Unit Lighting Playback Controller SMPTE external control Remote Macro controls e Serial mouse Size and weight 44x 16 5 x 6 5 inches 1120 x 420 x 170mm e 42 2 pounds 19 2kgs E Specifications 289 This page intentionally blank 290 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Appendix E F oldout Diagrams This appendix contains the following sections E Foldout Diagrams Emphasis Control System Riser Diagrams 293 Emphasis Facepanel Rear Panel Connections 294 Insight Facepanel Overview 295 Expression Facepanel Overview 296 Express 125 250 ECS Facepanel Overview 297 Express 24 48 Facepanel Overview 298 Express 48 96 amp 72 144 Facepanel Overview 299 Emphasis LPC Facepanel Overview 300 Command Keypad Overview 301 Express Facepanel Two Scene Operation 302 291 This page intentionally blank 292 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Emphasis Control System Riser Diagrams A Simple Emphasis Control System Emphasis Control System with ETCNet2 Nodes ETCNet2 47 i apa Empa E Hub Switch Facepanel Facepanel CRT 1 CRT 2 pem ETCNet2 jt o ETCNet2 z Video Node Emphasis Server Unit
220. he cue list will play back in that fader pair The next cue may be the next higher cue number or it may be determined by a Link command in the current cue Regardless of which fader pair you chose to run a cue in a Go press on either fader pair will play back the next cue Note Ifyou alternate between A B Go and C D Go you will see the output of both fader pairs two cues on stage at the same time In general if you want to crossfade from one cue in the cue list use only one Go key for playback Hold The Hold key is found to the right of the Go key When pressed the Hold key pauses the current fade and holds it at that level To resume the fade press Go on the same fader pair If the Hold key is pressed twice the current fade is cancelled at it s stopping point A Go press after this cancellation causes the initial cue to be skipped and the next cue to play back Back The Back key is found above or to the side of the fader pair The Back key causes the playback to move backwards through the cue list When you move backwards through the cue list cue link commands are ignored Rate The S5 Rate key is found above or to the side of the fader pair When the S5 Rate key is pressed the fade rate of the currently fading cue can be altered using the rate wheel or the trackpad Once the current cue completes its fade the rate control is released from the fader 170 Emphasis Console
221. he memory usage and speed of your system Change the number of effect step channels Step 1 On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis Visualization press Setup 1 Enter to display the Systems Settings menu Step 2 Press 7 Enter to choose Number of Effect Step Channels Step 3 Using the numeric keypad on the Facepanel or the virtual facepanel type in the desired maximum number of effect step channels and press Enter Blackout Key You can disable the facepanel s Blackout key This prevents accidental blackouts of the entire system s output Disable or enable the Blackout key Step 1 On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis Visualization press Setup 1 Enter to display the Systems Settings menu Step 2 Press 8 Enter to choose Blackout Key Step 3 Press 0 Enter to disable the Blackout key or 1 Enter to enable the Blackout Key Flexichannel The Flexichannel display mode is described in Flexichannel page 32 Use this setting to enable and disable Flexichannel mode Disable or enable Flexichannel Step 1 On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis Visualization press Setup 1 Enter to display the Systems Settings menu Step 2 Press 9 Enter to choose Flexichannel Step 3 Press 0 Enter to disable Flexichannel or 1 Enter to enable Flexichannel System Settings 53 Master Type The Grandmas
222. his type of channel check is typically used for channels patched to dimmers not for moving lights You can create a macro to automate this process See Sample Macros page 189 Channel check using the S8 Flash softkey Step 1 Press Channels x where x is the first channel you want to check Step 2 Press S7 More Softkeys gt and press and hold S8 Flash The channel will jump to full output Step 3 While pressing S8 Flash press to move to the next channel or to move to the previous channel As you press or each channel will temporarily jump to full output Step 4 Release S8 Flash to return the last channel to its stage level Note ndependent channels will not respond to this kind of channel check EN Live Editing 93 94 Solo The solo function can be used to suppress the levels of unselected channels This is helpful if you want to temporarily change the stage look to just a few channels or record a cue group or submaster containing only a few of the channels in the current stage look Set levels using S3 Solo Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels Dimmers and Fixtures page 86 Set levels using the procedure described in Set Levels page 89 Press S7 More Softkeys5 S3 Solo In Stage and Fader all unselected dependent channels will be temporarily set to zero level In Blind all unselected chan
223. hlighted press Enter Step 5 Using the facepanel numeric keypad enter the ID number This may be any value between 0 255 0 will disable SMPTE Input The default value is 1 Step 6 Press Enter Note Ifyou make an error while changing any of these settings and you want to return to the previously stored values do not press S8 Simply turn the facepanel power off and on again The previous settings will be restored Step 7 Press S8 to save your settings and exit the SMPTE configuration screen Step 8 Press S8 to save your settings and exit the main configuration screen To set the ESMPTE ID value in Emphasis Visualization Step 1 In the Emphasis mode Setup menu click IO xl EDMX Priority ESMPTE Receive hnc EMIDI Receive hnc EMIDI Transmit FRI Remote Trigger ID 1 Cancel Step2 In the ESMPTE Receive field enter the new value This may be any value between 0 255 0 will disable ESMPTE Receive The default value is 1 Step 3 Click OK 218 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Time Code Program You can create and run shows that respond to programming based on a standardized time code protocol Emphasis responds to both the Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers SMPTE time code Expression Insight only and to the Musical Instrument Digital Interface MIDI time code Emphasis also generates an internal time code in both MIDI and SMPTE protocols This internal cloc
224. ight click on Start menu on task bar and click Explore Alternatively you can press E to launch Windows Explorer at any time Step 3 Click to expand My Computer in the file tree Step 4 Click Control Panel Step 5 Double click Printers and Faxes Step 6 Double click Add Printers Step 7 Uncheck Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer If this is left checked you will be asked for a password that you do not have Step 8 Continue through the wizard to setup your printer CAUTION Modification to hardware or software components or settings may affect the stability of the Emphasis Control System Consult ETC Technical Services before making any changes Non authorized changes resulting in instability may require reloading the operating system which will restore defaults remove any changes and may result in a loss of existing show files Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Software Installation Your Emphasis Server will arrive with all software fully installed If you have purchased a complete Emphasis Control System including an Emphasis Server and a Facepanel the Facepanel Software should also be loaded and ready to use If you have purchased Emphasis as an upgrade to an existing Express or Expression style console you will need to upgrade the software in your console Installing Facepanel Software If you have purchased Emphasis as an upgrade to an existing console or if you install a new versio
225. iles stored on the Emphasis Server It is highly recommended to backup all show files before loading new software To backup existing show files see the Emphasis Visualization User Manual To install new software Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Power up the Emphasis Server When the Dell screen appears press F12 Insert Emphasis Software CD 1 into the CD drive on the Emphasis Server Press the number corresponding to Boot from IDE CD ROM and press ENTER A warning screen appears allowing you to choose to continue or abort If you want to continue with the installation process press any key e f you want to abort the installation process Press CTRL C When prompted to Terminate batch job Y N press Y The DOS prompt will appear You may restart the Emphasis Server press CTRL ALT DELETE at this point for normal operation The installation type screen appears Choose the type of installation you want to perform Install Emphasis Program files only press E This option restores the disk image of the C drive only show files are retained Install full disk image press A This option restores the disk image of the C and D drives show files are deleted AN CAUTION Installing a full disk image for the C and D drives will delete show files stored on the Emphasis Server Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 After you press E or A the disk image begins to
226. in Emphasis Visualization press Setup 3 Enter to access the Clock Functions menu Step 2 Press 1 Enter to choose Latitude Step 3 Using the numeric keypad on the Facepanel or the virtual facepanel type in the desired degrees of latitude press 4 for North or for South and press Enter Step4 Type in the desired minutes of latitude and press Enter Set longitude Step 1 On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis Visualization press Setup 3 Enter to access the Clock Functions menu Step 2 Press 2 Enter to choose Longitude Step 3 Using the numeric keypad on the Facepanel or the virtual facepanel type in the desired degrees of longitude press for West or for East and press Enter Step4 Type in the desired minutes of longitude and press Enter Set time zone Step 1 On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis Visualization press Setup 3 Enter to access the Clock Functions menu Step 2 Press 3 Enter to choose Time Zone Step 3 Using the numeric keypad on the Facepanel or the virtual facepanel type in the desired offset from Greenwich Mean Time GMT press for West or for East and press Enter Set 12 24 hour clock Step 1 On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis Visualization press Setup 3 Enter to access the Clock Functions menu Step 2 Press 4 Enter to choose
227. input DMX output 3 0 DMX512 L Co lt E ETCNet ThinNet m TE al not supported 0 68 63 63 amp ETCNet 2 twisted pair 0 DIP switches O AC fuse T6 3A Remote AC input macros 3 macros 4 RFU fuse T 2 5A Reference Fold outs Remote macros 2 Remote macros 1 Wireless remote Wireless bus Earth Ground point 300 Command Keypad Overview 1 DISPLAY KEYS The Stage display is where most editing of channel levels happens In Stage any changes you make are live and will take immediate effect The Blind display is used when you want to edit channel levels or cues but don t need or want a live result The Fader display is a live display that shows the contribution of the fader pairs or submasters to the stage look You can also use it to display channel activity in the background cues running but not on the AB or CD faders You can edit and record channel levels in the Fader display The Tracksheet display is a blind display that shows the recorded cue levels for a selected channel You can edit that channel s level in a cue or across a group of cues in the Tracksheet display The Patch is used to assign dimmers to channels and to modify dimmer attributes The Park display shows you which dimmers or channels are Parked and at what levels Parked dimmers or channels are unaffected by playback faders or the Grandmaster and parked levels are not
228. ion information and Using Remote Macros page 257 for information on wiring Note You cannot store MIDI commands within macros Learn Macro One of the easiest ways to enter commands into a macro is to simply learn the series as you perform the action s This way you can see what will happen when you play back the macro You can view and edit the macro once it is recorded using the View Macro and Edit Macro displays You can learn macros in any display but the macro displays AN CAUTION Do not perform actions within Emphasis Visualization while learning macros Unexpected behavior may occur Learn a macro Step 1 In any display but the macro displays press Learn x Enter to learn the commands for macro x The Enter Macro key s LED will blink to indicate that the facepanel is in learn mode Step 2 Perform the commands you want to record into the macro Step 3 When complete press Enter Macro to record your commands Display Macros You can access the macro editing tools through the Setup Menu Recorded macros and their labels are displayed in the Macro List Use the Macro List to select the macro you want to view or edit Display the Macro List Step 1 Press Setup to access the Setup menu Step 2 Press 6 Enter to display the Macro List 182 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual E L Macro 10 10 55 RM Label Repatch 1 10 Channel Check c 51 52 53 S4 S5 Sb i 33 EE vU mocro Pose
229. ions page 294 You may toggle these switches up or down without opening the facepanel AN CAUTION The DIP switch settings are vital for the operation of your Expression style facepanel in an Emphasis Control System S4 LEDs mee oooooooo Tracking Mode ThinNet Twisted Pair Twisted Pair Polarity i Network amp Switch Up Off Switch Down On Main Processor Correct External Switch Settings Internal Switch Locations No keyswitch for power Power Keyswitch Facepanels Internal DIP Switches Earlier Expression 2x Concept 2x and Insight 2x facepanels those with a key type power switch have DIP switches located on the main processor board To access to these internal DIP switches you will need to open the facepanel see Open the Facepanel page 245 For operation in an Emphasis Control System set the DIP switches as noted below Switches S1 and 2 Since your Emphasis Server and Facepanel must connect through an Ethernet hub or switch you must use the RJ45 Twisted Pair connector on the Facepanel To activate this connector set all the S1 switches to ON or CLOSED and all the S2 switches to OFF or OPEN Switches 4 These switches determine a number of settings for Expression v3 1 operation They are labeled with OPEN or OFF and CLOSED or ON For Emphasis operation ensure that the S4 switches are set as follows 5 6 7 8 OPEN CLOSED CLOSED CLOSED ON if SMPTE
230. is Console v2 0 0 User Manual channels in other cues and or submasters that will modify a running dynamic effect The control channel need not be patched to any EDMX address to be used as a Size Rate or Form channel Note The size rate and form channel setting has no affect on the EDMX patch of assigned channels so you can have a channel patched to EDMX and controlling dimmers or devices as well as controlling the size rate or form of dynamic effects Dynamic Effect Playback Dynamic effects can be recorded to cues or submasters for playback When you create or play back a dynamic effect the movement created by that effect is calculated on top of any channel levels including background fades active cues and submasters and captured channels This gives you the ability to change the base point of a dynamic effect while the effect is running by playing cues activating submasters or by manual control Cues and submasters containing dynamic effects do not contain any other channel data You will need to have a base look active in addition to the dynamic effect to create the final stage look For example a pan tilt dynamic effect is recorded at Sub 1 When you activate the submaster only pan and tilt channels will be actively moving on stage no intensity no color no other attributes are recorded in this submaster To get the pan tilt dynamic to move around the desired base point and have intensity and color and any other se
231. is Facepanel Options The Emphasis Control System is compatible with a number of Express and Expression style facepanels The Emphasis Facepanel is used as an input device for channel selection recording and playback as well as an output device for DMX data Express Two Scene This facepanel type includes the Express 24 48 the Express 48 96 and the Express 72 144 For more information on the features of this facepanel type see foldouts F Express 24 48 Facepanel Overview page 298 and G Express 48 96 amp 72 144 Facepanel Overview page 299 The Emphasis Visualization virtual console does not include two scene operation only submasters for this facepanel type Express ECS This facepanel type includes the Express 125 the Express 250 and the Express ECS For more information on the features of this facepanel type see foldout E Express 125 250 ECS Facepanel Overview page 297 The Emphasis Visualization virtual console emulates all facepanel controls for this facepanel type Expression ECS This facepanel type includes the Concept 2x Expression 2x Imagine 3 Expression 3 and Expression ECS For more information on the features of this facepanel type see foldout D Expression Facepanel Overview page 296 The Emphasis Visualization virtual console emulates all facepanel controls for this facepanel type Insight ECS This facepanel type includes the Insight 2x Focus Insight 3 and Insight ECS For more information on the featu
232. is interpreted as 0 255 100 100 and 255 all mean full FL will be recognized as 100 Case is ignored Levels will normally be preceded by the symbol but it is not necessary e 9 100 100 2558 FL fl All these mean full In the table at the end of this document arguments are indicated as follows O divas numeric Be OO eee eae OT cue name a iS ae level EE en at sign before level This can be left out Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual For example WE DT one numeric argument e g bump bump 42 e g ratewheel ratewheel 10 MEC one cue name e g runcue Q runcue 123 4 FOL s vvv a number an sign and a level e g subpot L subpot 3 75 or subpot 42 255 This will only work for commands that specifically have a level argument L listed in the keyword table below For example Channel 1 50 50 is simply two key presses not a level argument Therefore you cannot use or Capchan 1 50 Here 50 is specifically a level and so the and rules apply Command Examples String Action Channel 1 at full Channel 1 At Full unknown command These commands must be separated Stblst because they re alphabetic Subpot 5 50 This sets submaster 5 s pot to 50 if virtual pots are active citbfrg1 en Channel 1 Thru 5 Full Record Cue 1 Enter Parkchan 1 50 This parks channel 1 at 5096 regardless of what mode you re in This is the same as the
233. ith one Facepanel and one Emphasis Server the transmission lines are easy to map In an Emphasis Control System with multiple Facepanels and Emphasis Servers you can map from a Facepanel from one system ID to the Emphasis Server on another system ID You can also use the EMIDI and ESMPTE ID values to create broadcast areas within a multiple Emphasis Control System For example to have SMPTE time code input on a Facepanel with an ESMPTE ID of 21 broadcast to multiple servers set the ESMPTE Receive value on those servers to 21 see SMPTE page 218 All servers with an ESMPTE Receive value of 21 will be able to hear the incoming SMPTE MIDI In Out is standard on all Express Expression Insight 2x 3 ECS variations SMPTE is available as a factory upgrade for Expression Insight 2x 3 ECS facepanels only SMPTE is not supported on Express facepanels Verify your Facepanel has the SMPTE upgrade installed before using it with SMPTE time code EN Control Interfaces 209 MIDI Basics ETC MIDI MIDI Show Control and MIDI Time Code may be input on a node currently the Facepanel is the only input output option for transmission to the Emphasis Server over ETCNet2 The MIDI Input Port EMIDI ID Facepanel setting maps to the EMIDI Receive Emphasis Visualization setting You cannot have multiple Facepanels with identical MIDI Input Port EMIDI ID settings but you may have multiple Emphasis Servers with identical
234. k can be used to play back events You can also have both the external and internal clocks enabled at the same time This will ensure that your program will run even if external signal is lost A Time Code Program consist of a series of events that play back at specified times with reference to the time code clock A time code program also has a modifiable loop time that ranges from 5 seconds to 24 hours There can be as many as 3 000 time code events with each event having any combination of cues loaded in faders one cue for each of the two faders a submaster bump button and a macro Event times are expressed in hours minutes and seconds with each second broken down into frames For example 01 25 30 17 is one hour twenty five minutes thirty seconds and seventeen frames Three frame rates are available 24 fps 25fps and 30fps default Up to 32 events may be executed in a single frame Note If more than 32 events are assigned to the same frame only the first 32 are executed in that frame Remaining events are executed in the following frame s as needed In manual mode however only one event is executed when step is pressed regardless of how many are assigned Change the time code frame rate Step 1 Press Setup 2 Enter to view the Options Settings menu Step 2 Press 5 Enter to select Time Code Frames per Second Step 3 Press 1 to set the frame rate to 30 fps 2 to set the frame rate to 25 fps
235. key to flash Scene B playback recorded cues see Cues page 112 for more information Note The Express 24 48 also has the ability to run in single scene mode with channel and submaster faders available In that case the top row of channel faders correspond to channels 1 24 and the bottom row becomes submasters 1 24 Setup Two scene Operation To change the operation mode of your Express 24 48 48 96 or 72 144 you will need to use the Setup display Once you have enabled two scene operation the AB Fader Pair can only be used for crossfading between Scene A and Scene B If you want to playback recorded cues on the AB Fader Pair you will need to return to single scene operation Setup two scene operation Step 1 Press Setup 1 Enter to open the System Settings menu Step 2 Press 1 5 Enter to select the Scene Mode settings Step 3 Press 1 Enter to set the console to two scene operation Step 4 Press Stage to return to the Stage display Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Setup single scene operation Step 1 Press Setup 1 Enter to open the System Settings menu Step 2 Press 1 5 Enter to select the Scene Mode settings Step 3 On Express 48 96 and 72 144 consoles press 0 Enter to return to single scene operation On Express 24 48 consoles you have two single scene choices press 2 Enter for single scene operation without submasters or press 3 Enter for single scene opera
236. keys gt to view the effect step softkeys Step 4 Press S5 Insert Step y Enter where y is the number of the new step you want to create The old step y and all subsequent steps will increment their step number by one and the new empty step y will appear Only one step may be inserted at a time Step 5 Add channels and modify timing as described in the procedures above Step 6 Press Record Enter to record the effect Note You may use the f and keys to select the step you want to insert Delete steps in an effect Step 1 Press Blind The Blind display defaults to cues Step 2 Press Cue x to select cue x If you want to modify an effect recorded directly to a submaster press Sub x where x is the submaster you want to modify Step 3 Press S7 More Softkeys gt to view the effect step softkeys Step 4 Press S6 Delete Step y where y is the number of the step you want to delete You can delete multiple steps at a time using the And and Thru keys All subsequent steps will renumber themselves to close the gap Step 5 Press Record Enter to record the effect Note You may use the f and 4 keys to select the step s you want to delete Lastly you can apply attributes to an effect to change the playback order and direction Available attributes include Positive Negative An effect can be either Positive or Negative but not both A positive effect sets inactive steps
237. kout Channels and dimmers that are unparked will return to whatever control input has the highest level or they will return to zero output Since you can park channels and dimmers separately it is possible to park a channel and its patched dimmer at different levels In this case the parked dimmer level will take precedence When the dimmer is unparked the channel s parked level will take precedence Chan Parked Dimmers FL 50 Parked Channels 17 142 50 25 54 52 3 S4 ss 56 S S8 UU NG 28 nb o D D Page Q Park Dimmers When you park dimmers they will stay at their parked level and ignore any instructions they get from the channel they are patched to So you can park a dimmer to a specific level to maintain worklight or for troubleshooting purposes for example and still be setting channel levels and recording cues Park dimmers at direct levels Step 1 In the Stage display press lt S7 More Softkeys gt S6 Park In the Park display you do not need to press a softkey before selecting dimmers Step 2 Select dimmers using the procedure described in Select Channels Dimmers and Fixtures page 86 Step 3 If selected dimmers are not already at the levels you require press At x where x is the level you desire If they are at the levels you require skip this step Step 4 Press Enter to park the dimmers In the Park display dimmers will display the level they are parked to EN
238. l and will stop channels from tracking forward beyond this cue See Allfade page 112 for more information A Blocked Channel creates a move instruction on a channel basis rather than a cue basis as Allfade does The Block setting remains with the channel as cues are copied or updated but are lost if the cue is re recorded It is possible to Backtrack over a Blocked channel s level but it is not possible to Track Record over it Blocked channel s levels will track forward normally See Blocked Channels page 137 for more information Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Chapter 3 System Settings This chapter covers the basic settings you can adjust to customize your Emphasis Control System working environment It also covers patch functions and the About command This chapter contains the following sections The Setup Menu llle 50 E IL c IT 71 e Using the About Command 81 System Settings 49 50 The Setup Menu The Setup menu provides a number of settings you can adjust to customize your working environment These include things like the number of dimmers and channels you have in your system how some facepanel controls work default timing information among others This section describes all the settings available in the Setup menu Monday 10 March System Settings Funct i Functi int Functions Macro List Tin Code Real Time Pr 00 J MONA WON ma System Setting
239. l Types Cues numbered 0 9 are represented in an MSC frame as hexadecimal 30 39 For decimal cues the point character is represented by hexadecimal 2E CN Faas yr Console faders are toggled by changing the Cue List number Faders with fader A B represented by 31 and fader C D represented by 32 both hexadecimal Deimter oo OSS O SOS Examples In the examples below MSC frame packets are sent using transmit channel 66 42 hexadecimal Cue number o v 9 E 5 a s NG 2 o O c 3 3 S m T s s c c o e 8 5 8 8 S KO 2 E o T gt 5381388 2 gt Lu Oo c E E Pd 2 M5 o0 65 G6 S222 p2 a tt BP 855 5 E SE a ad t a D D o o 0o o6 29080929283 ES GO Go A B FO 7F 42 02 01 02 30 00 31 00 31 F7 Go C D FO 7F 42 02 01 01 30 00 32 00 31 F7 GO CUE Cue 1 A B fader FO 7F 42 02 01 01 31 00 31 00 F7 Cue5 6A Bfader FO 7F 42 02 01 01 35 2E 36 00 31 00 F7 Cue 10 A B fader FO 7F 42 02 01 01 31 30 00 31 00 F7 Cue 350 A Bfader FO 7F 42 02 01 01 33 35 30 00 31 00 F7 Cue 1 C D fader FO 7F 42 02 01 01 31 00 32 00 F7 Cue 2 C D fader FO 7F 42 02 01 01 32 00 32 00 F7 Cue 987 C Dfader FO 7F 42 02 01 01 39 38 37 00 32 00 F7 STOP Stop A B FO 7F 42 02 01 02 30 00 31 00 31 F7 Stop C D FO 7F 42 02 01 02 30 00 32 00 31 F7 STOP CUE Cue 50 A B Hold FO 7F 42 02 01 02 35 30 00 31 00 F7 Cue 50 C D Hold FO 7F 42 02 01 02 35 30 00 32 00 F7 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual 2 gt
240. l the cue that contains a move instruction for those channels As an extreme example if you Track Record a channel into cue 1 that has not been used anywhere in your show that channel will be recorded into your entire cue list at that level because it is not told to move in any of those cues If you make changes to a number of channels in a cue and then Track Record each channel will stop the track at it s own next move instruction See Track Record page 115 for more information Back Track is used to track record backwards from the current cue Track Record will only record levels into subsequent cues Use Back Track to record levels into previous cues As with Track the levels will be recorded until they encounter a move instruction or an Allfade cue See Back Track page 115 for more information Fill Track is used to track in both directions from the current cue Use Fill Track to record forward and backward in the cue list at the same time As with Track the levels will be recorded until they encounter a move instruction or an Allfade cue See Fill Track page 116 for more information An Allfade cue will stop a Track Record at a certain cue number by forcing all channels to move even if their level tracks through to subsequent cues Channels at zero will be given a move instruction to be at zero and all other channels will be given a move instruction to be at your level This will appear to a Track Record as a brick wal
241. l time To have a step fade in and out rather than pop set In timing for the fade up and Out timing for the fade out In Dwell Out timing is often used to create wave effects where one step is fading out as another fades in To create a wave make sure the step time is shorter than the total In Dwell Out timing You can also apply timing to the overall effect by adding Up Dwell Out timing to the effect cue or submaster Up timing determines the upfade of the running effect Down timing determines the time it takes for the running effect to fade out Dwell timing determines how long the effect will run before fading out Dwell timing at the cue or submaster level is the time between the upfade of the first step and the downfade of the last step of the effect A dwell time of hold means the effect will run until another cue is played in the fader or until you press the submaster bump button to start the downfade If the timing you have entered at the step level and at the cue or submaster level need to be adjusted you can also add a rate value to the effect The rate value will cause the step rate to slow down or speed up proportionally to the recorded times It will not affect the overall Up Dwell Down timing of the effect This is an easy way to adjust effect timing without having to change each step individually You can also apply random rate to an effect When you adjust the random rate settings you apply minimum and maximum rate limits The
242. left corner of the channel area Step 6 Press Record Part y Enter where y is the target part number Note Alternatively you can press Record Enter to record modified levels back into their source part This way you can modify levels across the cue without having to edit each part individually Channels added to the cue will be recorded into part 8 unless you specifically choose a part in the record command 136 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Blocked Channels In some cases you may want to be able to stop a Track record for a specific channel or channels but you may not want to create a block cue To accomplish this you can place a block instruction on a channel and record it into a cue Place a channel block Step 1 Press Blind The Blind display defaults to cues Step 2 Press x Enter to select cue x You can also use the and keys to increment and decrement through the cue list Step 3 Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels Dimmers and Fixtures page 86 Step 4 Press S7 More Softkeys5 S6 Block Step 5 Press 1 Enter to set a block on selected channels Blocked channels levels will be displayed in white Alternatively press 0 Enter to clear a block from selected channels Cue List In the Cue List display you can view and edit the cue numbers and their attributes You can edit one or a number of cues at a time using the arrow k
243. les nine of which are editable Twenty three additional profiles that may be programmed Level X and Rate Y wheels Proportional level control of channels or groups Proportional rate control of cues and submasters 0 2000 percent Encoders ive encoder knobs e Six encoder pages e Reassignment individually or automatically with Autoload function Diskette Functions e S 5 inch high density diskette drive for software and configuration loading Options Alphanumeric keyboard Remote Focus Unit Wireless Remote Focus Unit Lighting Playback Controller SMPTE external control Remote Macro controls e Serial mouse Size and weight 40x 16 5 x 6 5 inches 1020 x 420 x 170mm 40 pounds 18 2kgs Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Insight Facepanel Specifications Electrical Voltage input 90 250 VAC 50 60 Hz Maximum current 6 3 amps Maximum monitor load two at 2 0 amps each Built in interfaces Up to 1 536 DMX512 outputs 2 048 on Insight ECS Remote Focus Unit Supports CE dimming systems Remote Macro control Alphanumeric keyboard Time code control either MIDI or SMPTE DMX512 Input port e Serial mouse Fader functions Fade times programmable from 0 1 seconds to 99 59 minutes Manual override of upfade and or downfade Rate override Split time fades Manual fades e Background fades with LTP channels User selectable default fade times Hold Back f
244. les in each bracket Remove the LPC Step 5 Drill holes at the marks of the appropriate diameter for the mounting anchors screws you have provided Step 6 Securely attach the LPC to the mounting surface Install Cables Except for the RFU connection all cables connect to the rear panel of the Express LPC There is a strain relief provided for the power input cable Install the Express LPC power supply Step 1 Push the LPC unit s power switch to the OFF position O position Step 2 Remove the thumbscrew to free the cable clamp from the rear panel Step 3 Clip the cable clamp over the attached power supply cable near the 8 pin male connector Step 4 Plug the connector into the LPC power input receptacle Step 5 Adjust the cable clamp so that you can re attach it to the LPC Step 6 Plug one end of the furnished power cord into the power supply and the other end into a grounded power outlet Step 7 If you require a chassis ground connect a ground wire to the grounding screw on the LPC rear panel Configuration Guidelines You have the same configuration options for DMX input output and show control protocols MIDI and MSC that the full Facepanel provides These settings are described in Control Interfaces page 201 Enter the configuration menu on the Express LPC Step 1 Power up or reboot the LPC and turn on the monitor Step 2 When the prompt appears on the monitor at startup press M1 M2 M3 on the t
245. levels in the downfade time Allfade An allfade cue step fades all increasing levels in the upfade time and all decreasing levels in the downfade time and clears the other fader pair e Blocking A blocking cue step stops all background fades before running in the physical fader You can choose to play back the referenced cue as it was originally written known as a dynamic playback or you can override the recorded levels proportionally and override the recorded timing with times you enter in the cue step Level Sets an intensity level for the cue within the subroutine The level proportionally affects channel levels recorded in the referenced cue Fadetimes Fade times can be set to dynamic values displayed in purple which means the cue will run as recorded manual which means that you will have to move the faders to zero and then up to full to manually fade in the cue step or to a specific upfade and or downfade time which overrides the recorded time in the referenced cue Follow time Follow time can be set to dynamic which means the next step will execute as soon as the selected step completes hold which means that you will have to press Go to execute the next step or to a specific follow time which executes the next step that long after the selected step starts its fade Blind Editing 143 144 Style Steps The following style steps are available in subroutine cues
246. lg Jana aoejday sno0y sn 04 Joajas BAR enso S S9MHOS 9J0 N p S 4 1817 snoo4 Quiod Z JUIOd n904 pulja AJO 19q87 S 9MHOS 9J0 N snoog Pula z 1104 jeeus pe sq sno04 snoo 4 puljg SnooJ eiejeg abeg 1xeN eBeg snoinalg snooJ 1eeus stas sn90y 109 99 S 9MHOS 9J0 N sn90y L 4 1U10d says enc sr snoo4 sn9034 pullg Sn204J eiejeq oDeg 1xeN eDeg snoinalg snooJ 4294S SS no Sn204 09 99 sno irl 4 jeeus Z 1394S peaids dno abeg 1xan eBeg snoindig 18sys snoo4 1eeus qns 8294S en peaide dnou SKIYYOS 9J0 N 3 z 1994S peaids dnog dnog ajajag abeg Ian abeg snoinalg ane7 eoe deu dnog dnog Papag said Haba S S9MYOS JON p S 5 1517 dnoiy Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual gt gt gt feidsig panunu0 sAexyos 41 1asys zasa sr asa 19943 sjauueyd ppy S OMOS eo qns aja ag oBeg 1xoN e8eg snol naig geb ang is ang qns pung amnjeboN 309 unay y wopury ulopueHd ping eounog asjanay 2 6UJ9 Y BNUSOd 19945 YIL Goa ejeu XINQ3 ainideg ege MOJ O S 9MHOS 9J0 N 308 ina seinqunv 308 einquuy sAsyyog aow deis eiejeq deis uesu yBiH mo7 INO EMG UI au days deis z329 19sys 2309 sn 399 199 43 sjauuey ppy S OMOS oJo ang eisjeq abe 1xaN eBeg SNOIAdd oo ano is ang ang pung SSS ZSSS SSS 1394S ansa uinjoy S SMYOS MON qns eiejeg abeg 1XeN pepe 8 8 eoe deu BERN ans pajas nab pata angg winjay uinjoy qns a a aq oDeg 1xoN eBeg snol nai
247. lipped pan Step 5 Press 1 Enter to enable flipped tilt or 0 Enter to disable a flipped tilt Attribute Setup A fixture personality may have up to 64 attributes Most of the attributes have a name that describes the function to which they are assigned such as Pan Tilt Gobo or Strobe Attributes are assigned to a category that describes their general function You can edit these assignments if you wish including attributes in one or more categories These categories allow you to select similar attributes across fixtures without having to select each individual channel within the fixtures Categories are selected using the Only command System Settings 61 Position Attributes that control the direction of the beam Pan and Tilt e Image Attributes that affect the shape of the beam Gobo FX etc Color Attributes that color the beam Cyan Magenta Yellow Color etc Beam Attributes that affect the quality of the beam Intensity Strobe Zoom Iris Focus etc e Other Typically used for speed and control channels Attrib Attribute 51 52 53 S4 S5 Sb 57 58 NHESR usen Laser lcu rol Return Change attribute category assignments Step 1 On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis Visualization press Setup 1 1 Enter to access the Moving Light Functions menu Step 2 Press 3 Enter to dis
248. lock When copying multiple programs it is best to select and copy programs that occur on the same day then select and copy another group and so on 196 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Enable Real Time Programs It is possible to have Real Time Programs recorded and not have them play back The default of the system is to leave Real Time Programs disabled This does not prevent you from recording programs just from having them play back To allow Real Time Programs to execute enable them in the Options Settings menu Enable or disable Real Time Programs Step 1 Press Setup 2 Enter to view the Options Settings menu Step 2 Press 8 Enter to select Real Time Programs Step 3 Press 1 Enter to enable Real Time Programs 0 Enter to disable Real Time Programs EH Real Time Programs 197 198 Time and Location The following tables list time zone latitude and longitude for representative cities around the world Use these settings to determine sunrise and sunset times for real time programs United States Cities Time Zone Standard Albuquerque NM 7 West 35 03 N 106 37 W Anchorage AK 10 West 61 10 N 149 11 W Atlanta GA 45 West 33 39 N 84 26 W Baltimore MD 5 West 39 11 N 76 40 W Augusta ME 5 West 44 19 N 69 48 W Billings MT 7 West 45 47 N 108 32 W Boise ID 7 West 43 36 N 116 13 W Buffalo NY 5 West 42 53 N 7
249. log box Make sure to use all uppercase letters when you enter the code Verify that the code you have entered is correct Click the Upgrade button Close and restart Emphasis Your upgrade will take effect on the restart System Procedures Power up Procedure For best performance power up your system in the following order Step 1 Turn on the hub s and or switch es Step 2 Turn on the Server and monitor s Wait for the Emphasis application to start up completely before proceeding to the next step Note nanetwork with multiple Emphasis Control Systems online allow one Emphasis Server to fully startup before starting the other Emphasis Servers This will ensure that your network configures correctly Step 3 Turn on the Facepanel s and monitor s Step 4 Turn on any ETCNet2 Nodes Step 5 Turn on accessories such as Remote Focus Units Note Emphasis defaults to starting in Show Mode In Show Mode CAD PRES and LINK modes are hidden To enter advanced mode for the current show file in the File menu click Show Mode You will be asked to save changes to the current show because the show will be closed and reopened in advanced mode automatically You can also load a different show file in either Show Mode or advanced mode using the File menu Load Show command Select or deselect the Show Mode box at the bottom of the file browser to load the show in the appropriate mode When you power up your Emphasis Contr
250. macros you are using Note The macro numbers in these examples are the defaults and may not correspond to the Maintenance and Troubleshooting 259 This page intentionally blank 260 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Appendix C Lighting Playback Controllers The Expression Insight and Express Lighting Playback Controller LPC units can be used in conjunction with an Emphasis Server to create a rack mountable Emphasis Control System These LPC units have a limited user interface an LCD touchscreen on the Expression Insight LPC and a series of buttons on the Express LPC and are designed for limited programming and manual playback capabilities Typically a show that will be run on an LPC system is programmed on a full Facepanel first and then loaded into the LPC for automated playback through Remote Macros a show control protocol MIDI MSC SMPTE or through Real Time Programs This appendix contains the following sections Expression Insight LPC Installation and Configuration 262 Expression Insight LPC User Interface 263 Express LPC Installation and Configuration 264 Express LPC User Interface 267 E Lighting Playback Controllers 261 Expression Insight LPC Installation and Configuration The Expression Insight LPC may be mounted in a 19 inch equipment rack or may be placed on a stable horizontal surface All connections are made on the rear panel
251. mber containing the follow time Step 2 Press Follow Clear This removes the follow time Note Follow is found on S5 Follow in Stage on Express facepanels Rate You can assign a rate to a cue or submaster A rate applies a multiplier to fade timing that either slows down or speeds up the playback of that cue or submaster A rate value of 100 equals the recorded time of the cue or submaster A rate of zero would stop the playback a rate of 2000 is the maximum rate causing the fastest playback You can add a rate value to a cue or submaster manually or you can apply a rate to a cue or submaster as it is played back then update the rate to the cue or submaster Add a rate manually to a cue or submaster Step 1 Press Cue x to select the cue or Sub x to select the submaster where x is the cue or submaster number Step 2 Press S7 More Softkeys5 S5 Rate y Enter where y is the rate value between 0 2000 Clear a rate Step 1 Press Cue x where x is the cue number containing the link Step 2 Press S5 Rate Clear This removes the rate Multi Part Cues There are occasions where you want a single cue to be able to fade different channels in different times This can be accomplished with a part cue A cue can be split into up to eight parts each of which contains discrete channels a channel can only move in a single part of a cue and discrete fade times For example as an actor walks across the
252. mer check or in Patch or Park displays Press S7 More Softkeys gt S3 Dim x And 2 to select non consecutive dimmers in Patch or Park e Press S7 More Softkeys gt S3 Dim x Thru 2 to select a range of dimmers in Patch or Park displays Press S7 More Softkeys gt S3 Dim a Thru g Except c to select a range of dimmers except dimmer c in channel patch or park You can use Except multiple times to remove multiple dimmers from the selection lt S7 More Softkeys gt S3 Dim 1 Thru 1 0 Except 5 Except 7 selects dimmers 1 4 6 and 8 10 in Patch or Park displays Select fixtures Press Fixture x to select a fixture number Use And Thru and Except to select multiple fixtures In Emphasis Visualization you can click on a fixture symbol to select its channels See the Emphasis Visualization User Manual for more information on selecting fixtures using the mouse Maintained Channel F ixture Selection Selected channels and fixtures remain selected through a record operation By pressing Only you can maintain selection of the same fixtures channels or you can press another number to deselect the previous fixtures channels and select new ones In Blind mode to select a cue group submaster or focus point after a record operation press Cue Group Sub or Focus Point Examples Fixture 1 Thru 5 Full Record Enter Only will lea
253. mic Template List 25 STOP All 26 Spiral 1 Circle 13 Color Step 2 2 Reverse Circle 14 Color Step 3 3 Step Square 15 Color Fade 1 27 Pan 4 Reverse Step Sqr 16 Color Fade 2 28 Tilt 5 Figure 8 17 Color Fade 3 29 Ro 6 Can Can 18 Color Fode 4 30 Inverted Ramp 7 Fly In 8 Fly Out 9 On Mark 10 Off Mark 11 Smooth 12 Color Step 1 19 STOP Intensity 20 STOP Focus 21 STOP Color 22 STOP Beam 23 STOP Image 24 STOP Other 31 Bump Color 32 Fade Color 33 Iris 34 Focus 35 Zoom 36 Frost Source ID Channels Lobel 1 Edit Press Record Cue n Enter to record the dynamic effect to a cue Record Sub n Enter or Record Sub Bump n to record the dynamic effect to a submaster Step 7 102 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Dynamic effects are only recorded when the Dynamic Effect editing display is visible If you have returned to the Stage display while the dynamic effect is running and you record a cue or submaster the static base channel levels will be recorded to that target not the dynamic effect Make sure to record your dynamic effects from the Dynamic Effect editing display Editing the Device List The order of devices in the Device List can be adjusted more specifically than the simple S7 Sort Devices command will allow These methods are listed below Enter fixtures or channels one at a time in the order in which you want them to cycle through the dynamic
254. mmand S3 Delete Entry to remove the command from the macro When done press Enter Macro to record your changes Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Special Macro Functions Some commands are available to perform special functions within macros These include Macro Wait for inserting pauses in macros some specific submaster functions and ETCLink functions Macro Wait Macro Wait commands may be entered at any point in a macro and you may have more than one Macro Wait within a single macro To program a pause in a macro press Macro Wait type the amount of time you want to have the macro pause and press Enter You can then continue to enter macro commands if necessary Macro Waits can be programmed from 0 1 seconds to 99 59 minutes Submaster Functions Submaster functions within macros include commands to turn submaster bump buttons on and off as well as a special function to force load an active submaster without having to pull the fader down To insert these commands in a macro in the Macro Editing display press S1 On Sub Bump then type the submaster number and press Enter S2 Off Sub Bump then type the submaster number and press Enter S5 Force Sub Load then type the submaster number and press Enter To include a command to start a timed submaster or change the direction of a running fade simply press the actual submaster bump button while programming the macro ETCLink Functions You
255. mphasis Visualization User Manual for more information on setting the startup preferences Enable the Startup Macro Step 1 Press Setup 2 Enter to view the Options Settings Step 2 Press 7 Enter to select Startup Macro Step 3 Press x Enter to set macro x as the Startup Macro An S will be displayed next to the macro number in the Macro List and the Startup Macro message will be displayed in the View Macro and Macro Editing displays 0 Enter to clear the Startup Macro Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Sample Macros The following macros are provided as useful samples There are more macros available at the ETC website http www etcconnect com service service_macros asp Note Not all Expression macros are valid for the Emphasis Control System Channel Check At 0 0 Full Each time you activate this macro the next channel is brought to full as the previous channel is taken out Automated Channel Check At 0 0 Full Macro Wait 5 seconds M In this macro each channel is brought to full for 5 seconds then the macro repeats itself bringing up the next channel M is the macro s own number Delayed Automated Channel Check Macro 1 Macro Wait 1 minute M2 Macro 2 At 0 0 Full Macro Wait 5 seconds M2 Sometimes you are responsible for doing the channel check and running the console If you need to have the automated channel che
256. n be setup to play back every day only on certain days of the week or even only on specific dates You can assign absolute time of day or you can assigna relative time based upon sunrise and sunset times for your location using the system s astronomical time clock feature It is possible to have Real Time Programs recorded but not allow them to play back Before you can properly use the Real Time Programs you will need to set the time and location settings and you will need to enable the Real Time Programs so that they will play back Setting the time and location To use real time programs you will need to set the time and date in Emphasis see Clock Functions page 56 If you want to use astronomical time clock functions to activate events based on sunrise and sunset times you will also need to set the location of the Emphasis Control System Tables of location data are in the next section Time and Location page 198 Note Setting the astronomical time clock functions here does not transfer to the astronomical time clock settings in Emphasis Visualization for daylight rendering You will need to set the location data in both places to use both features Menu En mr NN 12 r Clock our Daylight Savings Time Enabled Sunrise 08 20 AM Sunset 07 02 PM 51 2 EE S4 S5 56 Ss 58 m Eu a a a a ee yy Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Set latitude Step 1 On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel
257. n of software on your Emphasis Server you will also need to update the software version in your Facepanel If Facepanel Software disks are not provided or are lost you can create your own Facepanel Software disk The Facepanel Software Disk must be a 3 5 HD floppy disk You may also create v3 1 software disks for Express and Expression style consoles This provides a way to return a Facepanel to v3 1 operation as a backup It is recommended to keep separate disks for v3 1 and Emphasis Facepanel software on hand To create and install a Facepanel Software Disk Step 1 Exit Emphasis Step 2 Insert a 3 5 HD floppy disk into the floppy drive on the Emphasis Server Step 3 Login as System Manager See Login as a Different User page 17 A CAUTION Modification to hardware or software components or settings may affect the stability of the Emphasis Control System Consult ETC Technical Services before making any changes Non authorized changes resulting in instability may require loading the operating system which will restore defaults remove any changes and may result in a loss of existing show files Step 4 Click OK to clear the warning screen Step 5 Open the Facepanel Software folder located on the desktop Step 6 Double click the appropriate Facepanel Software file EmphExpression exe for Expression and Insight facepanels used with an Emphasis Control System EmphExpress exe for Express facepanels used with the Emph
258. nce Complex effects can be made as well to emulate lightning or fire or reflections off water for example Effects can also be used with moving lights You can record effect steps in the Stage and Fader displays see Stage Effects page 117 or in Blind When you work in Blind you cannot see the stage look of each step as you create them but you can edit more information about each step and the effect as a whole Effects can be recorded in cues or directly into submasters You can also load a submaster with an effect cue Other than playback method there is no difference between cue effects and submaster effects Effects Effects displayed in Blind show you the contents of each step and any timing applied to the steps and the low and high levels the step will fade between Each step can have a step time which indicates how quickly the steps will fire The default step time is 0 2 second indicating that a step will fire every 2 10 of a second Note Effects created in Stage will assume the default timing values for effect steps 0 2 second step time In Dwell Out timing at 0 0 0 and low high levels of 0 FL You must display the effect in Blind to edit step timing and low high levels Steps can also have In Dwell Out timing applied This timing defaults to 0 0 0 which means each step will pop from the low level to the high level and back again in rapid succession If you prefer to have a step linger after it fires add some dwel
259. nd Except Only and Thru functions for selection of control lists Full function Level sets a channel to an editable default value Independent channels Flip channel Moving Light Functions Patch fixtures through Emphasis Visualization by assigning personalities starting channels starting DMX512 address and remote dimmer Swap focus pan or tilt flip Five attribute categories Fixture box level adjustment Fixture focus with Solo EN Specifications 277 278 Cue Functions 9 999 cues in the range 0 1 to 999 9 Discrete upfade and downfade times 00 00 99 59 for each cue Linked cue sequences Effect cues Split wait times Follow time Link to cue macro or subroutine Eight part multipart cues Selective cue recording Update cue command Attribute range editing Subroutines with cue style or macro steps Spreadsheet editing Cue list Group Functions Up to 500 groups Any cue or submaster may be accessed as a group Spreadsheet editing Group list Focus Point Functions Up to 255 focus points Update cues and submasters when focus point changes Record level of focus point without link Available in effects Printout available Spreadsheet editing Focus point list Macro Functions Macro List Up to 2 000 macros with 1 000 steps each Macros may activate any key except Enter Macro Live Learn mode Macro view and macro editing modes Macro wait times are programmable Can include in real time pr
260. nd Latest Takes Precedence LTP channels In all cases channels that are parked or manually controlled by the keypad or through the tools in Emphasis Visualization become captured and take precedence over any playback controls See Manual Control page 86 for more information on selected and captured channels HTP In playback situations HTP channels will output the level that is highest based on all channel inputs like cues and submasters HTP channels are also referred to as pile on because as control inputs are added you may bring up cues and multiple submasters that all have a channel recorded at various levels for example the system calculates which input has the highest level for that channel and outputs that level As control inputs are taken down you pull some of those submasters down to zero the console will adjust the channel level if required to highest remaining level and so on Channels that control dimmers are typically HTP channels In cues HTP channels will always follow the timing of the current cue It does not matter if the channel levels are the same from cue to cue If the fade timing is different from cue to cue and you play the next cue before the previous cue completes the fade time for HTP channels that are moving will change to the current cue s fade time LIP LTP channels obey the latest cue command to set their level They are not affected by submasters unless the submaster contains a subrouti
261. ne see Subroutines on Submasters Subs on Subs page 179 LTP channels can also fade in the background What this means is that an LTP channel will always listen to the most recently played cue if it is moving in that cue If the channel has the same level in a series of cues and the first cue of the series is not allowed to complete before you play back subsequent cues the channel will complete its fade in the background in the fade time of the first cue Channels levels fading in the background are displayed in purple and cannot be cleared from the A B or C D faders since they aren t really in those faders anymore You can view cues running in the background using the Fader display See Background fades page 176 for more information on channels in the background Independent Channels Both HTP and LTP channels can also be independent Independent channels are not affected by the Grandmaster fader the Blackout key and Flash and Solo functions Independent channels also have protection from the release command requiring repeated key presses to return them to zero or recorded levels Most frequently color scrollers and control parameters on moving light fixtures other than intensity are set as independent channels This keeps their moving parts from speeding to full or zero unintentionally when the Grandmaster Blackout Flash and Solo are used Emphasis Console User Interface 47 Preset vs Tracking Preset and Tracking are terms used
262. nect the AC input cable Step 2 Pull the fuse tray out of its holder by pulling the small tab at the bottom of the tray cover using a small tool like a small flathead screwdriver or a small paperclip The tray remains connected to the tray holder but rotates downward for convenience Operate the tray carefully to avoid damage Step 3 Examine both fuses Telltale signs of a blown fuse include discoloration or deposits on the glass envelope and or a visibly broken fuse strip Step 4 If you find a blown fuse replace it with the fuse of the same type and size from the facepanel s Spare Parts Kit To retrieve the Spare Parts Kit see Open the Facepanel page 245 Step 5 With good fuses installed rotate the tray up and inward until it is again flush with the panel Step 6 Replace the power cord and check the facepanel for proper operation If still having problems see Help from ETC Technical Services page 3 Replace the External 12V RFU Remote I O fuse Note This fuse is located in a pop out receptacle located next to the RFU port on the facepanel s rear panel Step 1 Turn off the facepanel and disconnect the AC input cable Step 2 Remove the cover of the fuse receptacle with a flat blade screwdriver Step 3 Remove and examine the fuse Telltale signs of a blown fuse include discoloration or deposits on the glass envelope and or a visibly broken fuse strip Step 4 If you find a blown fuse on an Expression or Insight facepanel re
263. nels will be set to zero level In Stage press S3 Solo again to restore levels for unselected channels In Blind press Release to restore recorded levels Note In Blind pressing S3 Solo again clears all levels regardless of channel selection Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Movin g Light Control Moving lights require multiple control channels to control all their attributes Collectively these channels are called a fixture Fixtures are patched in Emphasis Visualization using personalities that automatically match up their control channels to attributes and categories in Emphasis Console There are tools for controlling fixtures directly from Emphasis Visualization See the Emphasis Visualization User Manual for more information on selecting fixtures and setting levels within Visualization There are also features for controlling fixtures directly from the Facepanel Expression and Insight facepanels have encoders for easily controlling the attributes of fixtures See Moving Light Functions page 60 for information on setting up fixture attributes and encoders Note You can access fixture attributes using the trackpad and arrow keys on Express facepanels On Expression Insight 2x facepanels without the MLM use the arrow keys and the level wheel When you have fixtures patched in your show they will appear in the console displays as channels surrounded by a gray bar As you select fixtures their a
264. nely make a floppy disk of the show in this format and your primary essential lighting has control numbers and patch within the restrictions of the console as listed below your Emphasis Facepanel can be backed down to be an Express ion v3 console by loading v3 1 code It can then operate without the Emphasis Server within the restrictions listed above Express Expression and Insight consoles will revert to their standard maximum channel counts Max Console Type Channels Console Type Max Channels Express 24 48 Expression 2x 800 Express 48 96 Expression 3 400 800 1200 Express 72 144 Expression ECS 400 Express 125 Insight 2x 512 Express 250 Insight 3 512 Express ECS Insight ECS 512 All Express 1024 Dimmers All Expression Insight 1536 Dimmers 242 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual They will also revert to their standard maximum show capacities 600 cues 99 focus points 500 groups e 50 steps per macro To export from the current show file Step 1 With the show file open in the File menu click Export File The Save show to file window will open Step 2 Use the Save in box to find the destination for the exported file You may want to keep copies of this file on the Emphasis Server however to be useful this show file must be saved to a 3 5 HD floppy disk Step 3 Type exp2 in the File name box Note The file name can only be read by Express ion v3
265. ng Light Module MLM for Expression Insight 2x Facepanels page 26 to control moving lights Express facepanels and Expression Insight 2x facepanels without an MLM access the attributes using the arrow keys and the trackpad or level wheel You can also assign attributes to an external pointing device such as a trackball using the TX and TY encoders Encoders are assigned to 44 of the 64 available attributes by default It is possible depending on the fixtures you have patched in Emphasis Visualization for attributes to end up spread across multiple pages of encoders You can change the placement of the attributes within the Fixture Box by modifying the Encoder Setup In the Encoder Setup display note the softkeys S6 Clear Options and S3 Pan Tilt these softkeys are also available in the Macro Key List and Key List Help The autoload encoders function will autoload pages by category If you are using the Emphasis Visualization screens remember that you can click the softkeys and other selectable items in the displays instead of using the facepanel keys Use S6 Clear Options to clear encoder settings Step 1 Press Setup 1 1 Enter 4 Enter to view the Encoder Setup display Step 2 Press S6 Clear Options Enter to clear all encoders on all pages S6 Clear Options 1 Enter to clear the E1 E5 encoders on all pages S6 Clear Options 2 Enter to clear the X and Y encoders on all pages S6 Cle
266. ng device is not used within Emphasis Visualization only for direct control of moving light attributes typically pan and tilt The optional pointing device connects to the mouse connector on the rear panel and is linked to encoders TX and TY in the Encoder Setup display see Encoder Setup Options page 64 Moving Light Module MLM for Expression Insight 2x Facepanels Expression Insight 2x facepanels do not have encoders built in You may have a Moving Light Module MLM for use with your facepanel If so the MLM operates the same as the encoders do You can attach a serial mouse or trackball directly to the MLM to control pan and tilt on moving light fixtures 26 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Install a Moving Light Module MLM on an Expression Insight 2x facepanel Step 1 Turn off facepanel power Step 2 Connect the MLM to the facepanel port labeled Digitizer Serial See foldout B Emphasis Facepanel Rear Panel Connections page 294 Note The Designer s Worksheet digitizer is not compatible with the Emphasis Control System Step 3 Connect an optional pointing device to the MLM if desired Step 4 Plug the power cord of the MLM into a wall outlet or power strip Step 5 Turn on facepanel power Emphasis Console User Interface 27 Console Displays Emphasis Facepanels provide a number of displays that allow you to view your show data and system settings These displays are described in this section
267. ng this manual electronically click on the reference to jump to that section of the manual Notes are helpful hints and information that is supplemental to the main text Note CAUTION A Caution statement indicates situations where there may be undefined or unwanted consequences of an action potential for data loss or an equipment problem WARNING A Warning statement indicates situations where damage may occur people may be harmed or there are serious or dangerous consequences of an action Please email comments about this manual to TechComm etcconnect com Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Help from ETC Technical Services If you are having difficulties your most convenient resources are the references given in this manual and the Help system To search more widely try the ETC website at www etcconnect com If none of these resources is sufficient contact ETC Technical Services directly at one of the offices identified below Emergency service is available from all ETC offices outside of normal business hours When calling for help please have the following information handy Console model and serial number located on back panel Emphasis Server serial number located inside the door on the front of the Server case Software version see How do find the software version page 19 Dimmer manufacturer and installation type Moving light information manufacturer mode data cable type Othe
268. not supported ETCNet2 twisted pair CAT5 or better CRT display MIDI thru Remote macros MIDI output MIDI input Expression Insight Facepanels RFU connector DMX In ETCLink not available at console DMX output 1 connect ETCLink to an ETCLink DMX output 2 Switched AC outlet 2 0A max enabled DMX Node on the network DMX output 3 Switched AC outlet 2 0A max SMPTE input DMX output 4 Power switch e gt JO men alo B minatio T on Onto moi Keyboard RS 232 Parallel Printer CRT Displays 7 y ETONet 000 Digitizer Serial CRTI CRT2 ii ThinNet Twisted Pai inNet _ Twisted Pair A g z 36 ello e CC do CI 69 E qum cum uU GU wi Ooo isk dri h ETCNet2 twisted Disk drive no show storage MIDI input Local Printer pair CAT5 or better Power input software and config loading only AC input fuse T 6 3A RFU fuse F 1 5A MIDI output not supported Serial mouse trackball Alpha keyboard ETCNet ThinNet Wireless Remote for pan tilt only for labeling only CRT 1 display not supported Wireless bus Digitizer CRT 2 display DIP switches for Remote macros not supported SMPTE and twisted pair polarity Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Reference Fold outs 294 Insight Facepanel Overview C Submasters or Channel Faders Use Encoders and Page Keys The en
269. ntering time values in Emphasis Times can range from 0 1 seconds to 99 59 minutes Zero timing is also available Use a decimal point for times less than one second 0 1 0 9 second Two digit entries are calculated in seconds 42 42 seconds 90 1 minute 30 seconds e Three and four digit entries are calculated in minutes and seconds 330 3 minutes 30 seconds 1075 11 minutes 15 seconds Cues Cue timing is assigned as an upfade time and a downfade time Upfade time is the amount of time it takes channels at a lower level to fade to their new higher level when a cue plays back Downfade time is the amount of time it takes channels at a higher level to fade to their new lower level when a cue plays back These times may be the same or they can be different known as a split fade The timing a channel follows is determined solely by the level the channel is at when the cue is played back You will only see the effect of timing during the transition from one cue to another Assign fade time to a cue Step 1 Record the cue see Record Cues page 1 13 or press Cue x where x is the cue number you want to select Step 2 Press Time x Enter where x is the upfade time Step 3 Press lt y gt Enter where lt y gt is the downfade time if it is different from the upfade time Wait Wait timing delays the upfade or downfade of a cue You can only apply one wait time on a cue to either the upfade or downfade no
270. nts Proportional channel levels The bump buttons for all submasters may be enabled disabled or placed in solo mode as a group or individually Integral LEDs on all submasters Programmable fade and wait times Live and programmed rate control 12 submasters for either overlapping pile on or inhibitive operation All submasters programmable with effects or subroutines Update function Control keypad features Submaster labels Spreadsheet editing Submaster list Supermasters E Specifications 281 282 Channel functions 8 bit and 16 bit data types Both highest level Highest Takes Precedence and last action Latest Takes Precedence channel types Group function to proportionally manipulate channels Proportional adjustment with level wheel And Except Only and Thru functions for selection of control lists Full function Level sets a channel to an editable default value Independent channels Flip channel Moving Light Functions Patch fixtures through Emphasis Visualization by assigning personalities starting channels starting DMX512 address and remote dimmer Swap focus pan or tilt flip Five attribute categories Fixture box level adjustment Fixture focus with Solo Cue functions Up to 9 999 cues in the range 0 1 to 999 9 Discrete upfade and downfade times 00 00 99 59 for each cue Linked cue sequences Effect cues Split wait times Follow time Link to cue or macro Label Eight part multipar
271. o 1 902 Macro 1 903 Macro 1 901 Macro 1 902 Macro 1 903 Macro 1 907 Macro 1 908 Not Connected Not Connected Macro 1 904 Macro 1 905 Macro 1 906 Macro 1 907 Macro 1 908 Not Connected Ground 12 Vdc Remote Trigger normally closed 30V 1 amp max Remote Trigger common 30V 1 amp max Macro 1 901 Macro 1 902 Macro 1 904 Macro 1 905 Macro 1 906 Macro 1 907 Macro 1 901 Macro 1 902 Macro 1 903 Macro 1 904 Macro 1 905 Macro 1 906 Macro 1 907 Macro 1 908 Ground 12 Vdc Not Connected Remote Trigger normally open 30V 1 amp max Maintenance and Troubleshooting Macro 1 901 Macro 1 901 Macro 1 902 Macro 1 902 Macro 1 903 Macro 1 903 Macro 1 904 Macro 1 904 Remote Trigger normally closed 30V 1 amp max Remote Trigger normally open 30V 1 amp max Remote Trigger common 30V 1 amp max Ground Ground 12 Vdc fused 12 Vdc fused 257 Wiring Remote Macros Express facepanels There are three typical ways to wire the Remote Macros 1 Connect all Macro pins pins 2 4 6 and 8 to ground pins 12 and 13 and switch the leads connecting the Macro pins pins 1 3 5 and 7 to 12 Vdc pins 14 and 15 as shown in the following diagram Macro 1901 Remote Trigger NC Macro 1901 10 Remote Trigger NO Macro 1902 11 Remote Trigger C Macro 1902 12 O
272. o recorded levels is created or maintained Direct levels are recorded in any subsequent record command Focus Point y Enter where y is the focus point you want to reference to This could be the same as the focus point you used in step 1 if you wanted to look at the entire focus point on stage for example Or you can use the focus point in step 1 as a selection tool and the focus point here as a level setting tool Frame Tables Frame Tables allow you to catalog and edit information when using accessories such as color scrollers or effects wheels By naming and defining the range of possibilities you can enhance the speed and accuracy of including these devices in your show Frame Tables are a generated list of DMX values relative to the options available in your device The information is displayed in a table indicating the name of each frame as well as the DMX value to reach the start center and end of that frame For example if you have a color scroller with 20 frames of equal size you can quickly formulate a table for that device name each frame individually and see at what DMX value each frame begins centers and ends 02 44 PM Lobel Toble Label HR Spots HL Spots Antepro wash DS Wash US Wash DS Special Gobo Create Frame Tables Step 1 On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis Visualization press Setup 1 1 Enter to access the Moving Light Functions menu Ste
273. o select the cue manually and then press Go Select the cue to play back Step 1 Press Stage You must be in the stage display to select a cue for playback Step 2 Press Cue x where x is the number of the cue you want to play back Step 3 Press Go on the fader pair of your choice Note You may select a cue to play back out of sequence at any time Use this procedure to jump to a required cue or to exit a link loop see Link Functions page 113 Manual control You can override the recorded fade times manually by grabbing the crossfade with the faders You can choose to start the cue and then grab the fade in progress or you can start with the faders at zero and use manual control for the entire crossfade Remember that the left fader in the pair controls upfade time and the right fader controls downfade time By moving the faders individually you can manually control the upfade separate from the downfade creating a manual split fade Grab a crossfade for manual control Step 1 Press Stage You must be in the stage display to select a cue for playback Step 2 If required press Cue x where x is the number of the cue you want to play back Step 3 Press Go on the fader pair of your choice 174 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Step 4 Bring both faders down until they meet the current level of the crossfade When they meet that level the crossfade transfers from timed fades to manual fad
274. o19 pulg S S9MHOS 9J0 N ued ang pulg S S9MHOS 9J0 N ued ang pulg S 9MHOS 9J0 N z ued ang pulg S 9MHOS 9J0 N ieeus peaids en SAIYYOS 9J0 N z 1994S peaids ano S 9MHOS 9J0 N asa ang pulg S S9MHOS 9J0 N 1817 ong pulg S S9MHOS 9J0 N dno19 eisjeq oDeg 1X9N 18ays abed snol naig peaidg Ano19 Cad US eeus dnog 1811 9 dno19 eisjeq abeg 1xoN abeg snoinalg peaidg dnoy aays dnog jesus Qs dn019 sr dnouc Le yoold Hed 9 9 3G ana ajajag Buyoes ajqesig jejgeuz ano ajajeg 9 ey oDeg 1X9N oDeg 1X8N oDeg 1X8N abeg 1x9N oom ieeus peeuds eno and 1817 27 Jeeus ang i abeg snoinalg 1eeus snooj Jesus dnolr abe snoinald 19497 aoejday wowao om ojeu oDeg snoi aJg abed snoi aJg MOJJO dno19 199J eS dnoJ5 pulja dno19 198J 6S Z Med ang pula Med ono pajas ans pug Z 199ys 1934S ANS peaids an9 jaays peaids any c 1sr1eno pula ped 1517 ang daw Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual ang 6 6 puna umay ang ejejag eDeg 1xan bed snolnald a1ey panunu0 sAexyos 40 jutog sn204 pulg unay jutog SN204 puig unay jutog snooJj pulg unay xNga andeo dno pulg unay dno puig unay dno pulg unay ieeus Z 1994S peeids snooJ abeg 1XeN e6eg snomalg 1994S dnog jeeus qns 198YS 999 reade snoo S S9MHOS 9J0 N i d z 1884S 1994S peaids snoo4 snoo 4 eiejeg abeg 1xeN abeg snoina
275. occcoccoccc 10 101 45 101 Subnet Mask 2 000 e eee eee eee 255 255 0 0 Display Processor LiSt o ooo oo o oo Enabled Label pawan mh na UNG ee ae eie Na Defaults to console type Use Configured IP Parameters Disabled DMX Output Port Timing 05 Max DMX Output Port 1 Start Channel 1 DMX Output Port 1 Channel Count 512 DMX Output Port 2 Start Channel 513 DMX Output Port 2 Channel Count 512 MIDI Input Port EMIDI ID 1 MIDI Output Port EMIDIID 2 AN CAUTION In Emphasis Control Systems with multiple Facepanels the MIDI Input Port EMIDI ID cannot be the same on all Facepanels It is illegal to have multiple MIDI sources at the same ID in a single system Set the unused Input port s to another value to avoid this conflict Remote Macros e Remote Macro 1 System ID 0 e Remote Macro 1 Macro ID 1901 e Remote Macro 2 SystemID 0 Remote Macro 2 Macro ID 1902 e Remote Macro 3 SystemID 0 e Remote Macro 3 Macro ID 1903 e Remote Macro 4 SystemID 0 e Remote Macro 4 Macro ID 1904 Trigger Out System ID o o o oooooo o 0 Trigger Out Trigger ID o o co ooo oo 1 Language e English 240 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User
276. ode in the dialog Make sure to use all uppercase letters when you enter the code Click Register 13 To register by fax Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Fill out the registration form included with your Emphasis Server Fax it to the appropriate fax number based on your location You will be sent a Registration Validation Code within a full business day If you cannot find the form you can print a new copy from the Emphasis Server Ensure you have a printer connected to your Emphasis Server See Connecting a Printer page 10 for more information Power up the Emphasis Server If the system is unregistered the Registration dialog should open You can also open the Registration dialog using the Help menu Registration command In the Register dialog click the Fax button Print the form fill in all the information and fax it to the appropriate number indicated on the form You will be sent a Registration Validation Code within a full business day Note Alternatively you can email your registration all the information required on the fax form to re isteremphasis etcconnect com Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 When you receive your Registration Validation Code take it to your Emphasis Control System Power up the Emphasis Server If the system is unregistered the Registration dialog should open You can also open the Registration dialog using the Help menu Registration command In th
277. of change on stage access channel 1 faders 2 and 26 access channel 2 and so on Two scene mode ay I Aid a 2 SS Pa allows you to setup lighting looks manually on the channel faders and crossfade between them In all cases two scene 29 30 Oo Nuno oo o nuwasnasos 45 46 47 48 mode uses the top row of channel faders as DODODODODDDOD DO DODODODODO E Step 5 Move the channel faders on Scene A to the O levels needed in the next look Cue 3 This will not affect the stage output OO Step 6 Slide the AB Fader Pair away from you to crossfade from Scene B Cue 2 back into Scene A Since you have changed the channel levels on Scene A and the bottom row of channel Scene A you have crossfaded into Cue 3 faders as Scene B When you are running in two scene mode the AB Fader pair is used Step 7 Continue this process to fade from cue to cue manually to crossfade from Scene A to Scene B You can crossfade manually or with timing applied You can use the CD Fader Pair to Note Use the AB Clear key to flash Scene At to full and the AB Back
278. ograms Can include in time code events Four macros operated by remote switches Startup macro Remote Trigger function Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Effects Functions Effects may be recorded as cues or submasters e Upto 100 steps each Live effects recording e Spreadsheet editing e 8 bit and 16 bit data types e Variability of rate during playback Step times n Dwell Out Step fade times High Low Levels Up Dwell Down Effect fade times Range editing of effect attributes and step values Profile Functions e Profiles may be assigned to dimmers Ten preset profiles nine of which are editable Twenty three additional profiles that may be programmed Diskette Functions e S 5 inch high density diskette drive for software and configuration loading Options Remote Focus Unit e Wireless Remote Focus Unit Lighting Playback Controller Remote Macro controls Console lights Size and Weight Express 125 250 e 35x 15x 6 inches 890 x 380 x 150mm e 21 pounds 9 5kgs Express 24 48 e 43x 15x 6 inches 1090 x 380 x 150mm 30 pounds 13 6kgs Express 48 96 e 43x 24 x 6 inches 1090 x 610 x 150mm e 35 pounds 15 8kgs Express 72 144 54x 24 x 6 inches 1370 x 610 x 150mm 40 pounds 18 1kgs E Specifications 279 280 Expression Facepanel Specifications Electrical Voltage input 90 250 VAC 50 60 Hz Maximum current 6 3 amps Maximum monitor load two at 2 0 amps
279. ol System the system will default to opening the last valid show file If the show file is no longer available in the Shows directory Emphasis will open a new show called Untitled You may setup the system to open a new show on startup if you wish See Create a Default Show in the Emphasis Visualization User Manual for more information Multi console Submaster Fader Support Multi Console Submaster Fader Support enables control of submasters from all connected Emphasis Facepanels Virtual submasters will always track the true fader level and indicate the active output level of the submaster Physical submasters can gain control by matching the current true level Once the level has been matched the true level tracks the physical fader Physical submasters from another connected Facepanel can take control in the same way Submaster LEDs indicate physical submasters that are not in control If the submaster fader needs to move up to match the true level the LED blinks on twice followed by a longer off gap If the submaster needs to be brought down to match the LED blinks off twice followed by a longer on gap Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Login as a Different User There are a number of different user accounts contained in the Emphasis system When the system is turned on it will open using the Emphasis User settings To gain access to the other user accounts exit Emphasis Note When you load new system soft
280. ompleted making your adjustments Step 5 Press S3 Solo to return to the full stage look Select fixture attributes using Only Step 1 Press S8 Fixture x where x is the fixture number you want to select Use And Thru and Except to select multiple fixtures The fixture box will be displayed Step 2 Press Only S1 Position to select the position channels of the fixture You can substitute S2 Image S3 Color S4 Beam or S5 Other to select channels assigned to those categories If you press Only S6 Attribute y where y is an attribute number you can limit your selection to one attribute Note See Aitribute Setup page 61 for information on attributes and their categories Step 3 Press Focus Point z where z is the focus point number Channels will be captured at the level recorded in the focus point and the number z will be indicated below the level You can also set direct levels using the encoders or the At key You can use Only and S3 Solo to limit the channels you record into a focus point This is helpful if you want to create focus points for one attribute category like position without having to clear out all other channels Record a focus point using Only and S3 Solo Step 1 Press S8 Fixture x where x is the fixture number you want to select Use And Thru and Except to select multiple fixtures The fixture box will be displayed
281. on information for all the installed Emphasis components Note Note that this will not update version information if you have upgraded individual components rather than the whole disk image To find the Emphasis Visualization version number In the Help menu click About Emphasis To find the Emphasis Console version number Step 1 Minimize Emphasis Visualization and maximize Emphasis Console Step2 In the Help menu click About To find the Facepanel version number Restart the Facepanel and watch CRT1 The Facepanel version number appears on the bottom of the screen just after the boot screen and before the ETC logo 20 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Chapter 2 Emphasis Console User Interface This chapter covers the variations in the available Emphasis Facepanels Express Expression and Insight It also covers the available accessories that can be used within your Emphasis Control System including the Remote Focus Unit RFU and Wireless Remote Focus Unit WRFU This chapter also describes the different softkey setups of the various Facepanels and the basic channel concepts behind the Emphasis Control System This chapter contains the following sections e Emphasis Facepanel Options 22 Console Displays a 28 Hard keys vs Softkeys by Facepanel Type 36 e Channel Concepts in the Emphasis Control System 47 Emphasis Console User Interface 21 Emphas
282. ooo oo 151 Stage 0a 119 EMIDI nawa ie EHE fad baha 211 303 304 Desp AN bate 212 Receive and Transmit 213 Emphasis Console aci sau mae 2 8 Dongle RP 7 Face Panel 2 Facepanel aaa 7 Options 6 SEEN detail daa Pata 2 7 Visualization 2 8 ESMPTE cea sabina Gan pas EM 211 ETC Locations 3 ETC MIDI Message format 213 ETGNER2 kan aa le ee 204 Except iier nep wets 130 Export Show File to v3 1 244 Expression LED displays 35 F Facepanel a 7 Facepanel Configuration 210 Facepanel Type 22 KG AA 29 87 Fader Status 175 Fill Track 48 118 Fixture Patch 62 Flexichannel 32 53 Channel Selection 90 Ela EP 58 Focus Point List 135 166 Focus Points 98 112 165 BING i ix A 165 Delete cui ti 131 168 Spreadsheet 167 Follow a 128 G Oia a PAA da 172 Grandmaster ooooooooo 54 Group List 135 162 Groups 110 112 118 126 161 Bl oi Soca words reeibesis 161 Cues as Groups 118 Delete ies aaa 131 164 Label AN n eC 132 Spreadsheet 163 Submasters as Groups 126 H Fold moa tete ned dg alate del me 172 A iR Dana 47 Image uie eee Nd 63 Independent
283. or Negative A random effect plays back its steps in random order Step timing is not affected Modify effect attributes Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Blind Editing Press Blind The Blind display defaults to cues Press Cue x to select cue x If you wantto modify an effect recorded directly to a submaster press Sub x where x is the submaster you want to modify Press S7 More Softkeys gt to view the effect step softkeys Press S1 Negative to change the effect from Positive to Negative When pressed S1 will toggle to Positive Press S1 again to return the effect to Positive An effect must be either Positive or Negative S2 Alternate to apply the Alternate attribute Press S2 Alternate again to remove this attribute S3 Reverse to apply the Reverse attribute Press S3 Reverse again to remove this attribute S4 Bounce to apply the Bounce attribute Press S4 Bounce again to remove this attribute S5 Build to apply the Build attribute Press S5 Build again to remove this attribute S6 Random to apply the Random attribute Press S6 Random again to remove this attribute Press Record Enter to record the effect 153 Submasters Blind allows you to edit submasters without affecting the stage output This is useful when you are in the middle of a rehearsal or performance and you need to make a change Blind also allows you to se
284. ort your Show File to shw Format 244 Create a v3 1 Console Software Disk 245 Install v3 1 Console Software 246 Open the Facepanel 0000 e eee eee eee 247 Spare parts Kit llle 247 Replacing fuses llle elles 248 Connecting desk lights Express facepanels only 249 Expression and Insight DIP switches 250 Internal DIP Switches 00000 eae 250 VGA monitor connections 00 cee eee 251 Connecting DMX cable to facepanel 252 Using an optional pointing device 253 Installation llli 253 Device check 2 0c eee eee eae 253 Connecting an alphanumeric keyboard 254 Installing Remote Focus Unit 255 Connecting MIDI 0 000 e eee 256 MIDI Out Thru jumper setting 256 Connecting SMPTE Expression and Insight only 258 SMPTE facepanel connector 258 Using Remote Macros aes 259 Wiring Remote Macros a 260 Expression Insight facepanels 261 Appendix C Lighting Playback Controllers 263 Expression Insight LPC Installation and Configuration 264 Installation Guidelines ooo oooooooo 264 Configuration Guidelines 264 Expression Insight LPC User Interface 265 The Cue Playback Display 265
285. ouchscreen or RFU to enter the configuration menu Once you are in the configuration menu use the RFU to modify configuration settings Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Express LPC User Interface The Express LPC has a limited user interface If detailed control is required for show editing you will want to use a Remote Focus Unit For minor editing and playback you can use the direct macro keys to playback macros 1 7 The Read From Disk command will only read a stored Facepanel configuration from a floppy disk Show data is loaded using the Emphasis Visualization File menu You can use the macro keys in conjunction with the Read From Disk key to perform a number of other commands called autocontrols Activate autocontrols Step 1 Press and hold Read From Disk Step 2 Press and hold the required macro key s Step 3 Release Read From Disk Step 4 Release the macro key s Function Key Combination Stage display Read From Disk M1 aaa CITE NEN a NN Reboot LPC Read From Disk M1 M5 From Disk M1 M5 Nothing use this to back out of an autocontrol without making any Read From Disk M5 M6 changes Read From Disk M1 M6 Read From Disk M1 M6 Disk M1 M6 E Lighting Playback Controllers 267 This page intentionally blank 268 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Appendix D Specifications This appendix contains the following sections e Emph
286. out Note Record Lockout only disables Emphasis Console record functions You can still make changes to the show file in Emphasis Visualization Move Before Bright You can enable disable the Move before Bright MBB functions from this menu For more information on MBB see Move Before Bright MBB page 117 Enable or disable Move Before Bright Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis Visualization press Setup 1 Enter to display the Systems Settings menu Press 1 Enter to access the System Settings menu Press 1 4 Enter to choose Move Before Bright Press 1 Enter to enable move before birght or 0 Enter to disable move before bright Move Before Bright Times When using Move Before Bright you can change the delay and or fade times associated with this capability Enter a Move Before Bright Delay or Fade time Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis Visualization press Setup 1 Enter to display the Systems Settings menu Press 1 Enter to access the System Settings menu Press 1 5 Enter to choose Move Before Bright Times Press x Enter where x is the length of delay time in seconds you want MBB to use Press y Enter where y is the length of fade time in seconds you want MBB to use Options Settings The Options setting
287. oved to the Days Date column Press 1 for Monday 2 for Tuesday 3 for Wednesday 4 for Thursday 5 for Friday 6 for Saturday or 7 for Sunday Use And and Thru to select multiple days of the week Press Enter when you have the days selected S4 Days Date to enter a specific date Enter the date and press Enter enter the numerical month and press Enter then enter the last two digits of the year and press Enter Use a date of 0 to indicate all days of the selected month Once you have entered the days or date you are moved to the Macro column Press y where y is the macro number you want to play back at that time on the selected days or date When you press Enter you are moved to the Label column Enter a label for the program using the optional alphanumeric keyboard if you wish When you are done typing the label press Enter Edit an existing Real Time Program Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Press Setup 8 Enter to view the Real Time Programs display Press lt S1 Select Program gt x Enter to select program number x Press S2 Time to edit or change to an absolute time value S3 Astro Clock to edit or change to an astronomical clock offset S4 Days Date to edit the days or date setting e S5 Macro to edit the macro number S6 Label to edit the program s label You can also use the right and left arrow gt and keys to move
288. p button to fade out all running subroutines on submasters The subroutine s intensity channels will fade out in the fade time imbedded in the subroutine see Subroutines on Submasters Subs on Subs page 146 or in the fader clear time if a subroutine fade time is not included 179 180 Submaster Rate You can place a rate on a submaster to adjust the playback of effects and subroutines This rate can be added to the submaster so that the effect or subroutine plays back at that rate automatically Place a rate on a submaster Step 1 Press Stage or Fader The Rate command is only available in the Stage and Fader displays Step 2 Activate the submaster containing the effect or subroutine Step 3 Press S7 More Softkeys gt S5 Rate and press the submaster s bump button Step 4 Adjust the rate using the rate wheel or trackpad The rate adjustment will occur live Step 5 If you want to add the rate to the submaster press Enter The rate will be set for that submaster and the effect or subroutine will play back at that rate until you clear or set a new rate To set the rate back to 100 press S5 Rate Sub Bump Clear Enter Supermasters Submasters set as Supermasters do not play back anything themselves They do not contain any channel levels and cannot contain effects or submasters They do contain assignments to other submasters containing channel levels effects or subroutines When the Supermaster s fa
289. p 2 Press 6 Enter to display the Frame Table List Step 3 Type a number to indicate the new table and press S3 Edit Table The new frame table will open Step 4 Press S1 Number of Frames and then type the number of frames or options that the device has Press Enter The table will autofill the start center and ending DMX values for all available frames for the device Step 5 Press S3 Frame Label and then type the number of the frame you want to label Press Enter Type the name of the indicated frame and Press Enter or press F7 to move to the next frame label EN Live Editing 97 09 54 AM Table 1 HR Spots Frame Number Label Starting Value Center Value Ending Value Frame 1 Y 15 Frame Frame Frame Frame Frame Frame Frame Frame Frame 10 Frame 11 Frame 12 Frame 13 Frame 14 Frame 15 Frame 16 WOANTOMAWN Edit Frame Table Values Step 1 From an open Frame table press S7 More Softkeys gt and then choose between S1 Start Values S2 Center Values or S3 Ending Values Step 2 Type the new DMX value for the respective field Step 3 Press Enter The cursor will automatically jump from start value to center value to end value After the end value it will ask you to select another frame Note Frame Tables are not referenced data When recorded they are only recorded as DMX values not as frames Therefore changes to Frame Tables will not automatically update an
290. p from ETC Technical Services page 3 E Maintenance and Troubleshooting 251 A 252 Connecting an alphanumeric keyboard Expression and Insight facepanels and ETCNet2 Video Nodes can support an optional alphanumeric keyboard Use the optional keyboard to assign labels to many features of your shows such as to name the show and the cues submasters groups timed events and programs within it You cannot use the keyboard attached to the facepanel to access Emphasis Server functions You can supply your own keyboard or order one from ETC If you supply your own it must be an AT compatible type or can be switched to an AT compatible mode ETC recommends the Cherry G80 1800 and Keytronic 101 keyboards Although you may use keyboards from other manufacturers ETC does not guarantee compatibility CAUTION Donot connect or disconnect an alphanumeric keyboard while your system is turned on Doing so may cause the keyboard to initialize improperly Install an alphanumeric keyboard Step 1 On the keyboard ensure the selector switch is set to the AT position if applicable Step 2 Insert the keyboard cable into the connector labeled Keyboard on the facepanel or remote interface unit Keyboard pinout for DIN 5 pin female 1 Clock 5 Vdc Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Installing Remote Focus Unit A Remote Focus Unit RFU is used to select channels set levels record and playback cues and playback mac
291. p to be incorrect This will be different depending on your facepanel and when it was purchased See below to find what key functions change when v3 1 software is installed on your specific facepanel Express Facepanel the Emphasis Fixture hard key reverts to a Dimmer hard key Expression Insight Facepanel the Emphasis Fixture hard key reverts to a Dimmer hard key The Spreadsheet hard key reverts to a Tracksheet hard key To reduce user error any changes to your hard keys should be labeled clearly when installing v3 1 software and using your facepanel as a stand alone console Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Open the Facepanel If you have an Expression or Insight facepanel you may find it necessary to open the facepanel For Expression 3 Insight 3 and Expression Insight ECS facepanels a spare parts kit is stored inside and can be retrieved by opening the facepanel A CAUTION Donotopen Express facepanels If you have problems with an Express facepanel beyond changing the External 12V fuse please contact your dealer or ETC Technical Service for help Open the Expression Insight face panel Step 1 Turn off the Facepanel and disconnect the AC input cable Step 2 Loosen the knobs at the lower left and right corners of the top panel Step 3 Raise the top panel and hold or prop it in upright position Be aware that Expression 2x and Insight 2x facepanels may not have the integral locking mechani
292. peration Network printing Network file sharing Partial Show Read Server Options Emphasis 2D Server ETCNet2 Ethernet native Pentium based processor Hard drive CD RW drive Floppy drive Single VGA monitor output 5 USB ports Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual 1 serial port Parallel printer port Scroll mouse Alphanumeric keyboard 19 rack mountable with accessory Comes with WYSIWYG Report stand alone software WYSILink message logging standard full WYSILink optional Emphasis 3D Server ETCNet2 Ethernet native Pentium based processor Hard drive CD RW drive Floppy drive Dual video card 5 USB ports 1 serial port Parallel printer port Scroll mouse Alphanumeric keyboard 19 rack mountable with accessory Comes with WYSIWYG Design stand alone software WYSILink message logging standard full WYSILink optional User Interface User log in Password protected System Manager log in Extended Windows desktop Dual display systems only Scroll mouse or any pointing device Keyboard Hotkeys drop down menus toolbar icons shortcuts Pop up windows Displays User Modes Emphasis mode Console Screen facepanel screens with wireframe and shaded view Console facepanel screens and virtual console Subroutine Quad wireframe and shaded views Wireframe plan section and isometric Shaded Monitor one facepanel scr
293. place it with the fuse of the same size and type from the facepanel s Spare Parts Kit To retrieve the Spare Parts Kit see Open the Facepanel page 245 If you have an Express facepanel make sure you use the same type of replacement fuse Step 5 With a good fuse installed reinsert the fuse into the rear panel holder and secure with the screwdriver Step 6 Verify that the external device works properly If still having problems see Help from ETC Technical Services page 3 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Connecting desk lights Express facepanels only Plug the two Littlites into the connectors at the top rear of the facepanel Bend the gooseneck of each to suit your needs A CAUTION Use of any other brand but Littlites is not recommended by ETC Unexpected results may occur Pinout for Littlites XLR 3 pin female Chassis ground Dimming leg E 12 Vdc Connect the lamp between pins 2 and 3 E Maintenance and Troubleshooting 247 Expression and Insight DIP switches All facepanels check DIP switch settings when the system is turned on You must restart the facepanel whenever you change DIP switch settings for those new settings to take effect Expression Insight 3 and ECS and later models of Expression 2x Concept 2x and Insight 2x those without a key type power switch on the face panel have recessed DIP switches located near the middle of the rear panel see Emphasis Facepanel Rear Panel Connect
294. play the Attribute Setup Step 3 Press S1 Select Attribute x S2 Category where x is the attribute number Step 4 Press the following to toggle the category assignment 1 for Position 2 for Image 3 for Color 4 for Beam 5 for Other Step 5 When you have completed your adjustments press Enter Note Toreturn all attributes to their default settings press S7 Reset Defaults Enter 62 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Attribute names and default categories Attribute Category Attribute Category Attribute Category Attribute Category 1 Int ensity Beam 17 CIB Color 433 IntFun Beam 49 FxSpd1 Image 18 Gobo1 Image 34 FocSpd Position 50 FxSpd2 Image Tilt Position 19 Gobo2 Image 435 FocFun Position 51 FxFun1 Image 24 Pa 25 FX2 Image 41 CFun4 Color 57 Fram2A Beam 0 Cyan 1 Magenta 12 Yellow 13 Cir1 14 Clr2 15 CIr3 16 CTO Color Color Color Color Color Color System Settings mge 27 FxRoti__ Image 31 MFun Other 64 Spin 32 IntSpd Beam 48 GFun4 Image 63 64 Encoder Setup Options Emphasis allows you to control moving light attributes through the Fixture Box This display has six pages and shows up to nine attributes per page Each attribute is assigned to an encoder which is a physical device on Expression Insight 3 and ECS facepanels Expression 2x style facepanels can use an MLM see Movi
295. played back You can use the Link function to change the order of the cue list without having to re record all your cues and to link cues to submaster bumps and macros You can enter links in Stage Blind Fader and Cue List displays When you link a cue to another cue you change the playback order of your cue list For example you have a cue list of five cues numbered 1 5 and you link cue 1 to cue 5 When you play back cue 1 cue 5 becomes the next cue skipping over cues 2 4 By linking cues in both directions you can create link loops In a link loop pressing Go will keep you within the loop Link a cue to another cue Step 1 Press Cue x where x is the first cue to play back Step 2 Press Link Cue y Enter where y is the cue to jump to in the cue list Link to macros You can link a cue to a macro A macro is a recorded series of commands see Macros page 181 The macro will fire as soon as you press Go unless you have entered a Follow time in the cue see Follow page 126 Link a cue to a macro Step 1 Press Cue x where x is the cue you are linking the macro to Step 2 Press Link Enter Macro y Enter where y is the macro number EN Live Editing 113 Link to submasters You can also link a cue to a submaster see Submasters page 121 Submaster links have two components sub bump on and sub bump off This allows you to fire a submaster automatically when you press Go Use sub
296. r dark red ate indicates a subroutine step Subrout ine Subroutine cue number in fader 6 Playback 173 Cue Playback Playing back cues is as simple as pressing the Go key on a fader pair With each Go press the selected cue or next cue will play back in that fader pair If you have cues recorded and you have just turned on your system or loaded a new show the cue with the lowest cue number automatically becomes the next cue and you are ready to play back your show If however you need to start with a different cue number you can easily select the cue to play back next at any time To play back cues using the recorded fade times make sure that the A B and C D faders are at the top of their travel level 10 furthest away from you In sequence To play back cues in numerical sequence or in the sequence determined by Link commands on cues simply press Go on the fader pair of your choice Each time you press Go the next cue in the cue list or the next cue as determined by a Link command will play back in that fader pair Note Ifyou alternate between A B Go and C D Go you will see the output of both fader pairs two cues on stage at the same time In general if you want to crossfade from one cue in the cue list use only one Go key for playback Out of sequence To play cues out of sequence or start sequential playback somewhere other than the lowest cue number in your cue list you will need t
297. r keys for the A B and C D fader pairs The current and pending cue numbers and their type and timing appear in the upper left corner of the display Use the controls to playback cues as described in Fader Controls page 170 Note Use the Fader Status area of the Playback display to view the contents of the fader pairs The Macro Playback Display The Macro Playback display includes 24 keys dedicated to Macros 1 24 and a numeric keypad for use with the M key See Macros page 181 for information on macros The Edit Display The LPC is designed to be a show playback device rather than a programming tool In some cases you may need to edit show data or create a show using the LPC as you would a full Facepanel To facilitate this you can use a Remote Focus Unit for keypad entry or you can use the Edit display The Edit display includes all display keys a subset of the Macro editing keys all Softkeys and navigation keys and the entire numeric keypad and editing keys except Focus Point The keys in the Edit display are rather small To avoid pressing the wrong key or multiple keys use a pencil eraser or a PDA stylus to enter data Do not use sharp objects to press keys on the touchscreen Note If you intend to do a lot of programming from the Edit display create a macro for the Focus Point command if required E Lighting Playback Controllers 263 264 Express LPC Installation and Configuration
298. r to view the Real Time Programs display Step 2 Press lt S7 More Softkeys gt S3 Move Program Step 3 Press x Enter to select the program number x you want to move Use And and Thru to select multiple programs You will be prompted to enter a new time for the moved cues Step 4 Press y Enter where y is the new time Selected programs are moved to the new time maintaining their relative offsets from the first program in the selection Note Unexpected results may occur when groups of cues using different time settings absolute vs astronomical time clock or occur on different days are moved When moving multiple programs it is best to select and copy programs that occur on the same day then select and copy another group and so on Copy Real Time Programs Step 1 Press Setup 8 Enter to view the Real Time Programs display Step2 Press S7 More Softkeys gt S2 Copy Program Step 3 Press x Enter to select the program number x you want to copy Use And and Thru to select multiple programs You will be prompted to enter a new time for the copied cues Step 4 Press y Enter where y is the new time Selected programs are copied and inserted into the program list maintaining their relative offsets from the first program in the selection Note Unexpected results may occur when copies are made of groups of cues using different time settings absolute vs astronomical time c
299. r a press of the submaster bump button Placing a Follow time of Hold on a cue step performs the same function 145 146 5 Enter for Filter settings Enter the Group number you want to perform the subroutine Use Group zero 0 to filter all channels Over arching Filter settings usually are placed in the first step of a subroutine Note You can place many filters in one subroutine The later filters will reset the earlier ones This way you can have a single subroutine affect different lights in different steps 6 Enter for Jump to Step and enter the step number to jump to This style can be placed anywhere within the subroutine 7 Enter for Macro and enter the macro number to fire This style can be placed anywhere within the subroutine Subroutines on Submasters Subs on Subs Subroutines on submasters can be used to create alternate cue stacks increasing your playback options In essence each submaster becomes its own playback fader running cues automatically or by pressing the submaster bump button Subroutines on submasters are almost identical to subroutine cues with identical cue steps and attributes Style steps however have slightly different options Style Steps The following style steps are available in subroutines on submasters e Loop to Step Bounce e Subroutine Fade HoldforGo Filter Jump to Step The subroutine runs throug
300. r components in your system Unison other consoles etc Americas ETC International Technical Services Department 3031 Pleasant View Road Middleton WI 53562 1 800 775 4382 1 608 831 4116 service etcconnect com Europe ETC Europe Ltd Technical Services Department 5 Victoria Industrial Estate Victoria Road London W3 6UU England 44 0 20 8896 1000 service etceurope com Asia ETC Asia Ltd Technical Services Department Room 605 606 Tower Ill Enterprise Square 9 Sheung Yuet Road Kowloon Bay Kowloon Hong Kong 852 2799 1220 service etcasia com EH Introduction This page intentionally blank Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Chapter 1 System Overview Emphasis integrates the functionality of WYSIWYG with the Expression style control consoles to give you a powerful but user friendly control system offering both a graphical point and click environment and a tactile button and wheel interface Emphasis ensures consistency and accuracy with total integration of data across all modes Data input in any mode is applied through the paperwork on the light plot in the console patch on reports and on screen in every view This chapter contains the following sections e Emphasis Options 0 cece 6 e System Components cece eee 7 Installation Guidelines 0 cece 9 e System Procedures 0000 cence neces 16 e Troubleshooting 0 0 ccc cece es 1
301. r to dedicated RFU connectors that may be distributed throughout your venue Install the RFU Step 1 Verify that RFU power switch is turned off Unit is off when switch is in the position toward the top edge of the RFU Step 2 Insert the RFU cable into the connector on the back of the facepanel labeled RFU RFUs may also be connected to ETCNet2 Nodes Step 3 Turn RFU on Step 4 After the RFU completes booting use the keypad to perform functions as you would on the Facepanel Use the S to access softkeys and the M7 key to access macros Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Radio Remote Focus Unit RRFU 7 The Radio Remote Focus Unit RRFU provides a L simple wireless solution for remote control This small handheld transmitter unit provides access to frequently used commands for dimmer and channel checks as P Q9 eo Fue well as macro and record functions An RRFU can be connected to the back of your Facepanel or to a Video Node or to dedicated RFU connectors that may be distributed throughout your system See the Radio Remote Focus Unit Setup Guide for operational instructions on the RRFU Wireless Remote Focus Unit WRFU 6 THRU SUB GRP CUE REC DIM CHAN M ABCLR BACK ABGO AT o FULL ENTER Mt M M A Wireless Remote Focus Unit WRFU is a combination of the WRFU software application running on a Pocket PC compatible handheld
302. ram change 1 127 Controller change 70 parameters 0 127 Controller change 71 parameters 0 127 Controller change 72 parameters 0 127 Controller change 73 parameters O 127 Controller change 74 parameters 0 127 Controller change 75 parameters 0 127 Controller change 76 parameters 0 103 Cue execution in CD fader pair Next cue Cues 1 127 Cues 128 255 Cues 256 383 Controller change 77 parameter 0 Controller change 77 parameters 1 127 Controller change 78 parameters 0 127 Controller change 79 parameters 0 127 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Cues 384 511 Cues 512 639 Cues 640 767 Cues 768 895 Cues 896 999 Macro execution Macros 1 127 Macros 128 255 Macros 256 383 Macros 384 511 Macros 768 895 Level change wheel Controller change 80 parameters 0 127 Controller change 81 parameters 0 127 Controller change 82 parameters 0 127 Controller change 83 parameters 0 127 Controller change 84 parameters 0 103 Controller change 85 parameters 1 127 Controller change 86 parameters 0 127 Controller change 87 parameters 0 127 Controller change 88 parameters 0 127 Macros 512 639 Macros 640 767 Controller change 89 parameters 0 127 Controller change 90 parameters 0 127 Controller change 91 parameters 0 127 Macros 896 999 Controller change 92 parameters 0 103
303. rded message will flash on screen to indicate that changes have been made but not recorded Also a blinking asterisk will appear next to the effect number that has been modified but not recorded If desired record the new size and or rate levels to the dynamic effect cue s or submaster s Press n Enter where n is the effect you want to record Press Record lt x gt Enter where lt x gt is the cue or submaster number to record the adjusted dynamic effect If you are recording the adjusted dynamic effect back to its original source cue or submaster you do not need to re enter the number Modify size and or rate of running dynamic effect cue using Rate Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Press Rate on the fader pair currently running the dynamic effect cue The size of the selected effect is placed on the Y Level wheel or the right half of the trackpad on your Facepanel Rate is placed on the X Rate wheel or the left half of the trackpad Move the wheels or slide your finger up and down the appropriate side of the trackpad to adjust the size and rate of the selected effect s The DE Not Recorded message will flash on screen to indicate that changes have been made but not recorded Also in the Dynamic Effects Status display a blinking asterisk will appear next to the effect number that has been modified but not recorded Press S8 Dynamic Effects to view the Dynamic Effects S
304. re indicated as references to the softkey page s on which they occur see Softkeys page 39 Use this list if you are unsure where to find a function of the facepanel Please use foldout I Command Keypad Overview page 301 as a guide to the locations of the hard keys Facepanel Keys Function Expression Insight Express Stage Display Keys Display Keys Display Keys Display Keys Display Keys Stage 3 Available as Cue Sheet Sub Sheet Group Sheet and Focus Sheet in Stage 4 Blind Cue Cue Spread Sheet 2 Blind Cue Part Blind Spread Display Keys Group Group Spread Sheet 2 Blind Focus Sheet Point Focus Spread Sheet 2 Blind Submaster BSub SSS2 Blind Cue Effect BCE Blind Sub Effect BSE Blind Cue Subroutine BCS Fader 4 Facepanel Keys Function Expression Insight Express Macro Keys Macro Keys hz are Keys nae Rey ma Macro Keys Maero Keys ooo Facepanel Keys Function Expression Insight Express Swap Cluster A Not Available Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Facepanel Keys Function Expression Insight Express y Navigation Keys Navigation Keys Navigation Keys Navigation Keys Facepanel Keys po Expression Insight Express Softkeys oo foot setis ss Sotkes sores Facepanel Keys Function Expression Insight Express Page Cluster B Cluster B Cluster B Cluster B Cluster B Cluster B Load Sub Cluster B Stage
305. recorded into cues The Setup display is where you can edit the system settings and access other Console functions Expand places the Stage Command display across both monitors to double the visible channels MACRO KEYS are used to program macro functions and start macros Macro keys M1 M5 M3 on Express facepanels access the first few macros directly M allows you to specify any one of the 2 000 macros available and must be followed by a number Macro Wait and Macro Enter are used when programming macros A macro is a recorded series of keystrokes to be replayed later Macros can execute any console command including softkeys and submaster bumps and be linked to cues CLUSTER A The Swap key Expression Insight only allows you to swap displays between the Command and Playback monitors Press it again to swap back The About key opens a window containing information about a channel dimmer or the show according to which key you press after pressing About For example About Channel 3 Enter will display information about channel 3 The Learn key enables you to record keystrokes live into macros as an alternative to using editing screens The Help key provides context sensitive assistance online Press Help followed by a second key including softkeys to open a window explaining the function of the second key The Enter Macro key found here on Express facepanels is used in macro editing SOFTKEYS are found in man
306. res of this facepanel type see foldout C nsight Facepanel Overview page 295 The Emphasis Visualization virtual console emulates all facepanel controls for this facepanel type Setting the Facepanel Type on the Server You will need to tell your Emphasis Server what kind of Facepanel you are using The Server defaults to Expression 3 This setting determines the Emphasis Console displays that are available Set the Facepanel type in Emphasis Visualization Step 1 Turn on your Emphasis Control System Allow it to finish its startup before proceeding to the next step Step 2 Click the Emphasis mode button at the top of the Emphasis Visualization screen Step 3 In the Setup menu click Facepanel Type The Facepanel Type dialog box opens 22 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Facepanel Type e si gs o o 2 a i Step 4 Click the name of your Facepanel type to set it as current Step 5 Exit Emphasis This will return you to the login screen Step 6 Click the Emphasis user button at the top of the list This will restart Emphasis with the new Facepanel type Emphasis Console User Interface 23 24 Accessories Along with your Emphasis Facepanel you may have additional accessories in your system Remote Focus Unit RFU A Remote Focus Unit RFU is used to select channels set levels record and playback cues and playback macros An RFU can be connected to the back of your Facepanel or to a Video Node o
307. ro 1234 immediately macro m m1234 stopping the current macro and flushing the macro queue This adds macro 5 to Ug a ki que the macro queue This runs cue 999 9 This is the same as runcueab rga rq It s just here for symmetry runcueed This runs a cue on the CD fader This runs the cue on blockcue the AB fader asa blocking cue This is the same as blockcueab bq It s just here for symmetry This runs the cue on blockcuecd bqc the CD fader as a blocking cue This captures relchan rc rc 5 Thig releases channel 5 This parks a channel This parks a dimmer em fe p mr Only works in stage update m a EN Control Interfaces 231 232 Keyword Abbreviation Arguments Example Comments This is the Fixture fixture softkey Enable the time timecodeenable code internal clock timecodedisable tcd Disable the time code internal clock backoverride Q Background override cue operation ETCLink This plays backup look 5 To playbackup pb 5 stop the current backup look play backup look 0 ETCLink This recbackup rb records backup looks ETCLink This sets setdim a dimmer ETCLink This unsetdim ee a dimmer Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Appendix A System Defaults The defaults listed in this section refer to the factory settings of the Emphasis Visualization and Console software applications While it is not necessary for these setting
308. rofile governs the output level of DMX in relation to the channel level Profiles are often used to match dimmers with different dimming curves compensating for any mismatches in dimmer output by adjusting the DMX level Profiles can also be used to preheat lamps warming the filaments can extend lamp life or speed the time to full output on lamps that are bumped to full System Settings 77 78 Profil 4 Profile 1 IES Square Law omplete 0 a Comp Intensity 0 m wil 0 E NT 30 40 SO 60 70 80 0 10 20 390 100 4 Fade Completion 54 S2 S3 S4 5 S6 S s8 Ez pm aru EA PA E Perot ite E You can assign any dimmer patched to an 8 bit channel a proportional patch level and a profile In that case the proportional level is calculated first then the profile is applied to determine the DMX output for that dimmer There are 33 available profiles Profile O is the default profile linear and is not editable The remaining 32 profiles are editable with profiles 1 9 given default non linear curves and 10 32 left at linear for editing You can view and edit profiles in the Profile display in the Setup menu View available profiles Step 1 Step 2 On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis Visualization press Setup 1 0 Enter to access the Profiles display Press lt S1 Select Profile gt x Enter where x corresponds to the profile you want to view O Linear Default not edi
309. ros Express Facepanels have access to four Remote Macros Expression Insight Facepanels have access to eight Remote Macros Expression Insight Lighting Playback Controller units have access to 32 Remote Macros For wiring diagrams see Using Remote Macros page 257 You can adjust the settings for each Remote Macro independently You can assign a system ID and a macro number to each Remote Macro This way you can have an individual remote macro panel execute macros across multiple Emphasis Control Systems on the ETCNet2 network If you assign Remote Macros in excess of the number available to your hardware they will be ignored EN Control Interfaces 205 206 To set the Remote Macro assignments Step 1 Power up or reboot the Facepanel Step 2 When the prompt appears at startup press 1 2 3 to enter the configuration menu Step 3 Using the down arrow y key scroll to Remote Macros and press Enter Step 4 Using the up or down arrow y keys scroll to the Remote Macro System ID you want to adjust and press Enter Step 5 Enter the new system ID and press Enter Step 6 Using the up or down arrow f keys scroll to the Remote Macro Macro ID you want to adjust and press Enter Step 7 Enter the new macro ID and press Enter Step 8 Press S8 to save your settings and exit the Remote Macros configuration Screen Step 9 Press S8 to save your settings and exit the main configuration screen Remot
310. ros An RFU can be connected to the back of your Facepanel or to a Video Node or RFU Enabled DMX Node or to dedicated RFU connectors that may be distributed throughout your venue Install the RFU Step 1 Verify that RFU power switch is turned Off Unit is off when switch is in the position toward the bottom edge of the RFU Step2 Insert the RFU cable into the connector on the back of the facepanel labeled RFU RFUs may also be connected to ETCNet2 Nodes Step 3 Turn RFU power switch to On RFU pinout 2 XLR 6 pin baba Data or from RFU Common AC ground 12 Vdc fused 2 amp E Maintenance and Troubleshooting 253 Connecting MIDI Connect the facepanel to any MIDI equipment using a standard MIDI cable On the rear panel there are three round 5 pin DIN type connectors labeled MIDI In MIDI Out and Keyboard Expression Insight only or MIDI Thru Express only Turn facepanel power off then connect the cable from the MIDI Out of the electronic instrument or sequencer to the MIDI In on the facepanel Connect the cable from the MIDI In on the instrument or sequencer to the connector labeled MIDI Out AN CAUTION On Expression Insight facepanels do not plug the MIDI cable into the connector labeled Keyboard This connector is for use with an optional alphanumeric keyboard and may damage MIDI equipment If needed you can set the MIDI Out connector on an Expression or Insight facepanel as a MIDI Thru port
311. round fades If your show contains LTP channels see LTP page 47 you may see channels fading in the background If an LTP channel has the same level in a series of cues and the first cue of the series is not allowed to complete before you play back subsequent cues the channel will complete its fade in the background in the fade time of the first cue Channels levels fading in the background are displayed in purple You can view cues running in the background using the Fader display Clear background fades Step 1 Press S3 Backgrnd Overrides to view the Background Overrides display Cue Humber Operation 1 E 5 A Wheel Step 2 Press x Enter where x is the cue number you want to clear out of the background To clear all background levels enter 0 Step 3 Press 1 Enter to clear the selected cue s levels from the background 2 Enter to cancel the fade of the selected cue This will stop the selected cue at its current fade level and keep the channels in the background 3 Enter to finish the selected cues fade immediately and keep the channels in the background 4 Enter to place the selected cue on the X wheel or trackpad for manual control of the fade 5 Enter to adjust the selected cue s fade rate using the X wheel or the trackpad Clear Clear on the numerical keypad to cancel the window To quickly clear all background channels press S3 Backgrnd Overrides
312. s The System Settings menu allows you to customize your working environment mb SCWUONTMAWN 11 b mh mh mh UA UN ran 03 56 PM Number of Dimmers Number of Channels Default Fade Time Default Level Default Fader Clear Time Default Sneak Time Number of Effect Step Channels Blackout Key F lex i channe l Master Type Set Channe ls Submasters 1 to 1 Bump Keys Record Lockout Move Before Bright Move Before Bright Times 5000 2500 Up 5 Down 5 Full 0 5 1000 Enob led Disobled Grandmas ter Enob led Disabled Enob led Delay O Fade 5 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual A Number of Dimmers The Number of Dimmers setting adjusts the number of EDMX addresses you can patch to In the Emphasis Control System all patching is made to EDMX addresses called dimmers within the patch at the facepanel which are converted to standard DMX at the output connector see DMX Output page 204 All Emphasis Control Systems can access all 32 767 EDMX addresses if required However this is usually more addresses than are required for a typical show Your system will default to a setting of twice the number of dimmers as there are channels unless you are running a 5 000 channel system where the dimmer count will default to the maximum of 32 767 CAUTION f after a show is patched you reduce the number of dimmers below the number you have patched those dimmers will become unpatched Restorin
313. s have my validation code You have 15 days to use the system prior to registering however it is recommended that you register your system as soon as possible After 15 days have passed you will not be able to use Emphasis Visualization until you enter the registration code You may register your Emphasis Control System by phone fax or email To register by phone Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 System Overview Power up the Emphasis Server If the system is unregistered the Registration dialog should open You can also open the Registration dialog using the Help menu Registration command In the Register dialog click the Phone button Please call any one of phone numbers below with your Registration Request Code While you are on the phone you will be given a 10 digit Registration Validation Code Simply enter this in the space provided and click the Register button 888 908 2299 Americas 44 0 20 8896 1000 Europe 852 2799 1220 Asia Serial Code for your reference DAXBXEWT Registration Request Code YMEBDB3C3 Registration Validation Code Example GEGHX6YNMX en Call ETC at one of the given phone numbers and speak to a Customer Service Representative You will need to provide them with the Registration Request Code and your contact details They will provide you with a Registration Validation Code to enter in the dialog Enter the Registration Validation C
314. s Lamps Symbols CAD conventions Missing Coordinate XYZ command line Relative amp Absolute values Ortho Snap Cursor Origin Undo Redo Repeat last command Group Ungroup Move Rotate Focus Mirror Import from dwg dxf Interactive amp specified object drawing Dimension amp Distance tools Layers amp Scenes Extrude Break Convert Divide Fillet Array Drawing tools Riser Sphere Column Pipe Line Circle Arc Text Label Surface Extruded Surface Focus Position Camera Venue Black Box Proscenium Arch Arena Specified and interactive object creation Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Fixture property tools Patch Accessories Point of View Shutter Barn Door Barrel Rotate Emphasis 3D only e Fixture photometrics e Quick Tools Spot Unit Purpose Focus Channel Patch Dimmer Circuit Colour Gobo e Shortcut tools Col Gobo Fixture Truss Accessories Library Navigation Views Concepts Palettes Object property tools Translucency Light Emitting Surface Textures Materials Legs amp Borders Focus Position with Link to Focus Point Position Manager Data Features e Patch Fixture layer indication Fixture control status EDMX Graphic selection Drag and drop patching Spreadsheet data entry amp edit Error checking amp reporting Data filter e Configurable spreadsheets Fully interactive with all data entry in system e Dynamically updated
315. s submasters groups or focus points in Stage Fader or Blind E changes to channel levels or effects are not recorded until you press Record Enter Blind Editing 159 160 Group List The Group List displays the number and label of each recorded group Use the Group List to quickly find available group numbers or to label groups individually or in ranges You can also delete groups within the Group List display Group 02 04 PM Label Group Full 3 100 Full Full Full Full Full Full Full Full Full Full Full Full Full Full Full Full Full Se FX FX FX FX FX FX FX FX FX FX FX FA FX FX FX FX FX FX 51 52 53 E S5 Sb 57 s8 NEN ee E E RENI I Edit group labels within the Group List display Step 1 Press Blind The Blind display defaults to cues Step 2 Press Group Enter to view groups in Blind Step 3 Press S2 Group List to display the Group List Step 4 Press x Enter to select group x You can also use And Thru and Except to select multiple groups You may also use the down and up arrow and keys to scroll through the Group List Step 5 Press Label and type in the label you want to apply to the selected group s Alternatively you can press the right and left arrow gt and keys to move through the Group List columns Note Label can be found on lt S7 More Softkeys gt S2 Label on Express facepanels Delete groups within the
316. s are used when you are using your Emphasis Control System with MIDI time code or real time programs See Show Control Overview page 209 and Real Time Programs page 192 for information on these settings System Settings 55 Clock Functions Emphasis has an astronomical time clock that can be used along with real time programs see Real Time Programs page 192 to run lighting cues at specific times of day or at an offset from sunrise or sunset For information on setting the clock functions see Setting the time and location page 192 If you need to set the time and date for your entire system you will need to change the clock settings on your Emphasis Server AN CAUTION Due to an ETCNet2 issue Windows Date andTime and Time Zone settings can lose synchronization across mutiple servers sharing an ETCNet2 network To avoid this in a Backup System set all servers to the Central US GMT 6 00 Time Zone see Clock Functions page 56 You may set the actual time and date regularly This solution may slightly affect Astronomical Time Clock functionality Set the time and date on the Emphasis Server Step 1 Turn on your Emphasis Control System Allow it to finish its startup before proceeding to the next step Step 2 Exit Emphasis Visualization When complete the login screen will be displayed Step 3 Login as the System Manager Step 4 Right click the clock at the right end of the Windows task bar and click Adjust Time
317. s need to be to have a valid network setup There are 22 discreet priority settings within EDMX The lowest number will always be the highest priority e Unison with a zone s Input Mode set to Replace is equal to priority zero 0 DMX Node input ports and Emphasis have a modifiable priority of 1 through 20 Unison with a zone s Input Mode set to Pass thru if Active is equal to priority 21 All devices ETCNet2 nodes Emphasis components and so on must have unique IP addresses on the network Emphasis and Obsession ll systems must have unique System IDs on the network This only applies if you have multiple control systems on the same network ETCNet2 nodes don t have System IDs they are considered to have an ID of zero 0 e Zero is lower than one Arbitration Who has control The following points describe who wins e The lowest priority value has the highest priority 1 has a higher priority than 2 If multiple devices have the same priority control is determined by Highest Takes Precedence at the channel level Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual e If two input ports on a ETCNet2 DMX Node are set to the same range and the same priority the lowest numbered port has the highest priority Two input ports on the same node will not HTP ETCNet2 v4 EDMX Source Priority Resolution EDMX EDMX axe Priorig f 1 EDMX Stream 32767 NG Ya Nag The value Unison Replace Mode 0
318. s offers a feature called Dimmer Check that allows you to step sequentially through your dimmers EDMX addresses setting the current dimmer to the level of your choice If you want to do this on a channel level rather than on the EDMX level you have a number of choices described below Use Dimmer Check Step 1 Press S7 More Softkeys gt S3 Dim x where x is the first dimmer you want to check Step 2 Press At y Enter where y is the level you want the dimmers to go to The dimmer will unpatch itself temporarily and output the level you set Step 3 Press to move to the next dimmer or to move to the previous dimmer As you press or each dimmer will temporarily unpatch itself and output the level you set in step 2 Step 4 When you are done checking dimmers press any key other than or to release the last dimmer Note Only one dimmer can be checked at a time using the Dimmer Check feature Dimmer check tests all dimmers regardless of patch Channel check using the keypad Step 1 Press Channel x Full where x is the first channel you want to check Step 2 Press At 0 0 Full to set the first channel to zero output and the next channel to full Step 3 Repeat step 2 until all channels have been checked Step 4 Press Release to release the captured channels You may need to press Release multiple times depending on your channel attribute settings Note T
319. s the fade time stored with the cue Press right arrow gt key to set the Downfade time This can be fixed dynamic or manual Type a time value or press Clear to set dynamic or manual fade 147 148 time The dynamic fade time displayed in purple follows the fade time stored with the cue Step 11 Press right arrow gt key to set the Follow time This can be fixed dynamic or manual Type a time value or press Clear to set dynamic fade time or Hold Hold takes the place of a Hold for Go command see below Step 12 Press the down arrow key to move to the next step Repeat steps 5 through 12 for each step in the subroutine that contains cue information Step 13 Press Record Enter to record the submaster You can also press Record and a submaster bump button to record the subroutine to another submaster To add a subroutine style to a step Step 1 Select the step you want to modify and press S8 Style Use And and Thru to select multiple steps Step 2 Press 1 Enter for Loop to Step and enter the step number to loop to and the number of loops you want the subroutine to perform The Loop to Step style is typically entered in the last step of a subroutine 2 Enter for Bounce and enter the number of bounces you want the subroutine to perform The Bounce style is typically entered in the last step of a subroutine unless a Subroutine Fade step is also in the subroutine In that case
320. s to remain at their default values you may want to return to these settings if your system performance changes unfavorably This appendix contains the following sections e Emphasis Visualization and Console Defaults 234 e Expression Facepanel Defaults 238 e Express Facepanel Defaults 240 System Defaults 233 234 Emphasis Visualization and Console Defaults The following can be set from either Emphasis Visualization or Emphasis Console In Emphasis Visualization these are set in the Emphasis mode Setup menu In Emphasis Console these are found in the main window Options menu View the Emphasis Console Main window Step 1 Minimize Emphasis Visualization Step 2 Move the mouse to the bottom of the screen so the Windows task bar appears Step 3 Maximize Emphasis Console in the task bar Facepanel Type Imagine 3 with ML Module _ Focus with ML Module B Expression 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee Checked Facepanel Type x ression with Emphasis xpression 3 i xpression 2x with ML Module Insight with Emphasis C orlnsight 3 mag i ne 3 or Insight 2x with ML Module Focus Y C Expression 2x or Concept 2x Insight 2x C Express 125 or 250 C Express 72 144 C Express 48 96 C Express 24 48 You must exit and restart Emphasis Control System for the change to take effect Coca Note Tochange the Facepanel type click the
321. sis Console to Emphasis Visualization where they are executed If Emphasis Visualization is not running and connected these will not work Wheel deltas are not designed to be anything specific You get what you get There is very little error checking If you misspell something the system may get confused however it should not crash Insome cases the echoed string can be longer than the input string If the input string is coming in at full bandwidth there might not be enough bandwidth for the echoed stream Make sure you understand when you can and can t use and for levels The Keyword Table In most cases there are two forms of each keyword One is spelled out for readability and the other is a short abbreviation Either form can be used Case is ignored No space is required between a keyword and its arguments Keyword Abbreviation Arguments Example Comments stage st st b pl o JB fade ik L L Wacsheet is a 1 This does not patch patch anything it just hits the patch button This does not park park pk anything it just hits the park button sup s LLL exeni e S S SSS marsa ms _ macowat mw O S SSS maroner me O d id pU Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Keyword Abbreviation Arguments Example Comments swap sw etano PA fuparow fa owanw da lp
322. sis Control System please refer to your manuals for additional information If you do not find the answer in a manual please call your local dealer or ETC Technical Services see Help from ETC Technical Services page 3 Please have the following information available before you call Console model and serial number located on back panel e Emphasis Server serial number located inside the door on the front of the Server case e Software version see below Dimmer manufacturer and installation type Moving light information manufacturer mode data cable type e Other components in your system Unison other consoles etc How do find the software version Emphasis is actually a suite of software all with different version numbers In general all you need to provide to Technical Services is the suite version number To find the Emphasis Control System suite version number Step 1 Step 2 In the Emphasis Visualization Help menu click About Emphasis The About dialog box will open Find the Emphasis Visualization Version number at the top of the dialog box The suite version number is indicated in parentheses at the end of the full version number To find the suite version number outside Emphasis Visualization Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Minimize Emphasis Visualization and right click on Start menu on task bar and click Explore Alternatively you can press 4 E to launch Windows Explorer at any tim
323. sm to hold the top panel open Spare parts kit The spare parts kit inside Expression ECS and Insight ECS facepanels contains the following Expression Insight ECS Facepanel Software disk Expression Insight v3 1 Console Software disk Remote Units v3 1 Software disk Key for A B switch Two 6 3A fuses AC Input One 2 5A fuse RFU E Maintenance and Troubleshooting 245 246 Replacing fuses Expression and Insight facepanels have three fuses Two are for AC input power and the third is for the interface used by optional RFU and remote I O devices If the facepanel or remote devices connected to it fail first verify that power is available at the AC service outlet and that all cables are properly connected and undamaged Express facepanels only have an External 12 Vdc fuse This fuse is for the desk lights the RFU and any remote macro controller attached to the facepanel Always replace fuses with the same type of fuse The AC Input fuses are type T6 3A The fuse protecting the RFU Remote l O circuits is type F1 6A Express or T2 5A Expression Insight Both types are slow action 250V fuses Replacement fuses of both types are provided in the facepanel s Spare Parts Kit which is located beneath the face panel Replace AC Input fuses Expression Insight only Note These fuses are contained in a swiveling tray located between the power switch and the power cord connector Step 1 Turn off the facepanel and discon
324. ssociated fixture is automatically shown for reference in this column Frame Table You can assign frame tables to accessory channels to speed programming Use S7 More Softkeys gt S3 Frame Table to edit this setting for for selected accessory channels See Frame Table List page 69 e Channel Label You can assign labels to channels if you wish Use Label and the alphanumeric keyboard to edit this setting for selected channels When complete press Enter Note Label can be found on S7 More Softkeys gt S2 Label on Express facepanels 11 02 AM Ind Flip 16b LTP Attrib Intens Frame Type Chan Table Blue Wash Edit channel attributes Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Profiles On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis Visualization press Setup 9 Enter to access the Channel Attributes display Select a channel by typing the channel number on the numeric keypad or by scrolling through the channel list using the arrow keys Select channel ranges using the numeric keypad and the And Thru and Except keys Press the softkey that corresponds to the attribute you want to change or use the right and left arrow gt and keys to scroll to the attribute s column Following the prompt above the softkeys press 1 to enable or 0 to disable the attribute you ve chosen For Frame Table when the Frame Table List window appears select the
325. st of commands Macros 185 186 Edit an existing macro in the Macro Editing display Step 1 Step 2 Press Setup 6 Enter to display the Macro List Type the macro number on the numeric keypad and press Enter Note You can also select macros for viewing and editing using the mouse in Emphasis Visualization Simply click the macro number or label in the Console Screens Console or Monitor layout You can also click the command to be edited Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Press S1 Edit Macro to access the Macro Editing display If there are commands in the macro already the first command is highlighted in yellow Press facepanel keys to insert commands before the selected yellow command To select a command to edit press Right arrow gt to move forward through the recorded commands one by one Left arrow to move backward through the recorded commands one by one Down arrow 4 to move forward through the recorded commands in ten command increments If there are less than ten commands this jumps to the end of the list e Up arrow f to move backward through the recorded commands in ten command increments If there are less than ten commands this jumps to the beginning of the list Press Facepanel keys or use the Key List to insert commands before the selected yellow command S2 Replace to replace the selected command with a new co
326. stage you would like channels 1 5 to fade out as he crosses from stage left to stage right You do not want the channels to fade out together you would rather have each channel fade out as the actor leaves the area that channel is lighting You can accomplish this either by writing five cues one for each light and playing back each cue manually or with follow times or you can write this transition as apart cue The advantage of a part cue is that it is stored as a single cue number in the cue list Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual You can create part cues from scratch or you can convert an existing cue into a part cue See Multi Part cues page 136 for information on editing cues in Blind Note Partis found on S7 More Softkeys gt S1 Part in Stage on Express facepanels Write a part cue Step 1 Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels Dimmers and Fixtures page 86 Step 2 Set levels using the procedure described in Set Levels page 89 and Moving Light Control page 95 Step 3 Press Record Cue x Part y Enter to record captured channels into part y of cue x you do not have to start with part 1 you can record parts in any order Step 4 If you want to change the fade times for the part press Time x Enter y Enter where x is the upfade time and lt y gt is the downfade time if different from the upfade time for the part Step 5 Press Wait x En
327. t S8 Step to select the step you want to record Move Before Bright MBB Move Before Bright MBB automates the process of presetting a fixture to its position prior to fading up With MBB enabled Emphasis will look ahead one cue and move any fixtures at zero intensity to their new position in a given delay and fade time This feature can be enabled and disabled globally or disabled by cue Also new shows created in v1 7 1 and beyond will default to MBB enabled Shows opened in v1 7 1 and beyond but created in previous versions of Emphasis will default to MBB disabled To use MBB you will need to understand a few terms EN Live Editing Dark cue the cue before a bright cue in which the fixtures to be moved are at zero intensity MBB will move the dark fixtures into place after the completion ofthe current cue plus the MBB delay time Bright cue the cue after a dark cue in which the fixtures fade up Moving MBB presets channels that change level or move between the dark cue and the bright cue Channels that are at the same level but are provided their level by different focus points in the two cues are also considered to be moving MBB Delay Set in System Settings the MBB Delay adds time between the completion of the dark cue and the start of the MBB move The default delay time is 0 MBB Fade Set in System Settings the MBB Fade sets the duration of the MBB move The default fad
328. t both Upfade waits are indicated by an up arrow 1 beside the wait time and downfade waits are indicated by a down arrow y Assign wait time to a cue Step 1 Record the cue see Record Cues page 1 13 or press Cue x where x is the cue number you want to select Step 2 Press Wait x Enter where x is the upfade wait time To enter a downfade wait time press Wait Wait x Enter where x is the downfade wait time Step 3 Press Enter Clear a wait time Step 1 Press Cue x where x is the cue number containing the wait time Step 2 Press Wait Clear This removes the wait time EN Live Editing 125 Follow Follow timing is used to trigger cues automatically or to delay the activation of submasters and macros linked to cues When a follow time is attached to a cue with no linked submaster or macro the next cue or a linked cue will automatically play back when the follow time completes Follow times start their countdown from the moment you press Go When a follow time is attached to a cue with a linked submaster or macro the activation of the submaster or macro is delayed until the follow time completes Assign follow time to a cue Step 1 Record the cue see Record Cues page 113 or press Cue x where x is the cue number you want to select Step 2 Press Follow x Enter where x is the follow time Clear a follow time Step 1 Press Cue x where x is the cue nu
329. t cues Selective cue recording Update cue command Attribute range editing Subroutines with cue style or macro steps Spreadsheet editing Cue list Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Group functions Up to 500 groups Any cue or submaster may be accessed as a group e Group labels e Spreadsheet editing e Group list Focus point functions Up to 255 focus points Update cues and submasters when focus point changes Record level of focus point without link Available in effects Printout available e Spreadsheet editing e Focus point list Macro functions Macro List Up to 2 000 macros with 1 000 steps each Macros may activate any key except Enter Macro Live Learn mode e Macro view and macro editing modes Macro wait times are programmable Caninclude in real time programs Caninclude in time code events Fight macros operated by remote switches e Startup macro Remote Trigger function through ETCNet2 Video Node Effects functions Effects may be recorded as cues or submasters e Up to 100 steps each Live effects recording e Spreadsheet editing e 8 bit and 16 bit data types Variability of rate during playback Step times e In Dwell Out Step fade times e High Low Levels In Dwell Out Effect fade times Range editing of effect attributes and step values E Specifications 283 284 Profile functions Profiles may be assigned to dimmers Ten preset profi
330. table 6 Full at 1 1 IES Square Law e 7 Preheat at 5 2 Slow Bottom e 8 Preheat at 10 3 Fast Bottom 9 Hot Patch 4 Slow Top e 10 32 Linear 5 Fast Top Assign a profile to a dimmer Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis Visualization press Patch to view the Patch display Press lt S7 More Softkeys gt lt S1 Dim gt x where x is the dimmer number to select the dimmer You can use And Thru and Except to select ranges of dimmers Press S2 Profile y Enter where y is the profile number you want to assign Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Chan 4 Dimmer Proport ion Prof ile 50 4 25 51 52 53 s4 S5 S56 S 58 pum EH rera uum Edit a dimmer profile Step 1 On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis Visualization press Setup 1 0 Enter to access the Profiles display Step 2 Press S1 Select Profiles x Enter where x corresponds to the profile you want to edit Note Youcan copy another profile to the desired destination and edit from that if you wish Select the profile you want to copy then press S6 Copy to Profile x Enter where x is the destination profile s number Step 3 Use the following methods to edit the profile Press S2 Percent x At y Enter where x is the percentage of fade completion and y is the desired output percen
331. tage You can also use the up down arrows to set the level and the left right arrows to select percentages Press S2 Percent x S4 Clear to End to set all percentages above the selected one to undefined output Press S5 Fill Between Enter to have Emphasis calculate output levels for undefined completion percentages Emphasis will calculate an even transition between set output levels for any undefined levels within the profile You must have some set levels within the profile before you press S5 for this to have any effect Press S7 Reset Profile to return the profile to its default settings You can label your profile up to 16 characters The name will appear in the upper left corner of the profile display and on the profile printed report Press Label or S7 More Softkeys gt S2 Label type in the label on the alphanumeric keyboard and press Enter Step 4 Repeat step 4 until all adjustments have been made System Settings 79 Label Dimmers You have the option to label dimmers using the Label key On any facepanel you can show or hide labels using S6 Show Hide Labels in the Patch display Note Label can be found on S7 More Softkeys gt S2 Label on Express facepanels Label dimmers Step 1 On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis Visualization press Patch to access the Patch display Step 2 Press S7 More Softkeys gt S1 Dim x
332. tatus display Press n Enter where n is the effect number to view the adjusted dynamic effect Press Record Enter to record the adjustments back into the source cue Note You can also record the dynamic effect to a different cue number or to a submaster Modify size and or rate of a dynamic effect submaster using S5 Rate Step 1 Press Sub n lt S7 More Softkeys gt S5 Rate where n is the submaster number containing the dynamic effect The size of the selected effect is placed Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 on the Y Level wheel or the right half of the trackpad on your Facepanel Rate is placed on the X Rate wheel or the left half of the trackpad Move the wheels or slide your finger up and down the appropriate side of the trackpad to adjust the size and rate of the selected effect s The DE Not Recorded message will flash on screen to indicate that changes have been made but not recorded Also in the Dynamic Effects Status display a blinking asterisk will appear next to the effect number that has been modified but not recorded Press S8 Dynamic Effects to view the Dynamic Effects Status display Press n Enter where n is the effect number to view the adjusted dynamic effect Press Record Enter to record the adjustments back into the source submaster Note Youcan also record the dynamic effect to a di
333. tep 1 Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels Dimmers and Fixtures page 86 Step 2 Set levels using the procedure described in Set Levels page 89 Only channels with levels are recorded into groups Step 3 Press Record Group x Enter where x is the group number Recall a group Press Group x Full where x is the group number to recall the group as it was recorded Press Group x At y where x is the group number and y is a level to recall the group at a proportional level For example you recorded the channels in group 1 at full When you recall Group 1 At 7 5 all the channels in group 1 will be set to 75 If the channels were recorded into group 1 at 80 that same syntax would set the group 1 channels to 60 75 of 80 Recall groups using Only Step 1 Press Group x to select the first group You can use And and Thru to select multiple groups Step 2 Press Only Group y to select only the channels that are common to groups x and y Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Park Parked channels and dimmers are set to a level that they will maintain regardless of manual control cue or submaster playback Parked levels are not recorded into cues groups or submasters and are independent of most other instructions with the following exception Blackout affects parked dependent channels Independent channels are not affected by Blac
334. tep 4 Set levels using the procedure described in Set Levels page 89 and Moving Light Control page 95 Not Recorded will blink in the lower left corner of the channel area Step 5 Press Record lt Cue gt lt x gt Enter where x is the target cue number Note When you edit cues submasters groups or focus points in Stage Fader or Blind changes to channel levels or effects are not recorded until you press Record Enter Changes to overall cue or submaster timing do not require Record Enter Multi P art cues In Blind you can view a multi part cue as a whole or by part When viewing individual parts other channels recorded in the cue are displayed with grey levels A channel may only be recorded into one part of a multi part cue Edit multi part cues in Blind Step 1 Press Blind The Blind display defaults to cues Step 2 Press x Enter to select cue x You can also use the and keys to increment and decrement through the cue list The whole cue will be displayed until you select a specific part to view or edit Step 3 Press Part y to select part y You can also use the and keys to increment and decrement through the parts Step 4 Select channels using the procedure described in Select Channels Dimmers and Fixtures page 86 Step 5 Set levels using the procedure described in Set Levels page 89 and Moving Light Control page 95 Not Recorded will blink in the lower
335. ter where x is the desired wait time Wait time on a part delays the start of the part counting from the Go press Do not enter wait times if you want all parts to play with the Go press Step 6 Repeat steps 1 3 until you have recorded all the parts you need in this cue You do not need to continue to enter the cue number just the part number for each subsequent part Submasters Submasters can be played back manually using the fader or they can be played back using the submaster bump button The bump button defaults to a flash function but can be used to fade a submaster in and out using recorded timing Timing set at the submaster level governs the fade up duration and fade down of the whole submaster including static submasters and effect submasters Subroutines on submasters have different timing rules see Subroutines on Submasters Subs on Subs page 146 Submasters may have an up time dwell time and a down time recorded Up timing determines the upfade of the submaster when activated using the bump button Down timing determines the time it takes for the recorded channels to fade out Dwell timing determines how long the submaster will stay at full before fading out Dwell can be set to manual which means the submaster will fade up in the in time and stay active as long as you are pressing the bump button Dwell can also be set to hold which means the submaster will activate when you press and release the bump button f
336. ter fader can be set to one of three options e Disabled Master fader has no effect e Grandmaster The default setting the master fader controls all levels on stage except parked and independent channels e Sub Grandmaster Master fader controls all levels on stage generated by submasters Set the Master type Step 1 On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis Visualization press Setup 1 Enter to display the Systems Settings menu Step2 Press 1 0 Enter to choose Master Type Step 3 Press 0 Enter to disable the Grandmaster or 1 Enter for Grandmaster or 2 Enter for Sub Grandmaster Set Channels Submasters 1 to 1 You can set any or all pages of submasters to automatically record a one to one relationship with your channels This means you can automatically record channel 1 to submaster 1 channel 2 to submaster 2 and so on Each channel records at full allowing you to emulate channel faders on consoles without that ability Set channels submasters 1 to 1 Step 1 On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis Visualization press Setup 1 Enter to display the Systems Settings menu Step 2 Press 1 1 Enter to choose Set Channels Submasters 1 to 1 Step 3 Press 0 Enter to set all submaster pages 1 to 1 for 240 channels on Express and Expression 1080 channels for Insight or x Enter where x is the page you want to set
337. ter the ID number This may be any value between 0 255 0 will disable the Remote Trigger The default value is 1 This value should match the value you set in Emphasis Visualization Step 8 Press Enter Note fyou make an error while changing any of these settings and you want to return to the previously stored values do not press S8 Simply turn the facepanel power off and on again The previous settings will be restored Step 9 Press S8 to save your settings and exit the Remote Macro configuration screen Step 10 Press S8 to save your settings and exit the main configuration screen EN Control Interfaces 207 Facepanel Configuration Once you have configured your system you should save a copy of the configuration to a 3 5 floppy disk To save your configuration to a floppy disk Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Power up or reboot the Facepanel When the prompt appears at startup press 1 2 3 to enter the configuration menu Insert a blank 3 5 floppy disk into the Facepanel disk drive Using the down arrow y key scroll to Backup to Floppy and press Enter The backup process begins immediately When complete remove the disk from the floppy drive and restart your Facepanel for normal operation To restore your configuration from a floppy disk Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Power up or reboot the Facepanel When the prompt appears at
338. ter you want to modify Press S1 Step y to select the step containing the channels you want to delete Press Channel z to select channel z You can use the And Thru and Except keys to select multiple channels Press Clear to delete the channels from the step Press Record Enter to record the effect Modify step timing and levels in an effect Step 1 Press Blind The Blind display defaults to cues Step 2 Press Cue x to select cue x If you wantto modify an effect recorded directly to a submaster press Sub x where x is the submaster you want to modify Step 3 Press S7 More Softkeys gt to view the effect step softkeys Step 4 Press S1 Step y to select step y You can also use And Thru and Except to select multiple steps Step 5 Press S2 Step Time z to assign a step time of z Step times can be set to 0 1 second through 9 59 minutes Step6 Press S3 In Dwell Out to set the In Dwell and Out times Each time you press S3 you will move from column to column within the In Dwell Out portion of the screen When the column is highlighted enter the time value you want for that setting In Dwell Out times can be set to 0 seconds through 9 59 minutes Step 7 Press S4 Low High to set the low and high levels of the step If channels in the step have levels assigned the low and high levels are proportional settings If there are no levels assigned to channels in
339. the step the low and high levels are absolute Each time you press S4 you will move from column to column within the Lo Hi portion of the screen When the column is highlighted enter the level you want for that setting Step 8 Repeat steps 4 through 7 to adjust more steps Step 9 Press Record Enter to record the effect Note Youcan use the arrow keys to move about the effect display instead of the Softkeys Blind Editing 151 152 Apply a random rate to an effect Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Press Blind The Blind display defaults to cues Press Cue x to select cue x If you want to modify an effect recorded directly to a submaster press Sub x where x is the submaster you want to modify Press lt S7 More Softkeys gt to view the effect step softkeys Press S7 Random Rate y Enter where y is the low random rate Rate values can be set to 0 2000 Press 2 Enter where z is the high random rate Press Record Enter to record the effect When the effect plays back it will use random rate settings between the low and high random rates entered here Insert a step in an effect Step 1 Press Blind The Blind display defaults to cues Step 2 Press Cue x to select cue x If you want to modify an effect recorded directly to a submaster press Sub x where x is the submaster you want to modify Step 3 Press lt S7 More Soft
340. they may have been recorded into a cue group focus point or submaster Captured channels remain at their set level until you release them Captured channel indicator Wheel 3 14 15 016 17 18 Selected channels on the wheel trackpad 38 39 40 041 42 43 44 45 O46 4 48 63 64 65 066 67 68 69 70 O71 72 73 74 7 Captured channels in red Channels with certain attribute settings see Channel Attributes page 58 respond to the Release command differently e Selected dependent channels are released with the first press of Release Selected independent channels are released with the second press of Release Unselected captured dependent channels are released with the first press of Release if there are no selected channels Unselected captured independent channels are released with the second press of Release If you had dependent and independent channels captured and some of those channels selected it s possible for you to have to press Release up to four times to release all captured channels First press releases selected dependent channels e Second press releases selected independent channels Third press releases unselected captured dependent channels Fourth press releases unselected captured independent channels Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Dimmer and Channel Check Often before a rehearsal or performance you will want to check that all your lights are working Emphasi
341. tion with submasters Step 4 Press Stage to return to the Stage display Playback Looks using the AB Fader Pair Channel faders are mastered by the AB Fader Pair when two scene operation is enabled This means that the top row of channel faders Scene A will be active when the A Fader in the AB Fader Pair is at the top of its travel farthest away from you Channel faders in the bottom row Scene B are active when the B Fader in the AB Fader Pair is at the bottom of its travel closest to you Note If you place the A Fader and B Fader off their respective zero position for example both at full both Scene A and Scene B become active In that case the channel fader at the highest level will control the output for that channel Reference Fold outs Playback Looks with Timing For long crossfades you may not want to crossfade manually between scenes You can set timing values for the upfade and downfade movement on the AB Fader Pair The crossfade is started by moving the AB Faders fully away from you or fully toward you The scene that is fading in will follow the upfade time and the scene that is fading out will follow the downfade time Crossfade scenes using timing Step 1 Slide the AB Fader Pair to the top of their travel away from you Step 2 Move the channel faders on Scene A to the levels you want in your first look Cue 1 Lighting levels will change on stage Step 3 Move the channel faders on Scene B to the
342. to change the dwell time for the selected submaster s Time Time Time to change the downfade time for the selected submaster s Type to change the type for the selected submaster s See Submaster Types page 121 S3 Rate to change the rate setting for the selected submaster s See Rate page 126 Label to add a label to the selected submaster s See Label page 130 Alternatively you can press the right and left arrow gt and keys to move through the Submaster List columns The prompt area will display instructions for setting each available attribute as you move from column to column Delete submasters within the Submaster List display Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Blind Editing Press Blind The Blind display defaults to cues Press Sub Enter to view submasters in Blind Press S2 Sub List to display the Submaster List Press S6 Delete Sub Press x to select submaster x You can also use And Thru and Except to select multiple submasters Press Enter to delete the selected submaster s To abort the delete command press Clear Press Enter to confirm that you really want to delete the submaster s 155 Submaster Spreadsheet In the Submaster Spreadsheet you can see channel levels for all pile on submasters on a page in a spreadsheet layout You cannot view the contents of effect or subroutine submasters but you c
343. to create exactly the effect combination you want See Create Macros page 182 for directions on creating macros and linking them to cues Modifying Rate and Size You can modify the rate and size of running dynamic effects on the fly using the X and Y wheels on Expression and Insight facepanels or the left and right halves of the trackpad on Express facepanels The rate and size parameters are automatically placed on the wheels EN Live Editing 105 106 trackpad when you view or edit a live dynamic effect They stay assigned to the wheels trackpad when you return to the Dynamic Effect Status display until you press Release or return to Stage or some other display Modify size and or rate of running dynamic effects Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Press Stage Press S8 Dynamic Effects to view the Dynamic Effects Status display Press S1 Select Effect n Enter where n is the number of the running effect in the Dynamic Effect Status display The size of the selected effect is placed on the Y Level wheel or the right half of the trackpad on your Facepanel Rate is placed on the X Rate wheel or the left half of the trackpad Effects placed on the wheels or trackpad are shown in light blue in the Dynamic Effect Status display Move the wheels or slide your finger up and down the appropriate side of the trackpad to adjust the size and rate of the selected effect s The DE Not Reco
344. to their low level and as each step fires it fades to its high level A negative effect sets inactive steps to their high level and as each step fires it fades to its low level Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Alternate Reverse Bounce Build When you add the Alternate attribute the effect will alternate between positive and negative playback The first pass will play back at the positive or negative setting of the effect and then begin to alternate in each subsequent pass through the steps E A Reverse effect runs its steps from last to first A bounce effect funs in one direction on the first pass and then back in the opposite direction on the next pass The direction it runs first depends on whether the reverse attribute has been set Nasaan ee A Build effect starts with all channels at their low level in a positive effect or at their high level in a negative effect As each step fires it does not fade out Each subsequent step builds on the last one until all steps are at their high level in a positive effect or low level in a negative effect All steps then fade out together and the sequence starts again The above attributes can all be assigned to an effect at the same time or in any combination This means you can create a Negative Alternate Reverse Bounce Build effect if you like X ex een As soon as you set an effect to Random all other attributes are removed except for Positive
345. to use SMPTE equipment with Expression and Insight facepanels the SMPTE option must have been installed at the factory Connect the facepanel to SMPTE equipment using an appropriate SMPTE cable Connect SMPTE equipment to the facepanel Step 1 Turn facepanel power off Step 2 Insert SMPTE cable into the connector on the back of the facepanel labeled SMPTE Step 3 Power up facepanel SMPTE facepanel connector Balanced SMPTE pinout for three pin XLR female Push 2 Signal 3 Signal Note This pinout is for balanced input For unbalanced input make the following connections in the input cable Connect XLR pin 1 and pin 2 together tying Common to Signal The unbalanced signal connects to XLR pin 3 Signal Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Using Remote Macros The facepanel provides remote macro inputs through the connector on the back panel labeled Remote Macro Remote Go on older Expression style facepanels A user supplied remote device connects to the facepanel via a 24 AWG aluminum shielded multi conductor cable with one twisted pair designated for each switch Belden 9507 S R PCV Insulated or Alpha 5477 80 Deg C 300 V PVC The cable connector at the remote device will vary depending on the device itself ETCNet2 Video Node DB 25 female Expression Insight DB 25 female Express DB 15 female 13 1 0000000000000 000000000000 25 14 Macro 1 901 Macr
346. tomatically jump to the center level of the frame you have selected Note For At At to function you must assign a frame table to the accessory channel For more information on assigning frame tables see Channel Attributes page 58 For more information on creating Frame Tables see Frame Tables page 97 90 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Capture EDMX Capture EDMX allows you to grab EDMX levels for selected channels which may be generated by another EDMX source on the network such as a guest console on a DMX Input Node or another ETCNet2 native controller and record them into a cue group etc EDMX addresses must be patched to Emphasis control channels in order to be captured In the case of multiple EDMX addresses patched to a single channel only the level from the first address will captured EDMX levels are captured regardless of priority or HTP state Capture EDMX levels for selected channels Step 1 Select channels using the numeric keypad Step 2 Press lt S7 More Softkeys gt S1 Capture EDMX in the Stage display or S8 Capture EDMX in the Blind display The EDMX levels are captured and the appropriate level is displayed on screen EN Live Editing 91 92 Captured channels and Release When you set channels to levels and then move on to select other channels the channels you have just set are displayed in red and become captured Captured channels have been set to levels using manual control and
347. try Pace E NNNM PA Key List Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual A Key List is provided to facilitate the entry of ETCLink commands and commands typically found on softkeys Use S6 Key List Help to get a help message for any command in the Key List EnterMac Except Expand TES PBA ka LIGA TEO ONE IE A LIN TET Hg ID LOG may IA Dos lad Ka ter PEZ peu Previous mag EE ESSI E Note The S7 More Softkeys gt command cannot be entered in a macro in the Macro Editing display If you are creating a macro to page to a certain group of softkeys use the Learn command to create the macro Create a macro in the Macro Editing display Step 1 Press Setup 6 Enter to display the Macro List Step 2 Type the macro number on the numeric keypad and press Enter Step 3 Press S1 Edit Macro to access the Macro Editing display Step 4 Press Facepanel keys to insert commands S8 Key List to insert softkey and ETCLink commands In the Key List use S4 Previous Page or S5 Next Page to move through the pages of available commands Commands are listed alphabetically not by softkey number Type the command number and press Enter Press S8 Return to return to the Macro Editing display Step 5 Press Enter Macro to record your macro Note To have a macro fire another macro simply press the macro key or the M key the macro number and Enter Linked macros must fall at the end of the li
348. ttend AT Sense Sect aes ate iba 86 Stage Display 0 cece eee 86 Fader DISplay ise ree Rx XR ine eet NG 87 Manual Control 0 0 0 00 0 ccc eee 88 Select Channels Dimmers and Fixtures 88 Seb Lev ls i ieee a it 91 Capture EDMX 0 c eee eee 93 Captured channels and Release 94 Dimmer and Channel Check 00005 95 SOO ALAN Be edes Nan Pe BS E eed s 96 ii Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Chapter 5 Moving Light Control eee eee 97 Dynamic Effects llle 101 Sneak pP ELE 109 Channel Faders Express Two Scene Insight only 110 GIOUPS PCM em 110 Park oux uen x ea ue x e ROC eee ad ann 111 CUES TET 114 Que TYPES iscek eem naka IER env EC 114 Record Cues 0 cee eee 115 Link FUNCIONS ovk ed ees Raa EX EARS 115 TEacklhg tiara EE Ra RE o ERR aee ade abe 116 Using Cues as Groups aaa 118 Stage Effects 0 0 0 c cece ee 119 Move Before Bright MBB 119 Submasters 0 teens 123 Submaster Types 20 00 cece eee eee 123 Record Submasters a 124 Using Load Sub 0 0 125 Using Submasters as Groups 126 Time Functions 00 eee eee eee 127 su P 127 Submasters 0 000 c ec eee eee 129 Special Functions 00 e eee 130 EXCODE a taria AA wien edie Des 130 SOO ok aide aklan da KA AA ADAN 130 Update esie dud ex BANNA eda cae 131 Del
349. ttings you might want you will need to run a cue along with the submaster To have them play back at the desired time in your show you can fire the dynamic effect manually or link the dynamic effect to a cue for automatic playback Some playback options are listed below e Manually via Subs Record the dynamic effect to a submaster The submaster bump button becomes the on off button for the dynamic effect The submaster s fader has no function when the sub contains a dynamic effect When the submaster is active the LED blinks at a fast rate Using this method you can simply activate the dynamic effect as needed with any other manually set levels cues or submasters as the base e Manually via Cues Record the dynamic effect to a cue Press Cue n where n is the number of the dynamic effect cue to make cue n the next cue for playback Press Go on the fader pair you want to play the cue in You can pile on dynamic effects by playing back other dynamic effect cues without clearing the fader pair Dynamic effects will continue to run until the fader pair is cleared background fades are cleared or another dynamic effect cue with the same fixture attributes is played back e Linking a Sub You can link submasters directly to cues See the Emphasis Console User Manual for directions on linking submasters to cues Linking a Macro For complex cue sequences you may find that linking a macro to acue allows you
350. tual facepanel in Emphasis Visualization press Setup 1 Enter to display the Systems Settings menu Step 2 Press 5 Enter to choose Default Fader Clear Time Step 3 Using the numeric keypad on the Facepanel or the virtual facepanel type in the desired default fader clear time and press Enter Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Default Sneak Time The sneak function allows you to fade channel levels over a specified time period rather than setting the new level immediately or manually setting the level with the level wheel or trackpad See Sneak page 107 for more information The default sneak time is five seconds The default sneak time can be set to anything from zero to 99 59 minutes following the guidelines in Default Fade Time page 52 Change the default sneak time Step 1 On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis Visualization press Setup 1 Enter to display the Systems Settings menu Step 2 Press 6 Enter to choose Default Sneak Time Step 3 Using the numeric keypad on the Facepanel or the virtual facepanel type in the desired default sneak time and press Enter Number of Effect Step Channels In Emphasis you can place up to 1 000 channels the default value for this setting in each step within an effect see Blind Effects page 149 If you do not plan to use this capacity you can reduce the number of channels allowed in each step Reducing this number may improve t
351. type the number of frames or options that the device has Press Enter The table will autofill the start center and ending DMX values for all available frames for the device Press S3 Frame Label and then type the number of the frame you want to label Press Enter Type the name of the indicated frame and Press lt Enter gt or press lt F7 gt to move to the next frame label 69 70 54 AM Table 1 HR Spots Frame Number Label Starting Value Center Value Ending Value Frame 1 F Frome 16 23 Frame 32 39 Frome 48 55 Frome t 64 1 Frome 80 87 Frame 96 103 Frame 112 119 Frame 128 135 Frame 144 151 Frame 160 167 Frame 12 176 183 Frame 12 192 199 Frame 208 215 Frame 224 231 247 DONPUAWN Edit Frame Table Values Step 1 From an open Frame table press lt S7 More Softkeys gt and then choose between S1 Start Values S2 Center Values or S3 Ending Values Step 2 Type the new DMX value for the respective field Step 3 Press Enter The cursor will automatically jump from start value to center value to end value After the end value it will ask you to select another frame Note Frame Tables are not referenced data When recorded they are recorded as DMX values only not as frames Therefore changes to Frame Tables will not automatically update any recorded data i e cues focus points attributed to those tables Any recorded data associated with a changed Frame Table will need to
352. u can also stop and start the clock easily from within the Time Code Events display Set and activate the internal time clock Step 1 Press Setup 7 Enter to view the Time Code Events display Step 2 Press S1 Internal Clock to set the internal clock start time Step 3 Using the Facepanel numeric keypad enter the time in hours minutes seconds frames You do not have to enter leading zeros For example to enter a time of 00 03 45 00 press 8 4 5 0 0 The keypad corner displays your entry as you type Make sure the correct time is displayed in the keypad corner before pressing Enter You can also use the and keys to adjust timing Enter zero to start the clock at the beginning of the time code program Step 4 Press S2 Clock Enable to start the clock running at the time set in step 3 This softkey will toggle to S2 Clock Disable when the clock is running You can view the current clock time in the upper left corner of the screen The time will update in the TimeCa field of the screen Internal time is displayed in red Step 5 Press S2 Clock Disable to stop the internal clock To start over again repeat steps 2 through 4 to reset and start the clock Using External Time Code Sometimes the timing signal is not present even though the Time Code Input is enabled When this happens Waiting for Input appears in the upper left corner of the Time Code Events display As soon as external timecod
353. u want to include in the template When you are done press S8 Return to return to the Dynamic Template List Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Frame Table List The frame table list allows you to catalog and edit information when using accessories such as color scrollers or effects wheels By naming and defining the range of possibilities you can enhance the speed and accuracy of including these devices in your show Frame Tables are a generated list of DMX values relative to the options available in your device The information is displayed in a table indicating the name of each frame or other option as well as the DMX value to reach the start center and end of that frame For example if you have a color scroller with 20 frames of equal size you can quickly formulate a table for that device name each frame individually and see at what DMX value each frame begins centers and ends 02 44 PM Lobel Table Label HR Spots HL Spots Antepro wash DS Wash US Wash DS Special Gobo Create Frame Tables Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 System Settings On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis Visualization press Setup 1 1 Enter to access the Moving Light Functions menu Press 6 Enter to display the Frame Table List Type a number to indicate the new table and press S3 Edit Table The new frame table will open Press S1 Number of Frames and then
354. ual channels see LTP page 47 Changes made in the Fader display are made live and will affect the stage output Unlike the Stage display the Fader display is not affected by the Grandmaster fader or by inhibitive submasters see Submaster Types page 121 OS 006 07 08 09 10 011 12 13 14 15 016 17 18 19 20 021 22 23 2 29 30 031 32 33 34 35 036 37 38 39 0 2 3 45 046 55 056 57 58 59 60 061 62 63 64 65 O66 67 68 69 70 074 7 73 80 081 8 84 85 086 8 3 90 92 93 94 95 096 97 05 106 0 08 09 10 EE 17 18 19 20 121 Up Down Wait Link Follow Rate Label S1 S2 S3 S4 ss S6 57 S8 Fadeout Backarndl Previous Next Select More sur update Ibuerriaesi Fage E Pose B Fader A Fixture Expression Insight display shown Changing display pages If you are using more channels than can be displayed on a single display you can use softkeys S4 Previous Page and S5 Next Page to view more channels You can also use the arrow keys to change pages left arrow jumps to the first page of channels up arrow 1 displays the previous page down arrow 4 displays the next page and right arrow gt jumps to the last page of channels Note On Express facepanels you may need to press S7 More Softkeys to find S4 Previous Page and S5 Previous Page Emphasis Console User Interface 31 32 Flexichannel When you enable Flexichannel only channels used somewhere in your show will appear on the Emphasis Console Stage Blind an
355. ue on the cue list runs in the A B fader Ifacue number is sent the specified cue runs on the A B fader l facue number is sent and 2 is sent as the list entry that cue runs on the C D fader If cue Ois sent and 2 is sent as the list entry the command presses C D Go The pending cue runs in the C D fader You may also press A B Go by sending Go Cue 0 1 Stop The Stop command by itself holds all fades in both fader pairs e If Stop is sent with a cue number and a list entry of 1 only the cue running in the A B fader holds e If Stop is sent with a cue number and a list entry of 2 only the cue running in the C D fader holds The cue number field is ignored but must be included if a list entry is sent Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Resume The Resume command by itself resumes all holding fades in both fader pairs f Resume is sent with a cue number and a list entry of 1 only a cue holding in the A B fader resumes f Resume is sent with a cue number and a list entry of 2 only the cue holding in the C D fader resumes The cue number field is ignored but must be included if a list entry is sent Fire The Fire command executes a specified macro Macro number must be in the range 1 127 If no macro is specified or if the macro number is out of range the command is ignored Emphasis may send the following MSC commands to MIDI devices If MSC output is
356. ult settings to reflect this in the Emphasis Visualization Emphasis mode Setup menu See Setting the Facepanel Type on the Server page 22 for more information Note If you have a show open and only the Emphasis mode is available you are operating in Show Mode See the Emphasis Visualization User Manual Load Show for information on leaving Show Mode The Emphasis Server is provided fully configured from the factory It should not be treated as a regular desktop computer The following modifications to the factory setup are known to cause problems of varying severity Screen savers Do not enable screen savers on the Emphasis server They can cause unexpected behavior in your system Power settings are set to never turn off the monitor s or the hard disk The system is also set to never go into standby mode on its own The Sleep button on the keyboard is also disabled Do not put your Emphasis Server into standby or sleep mode while running Emphasis software Microsoft Windows XP appearance Windows XP appearance settings are graphics heavy and will impact the performance speed of your system The appearance settings are set to minimize the impact of the operating system on performance e View contents while dragging windows This setting is also graphics heavy and will impair the performance speed of your system e Wallpaper on the desktop Wallpapers are graphics heavy and will impact the performance speed of your syst
357. unctions Playback controls Two timed manual fader pairs e Two Go buttons Two Hold buttons Two Back buttons e Two Rate buttons e Two Clear buttons e 108 submasters e Programmable Grandmaster Blackout function Level wheel e Rate wheel Eight softkeys to streamline operations Timed control Internal or external clock 12 hour or 24 hour timing e References sunrise and sunset with astronomical clock Up to 500 user created Real Time Programs E Specifications 286 Display functions Two VGA video outputs Extensive online Help displays available for all functions Stage Blind Fader Effects Tracksheet e Spreadsheets Cues Submasters Groups and Focus Points e Patch Park e Setup e Flexichannel displays only recorded channels e Expand Channel attributes Submaster functions Ten pages of 108 recorded submasters each Fully overlapping channel assignments e Proportional channel levels The bump buttons for all submasters may be enabled disabled or placed in solo mode as a group or individually Integral LEDs on all submasters e Programmable fade and wait times Live and programmed rate control 36 submasters for either overlapping pile on or inhibitive operation All submasters programmable with effects or subroutines Update function e Control keypad features e Submaster labels e Spreadsheet editing e Submaster list e Superm
358. undesirable behavior in systems that have suffered an unexpected or unintentional shutdown and are using ETCNet2 DMX Nodes configured for Hold Last Look functionality The new Disable EDMX on Powerup and Show Read feature allows you to configure your system to startup and load shows with EDMX output disabled You can then establish the state of your console play back a specific cue for example and enable EDMX afterward This will cause the ETCNet2 DMX Nodes to transition to an active state without fading to black Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Disable Enable EDMX on Startup and Show Load system setting Step 1 In Emphasis Visualization in the Emphasis mode Setup menu click IO The IO Settings dialog box will open EDMX Priority I 0 ESMPTE Receive I EMIDI Receive I EMIDI Transmit 2 Remote Trigger ID E EDMX Output Ranges Edit Step 2 Click to select Disable EDMX on Powerup and Show Read Checked EDMX Disabled unchecked EDMX enabled When this box is checked EDMX will be disabled whenever the system starts up and again when any show file is loaded Checking this box does not change the current state of EDMX transmission This setting remains active on the Emphasis Server until it is changed it is not stored with any show file When the system is started or a show is loaded and EDMX is disabled the warning message EDMX Disabled blinks in red on the console display where the Grandmaster status
359. up Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Using Manual Playback The Manual Mode Pause Mode and Step softkeys allow you to manually control playback of time code events without a time code source enabled Another feature of Manual Mode and Pause Mode is that they suspend playback when time code is present Use Manual Mode or Pause Mode to edit your events without continued playback of those events Use Manual Mode Pause Mode and Step Step 1 Press Setup 7 Enter to view the Time Code Events display Step 2 Press S3 Manual Mode to suspend time code input and reset to the first recorded time code event S4 Pause Mode to suspend time code input at the current time code event Step 3 Press S5 Step to advance through the event list one event at a time Step 4 Press S3 Manual Mode to resume time code input if you are in Manual Mode S4 Pause Mode to resume time code input if you are in Pause Mode EN Control Interfaces 225 Emphasis Serial Button Protocol Emphasis Serial Button Protocol SBP allows you to send commands to your Emphasis Control System through a serial connection Commands Commands are either quoted strings strings of digits or keywords with associated arguments The argument types are specific to each keyword A quoted string will pass each of the characters to Emphasis Console as un interpreted characters This is the same as typing on a keyboard plugged into a Fa
360. vailable attributes and encoder assignments are displayed in the fixture box You can set levels for channels within a fixture by direct selection as well Fixtur 1 OS 006 07 08 3 18 19 20 021 22 23 2 Fixture 29 30 031 32 33 3 37 38 39 40 0 gt 42 44 45 O46 47 48 channels 79 80 081 82 4 85 086 39 92 93 94 95 096 97 98 05 106 07 08 O9 10 111 12 13 5 116 17 18 19 20 121 22 23 2 Fixture 1 Tupe Fixture Box valve NG B Device Cue Type Up Down Wait Link Follow Rate Label xF 5 Cues left 9994 1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S S S8 Fadeout Backarndll Previous More Y sur FA 553 Fage E B once A Fixture Encoder assignment Fixture attribute 16 Bit data Current page Control fixtures using the encoders Expression Insight 3 or 2x with MLM Step 1 Press S8 Fixture x where x is the fixture number you want to select Use And Thru and Except to select multiple fixtures The fixture box will be displayed Step 2 Press Focus Point Enter to prepare the fixture for control Step 3 Press the page keys to move from one encoder page to the next Step 4 Spin the encoder corresponding to the attribute you want to change Attributes assigned to TX and TY are controlled by a serial trackball or other pointing device connected to the Facepanel or MLM Step 5 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have completed all the changes you want to make EN Live Editing 95 Control fixtures with the arrow keys Express amp Expression Insight
361. val 10 min Keep Back Up FilesS Unchecked Document Loading Reload last document on startup Checked e Default to Read Only a Unchecked Emphasis Obsession Tab System PAA 0 e Connect to Current Server Unchecked Show EDMX from Current Server Checked Note SYSID changes must be made in the System Manager login and in BOTH applications If needed change the System ID in Emphasis Console first then Emphasis Visualization then reboot your system Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Emphasis Console Defaults The following are set in Emphasis Console only These settings are found in the main window Options menu View the Emphasis Console Main window Step 1 Minimize Emphasis Visualization Step 2 Move the mouse to the bottom of the screen so the Windows task bar appears Step 3 Maximize Emphasis Console in the task bar Language English System ID System 0 System Name 0 cee eee eee Untitled Emphasis Console Note SYSID changes must be made in the System Manager login and in BOTH applications If needed change the System ID in Emphasis Console first then Emphasis Visualization then reboot your system System Defaults 237 Expression Facepanel Defaults ETCNet2 e Emphasis Server System IDA 0 e Emphasis Server System IDB unde
362. ve fixtures 1 5 selected and when Only is pressed the keypad will wait for new values for these fixtures Fixture 1 Thru 5 Full 6 will cause fixtures 1 5 to be deselected and fixture 6 to be selected instead Concepts In Emphasis Visualization you can create groups of fixtures conventional or moving light fixtures These are called concepts and are found in the Shortcut bar Use concepts to select groups of channels and fixtures then set levels either with the mouse or with the Emphasis Console features described in the next section See the Emphasis Visualization User Manual for more information on creating concepts and setting levels within Visualization EN Live Editing 87 Channel selection in Flexichannel In Flexichannel mode see Flexichannel page 32 channel selection using the Thru key changes slightly In Flexichannel only channels used in the show are visible on screen When you use the Thru key in Flexichannel only visible channels will be selected To select all channels in the range regardless of their visibility press Thru twice lt Channel gt x Thru Thru 2 Channels selected with lt Channel gt 7 0 Thru 1 0 1 Link Follow Rate Label Preset Cues 1 52 3 S4 S5 ES 57 MES eem hus uu Pose gung PA Picture ype Up Down Wait E ee left 9970 Chan 104 Channels selected with lt Channel gt 7 0 Thru Thru 1 0 1 Cue Type Up Down Wait Link Follow R
363. vents Recording and editing the Time Code Program As you initially create or edit a time code program events are not automatically recorded until you sort or exit the Time Code Events display If time code is enabled and being received or the internal clock is running Emphasis can run events as you edit them Edits are held in a buffer until you sort or exit the Time Code Events display so the event that runs may not perform your changes To force the changes to take effect without leaving the Time Code Events display press S7 More Softkeys S8 Sort Note Youcan also press S6 Learn Mode S6 Learn Mode to quickly reset the event pointer and record your changes To edit an existing event use the direct entry method described above You can edit events in ranges using the And and Thru keys when selecting events EN Control Interfaces 221 222 Move time code events Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Press Setup 7 Enter to view the Time Code Events display Press lt S7 More Softkeys gt S3 Move Event Press x Enter to select event x Use the And and Thru keys to select multiple events Using the Facepanel numeric keypad enter the new time for the event in hours minutes seconds frames You do not have to enter leading zeros For example to enter a time of 00 03 45 00 press 8 4 5 0 0 The keypad corner displays your entry as you type Make sure the correct time is
364. ware onto your Emphasis Server you will see an advisory indicating that the library indices are being rebuilt the first time each user type logs in This is normal behavior Emphasis User This user account is not password protected and is the default user when Emphasis launches on startup When this user type is selected access is limited mainly to Emphasis Other applications and computer components are hidden When this user account is selected critical program files may not be deleted this does not include show files and no other software may be installed NCE User This user account is primarily for adjusting settings in the Network Configuration Editor NCE application There is no password protection for this user type When this user account is selected critical program files may not be deleted this does not include show files and no other software may be installed System Manager The System Manager has access to set the password for this user account as well as partial Administrative rights installation of software system maintenance Facepanel code and all Emphasis and NCE user privileges Technical Services This user type is reserved for ETC Technical Services and is password protected To change the System Manager password Step 1 Exit Emphasis and login as the System Manager Step 2 In the Windows Start menu click All Programs then click User Accounts The User Accounts dialog will open Step 3 Under
365. when thinking about how your cue data is stored edited and what affect it has on playback Preset Typically each cue you store will take a complete picture of the output of the system and store it as the cue you designate There are ways to modify how much of the stage picture you store see Record Cues page 113 for more information This philosophy is called preset In a preset system each cue stores data for every channel regardless of whether that channel s level is moving Each cue is a complete picture of the intended stage look and each cue is played back in its entirety When you edit channels in cues you need to keep in mind that you are typically editing only one cue at a time If you want to change a channel or channels level in a series of consecutive cues you can either edit each cue one at a time edit using the Spreadsheet display see Spreadsheet page 139 or Tracksheet display see Tracksheet page 142 or use a Track Record to accomplish this task Tracking In the Emphasis Control System tracking refers to channels that are recorded at the same level from cue to cue those channels appear to track from one cue to the next Track editing is a very powerful tool and requires that you understand some basic terms A track edit can make very significant changes throughout your show so use it carefully A Track record will change the current cue and subsequent cues for channels that remain at the same level unti
366. witch for communication between the Facepanel and Server A hub or switch is required for network connections between Facepanels Servers and other network devices such as ETCNet2 Nodes and Unison Architectural Controls In all cases networking equipment and cables must meet or exceed the Cat 5 standard To connect your system devices Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Place your Facepanel and Server on a stable flat surface The Server may be placed flat horizontally on the table or on its edge vertically The Server s CD tray is designed to work in either orientation Connect the Facepanel Twisted Pair jack to the Server using UTP cable through a hub or switch Connect DMX cables to the Facepanel DMX outputs Note You may also connect DMX cables to Nodes if available Step 4 Connect RFU cable to the Facepanel RFU connector Note You may also connect your RFU cable to a Node if available Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 System Overview If you have ETCLink in your system the cable must be connected to an ETCLink enabled DMX Node The ETCLink connector on your Facepanel is not supported in Emphasis Connect any MIDI or SMPTE cables to the appropriate connectors on the Facepanel Connect the Dell keyboard and mouse that came with the Server to the appropriate connectors on the Server These connections are colour coded You may also have a second keyboard connected to the Facepanel if d
367. y a proportion and a profile to any dimmer You can select channels and set them to levels while you are viewing the patch This way you can see the affect of applied proportions and profiles Note Do not apply proportions or profiles to 16 Bit channels This will yield unexpected results Pro portional Patching A proportion applied to a dimmer caps the output to the assigned level For example if you set a proportion of 80 to a dimmer that dimmer will only output 80 when its patched channel is set to full 100 Because this is a proportional setting when the channel is set to 50 the dimmer will output 40 half of 80 Proportional patching can be used when you need to match dimmers with different wattage lamps in them or if you want to keep a dimmer or dimmers from ever reaching its full output Set a proportional dimmer output level Step 1 On your Emphasis Facepanel or from the virtual facepanel in Emphasis Visualization press Patch to access the Patch display Step 2 Press S7 More Softkeys gt S1 Dim x where x is the dimmer number to select the dimmer You can use And Thru and Except to select ranges of dimmers Step 3 Press At y where y is the two digit proportional level Enter a zero before single digit levels i e 08 Use Full to remove a proportional level from a dimmer Dimmer Profiles You can assign a profile to a dimmer in the Emphasis Console Patch display A p
368. y console displays They are identified for that display at the bottom of the screen You activate a display s softkeys by pressing S1 S8 When softkey S7 More Softkeys is available there are more pages of softkeys for that display Press S7 More Softkeys to access those additional pages G NAVIGATION KEYS Use navigation keys to get around in console displays and move through console menus CLUSTER B In general the keys in this cluster pinpoint the elements that make up the structure of your show You will use these keys when recording or editing groups cues or submasters Some allow you to change the properties of recorded elements such as playback timing and relationships with other elements The Only key in this cluster is a selection key that allows you to pinpoint parts of elements such as attribute categories and individual attributes of moving light fixtures 7 NUMERIC KEYPAD The numeric keypad is for numerical entry This grouping also includes the Enter and Clear keys Press Enter to complete operations Press Clear to cancel operations Use and to increment and decrement through lists levels and timing 8 CLUSTER C Use these keys when editing channel levels and lists Use the Thru And and Except keys to work with multiple selections and ranges Use At when making assignments such as when setting channel levels Use the Full and Level keys to assign pre defined levels there is no n
369. y recorded data i e cues focus points attributed to those tables Any recorded data associated with a changed Frame Table will need to be re written to accomodate for the changes made to the frame table Palettes If you want to create a quick color select you can use palettes Palettes are stored in Emphasis Visualization as a shortcut in the Emphasis mode They are not referenced by cues and submasters but do provide a quick way to recall colors See the Emphasis Visualization User Manual for more information on palettes Only and Solo The Only and S3 Solo functions can be used with fixtures to limit selections and record commands to the attribute categories This is useful if you only want to set the color channels of a fixture to a focus point or if you only want to record position channels to a focus point for example You can also use S3 Solo to step through your fixtures adjusting them individually then return to the whole stage look Note Only is found on S4 Only in Stage Blind and Fader on Express facepanels 98 Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Select and adjust fixtures using S3 Solo Step 1 Press S8 Fixture x S7 More Softkeys gt S3 Solo to select fixture x and force all other intensities temporarily to zero Step 2 Adjust fixture x Step 3 Press to select the next fixture or to select the previous fixture Step 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have c
370. yed in grey Dynamic settings displayed in purple Emphasis Console v2 0 0 User Manual Create a subroutine cue Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 Press Blind The Blind display defaults to cues Press lt Cue gt x where x is the cue you want to use Press Type 4 Enter to set the type to Subroutine Press 1 to set Step 1 Press the right arrow gt key to move to the step contents column Press y where y is a recorded cue number to set the cue number referenced in step 1 Press right arrow gt key to move to the fade type column Press e 1 to set a Crossfade fade type This setting overrides the fade type recorded with the referenced cue 2 to set an Allfade fade type This setting overrides the fade type recorded with the referenced cue 8 to set a Blocking fade type This setting overrides the fade type recorded with the referenced cue Press Clear to set a dynamic fade type The dynamic fade type displayed in purple follows the fade type stored with the cue Press right arrow gt key to set the Upfade time This can be fixed dynamic or manual Type a time value or press Clear to set dynamic or manual fade time The dynamic fade time displayed in purple follows the fade time stored with the cue Press right arrow gt key to set the Downfade time This can be fixed dyn
371. ys two groupings of fixtures like odd even 1 3 delays groupings of every third fixture and so on 5 Enter to select Distance Percent 96 of distance determines how long each fixture or group of fixtures waits for its turn to run when the delay relationship is not set to All For example four fixtures in an even delay relationship performing a pan tilt circle with a distance of 25 will appear to follow the leader around the circle 6 Enter to select Fade The fade setting modifies how the fixtures start and end dynamic effects Press 0 Enter to set no fade which causes the fixtures to jump to their starting positions when the dynamic effect is activated 1 Enter to fade in by size 2 Enter to fade in by rate B Enter to fade in by size and rate 7 Enter to select the Number of Loops A value of 0 causes the dynamic effect to run infinitely Any other setting will cause the dynamic to execute that number of cycles then stop at the end of the final cycle 8 Enter to select Form Form settings can be used to constrain pan or tilt in a dynamic effect 100 is the normal value 0 99 will compress pan 101 200 will compress tilt 9 or 1 0 or 1 1 Enter to select the Size Rate or Form Channel These three settings allow you to assign any console control channel to control the size rate or form of this dynamic effect You can then record levels for these Emphas

Electronic Theatre Controls Emphasis Lighting Control System User manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents